JP7470991B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

In conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines that determine whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a starting condition.

Some of these gaming machines are designed to control the game to a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state after the special game ends (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2018-057968 A

However, the problem with the gaming machines described in the above patent documents was that the gameplay was not very interesting.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine of the present invention is provided with: a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the winning of a gaming medium in a first start area or an openable second start area provided in a gaming area; a special game execution means capable of executing the special game when a variable display of a pattern executed based on the result of the determination becomes a special result; a game state control means capable of controlling to a predetermined game state in which the special game is not executed and a specific game state different from the predetermined game state; and a presentation control means capable of executing a variable presentation according to the result of the determination, the specific game state including a first specific game state controlled via the special game, a second specific game state controlled without the special game, and a third specific game state controlled without the special game, and when the variable display becomes a second failure result different from the first failure result, it is possible to control to the third specific game state for a predetermined period of time, The third specific game state is a game state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting area than in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the presentation control means is capable of executing a suggestive presentation suggesting the possibility of being controlled to the second specific game state during the execution of the variable presentation, and during a predetermined period of a predetermined variable presentation in which the suggestive presentation is executed and an announcement is made that the special game will not be executed, there is a period during which the suggestive presentation is executed but no period during which the suggestive presentation is not executed, and during a predetermined period of a predetermined variable presentation in which the suggestive presentation is executed and an announcement is made that the special game will be executed, there is a period during which the suggestive presentation is executed and a period during which the suggestive presentation is not executed, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a launch suggestion announcement suggesting the launch of a game medium into a specific area of the game area in the specific game state, and when the second starting area in the third specific game state is in a closed state, the launch suggestion announcement is not executed .

The present invention makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of games.

FIG. 2 is an oblique view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine. 2 is an oblique view of the rear side of the gaming machine. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a block diagram of the entire gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of various storage areas of a main RAM. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing main processing in a main control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an initial setting process in the main control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing input control processing in the main control board. A diagram showing the first starting hole detection switch input processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the second starting hole detection switch input processing on the main control board. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing specific area detection switch input processing in the main control board. A diagram showing the special diagram special electric control processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the special pattern memory determination process in the main control board. A diagram showing the jackpot determination process on the main control board. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a big win determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol determination table. A diagram showing the special chart variation pattern determination process in the main control board. A figure showing an example of a normal special chart variation pattern determination table. A figure showing an example of a special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for normal time reduction and second special time reduction. A figure showing an example of a special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for normal time reduction. A figure showing an example of a special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for normal time reduction. A figure showing an example of a special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for normal time reduction. A figure showing an example of a special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for the first special time reduction. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pre-determination table. A diagram showing special pattern change processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the special pattern stopping processing on the main control board. A figure showing an example of a large prize opening control data judgment table. A diagram showing the jackpot game processing on the main control board. A diagram showing small win game processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the jackpot game ending processing on the main control board. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a game status setting table. A diagram showing the game state referenced at the end of a big win game that does not involve a small win game. A diagram showing the game state referred to at the end of a big win game that goes through a small win game. A diagram showing the general-purpose power control processing on the main control board. A diagram showing normal pattern change processing on the main control board. 11 is a diagram showing an example of various determination tables used in the normal power control process; FIG. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various drive sources after changing settings. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various driving sources after confirming settings. 1 is a comparative table of operation of various drive sources at various operation timings. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an initial setting process in a main control board of the first modified example. A figure showing the RWM clearing process in the main control board of the first modified example. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various driving sources during preparation for clearing the RWM. 1 is a comparative table of operation of various drive sources at various operation timings. This is a timing chart when a normal time-saving gaming state occurs. 13 is a timing chart showing when the normal time-saving gaming state ends. 13 is a timing chart from before the start to the end of the first special time-saving gaming state. A diagram showing the main processing of the performance control unit. A diagram showing timer interrupt processing of the performance control unit. 1 is a mode flow showing the transition of game modes. A figure showing the presentation mode that is set when transitioning from a time-saving gaming state to a normal gaming state. A diagram showing the command analysis process of the performance control unit. A diagram showing the icon change performance decision process of the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change scenario determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the light-emitting effect when a prize is won by the effect control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a winning light-emitting effect pattern determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing the predictive consecutive performance decision processing of the performance control unit. A figure showing an example of a look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table. A figure showing an example of a look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table. A diagram showing the variable performance pattern determination process in the performance control unit. A figure showing an example of a variable performance pattern determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing the special time-saving performance processing of the performance control unit. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an execution period of a suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of being controlled to a first special time-saving gaming state. A figure showing an example of a presentation when a pre-reading presentation is executed during normal game play. A figure showing an example of a presentation when the pre-reading presentation ends midway during normal game play. A figure showing an example of a presentation when a change presentation is executed after transitioning to an entry battle mode. This figure shows an example of a presentation in which a jackpot occurs in the final variable presentation of the battle mode. A figure showing an example of the presentation when the normal time-saving game state in which the battle mode has been entered ends. A figure showing an example of the presentation when the normal time-saving gaming state in which the Ranbu mode is set ends. This figure shows an example of a presentation when a small win occurs with the remaining reserved second special symbol when transitioning to normal game mode. A figure showing an example of the presentation when a small win game is executed in Chou Ranbu mode. A figure showing an example of a presentation when the time-saving game state is interrupted as a result of a small win game in Ranbu mode. A figure showing an example of a presentation when a special time-saving presentation is executed. A figure showing an example of a presentation when a customer waiting state occurs upon transition to the first special time-saving game state. A figure showing an example of a presentation when a variable presentation is executed after transitioning to the first special time-saving game state. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating an example of a presentation when the countdown mode is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the presentation when the countdown mode is executed. A figure showing an example of a presentation when a variable presentation is executed after transitioning to the first special time-saving game state. A figure showing an example of the presentation when the first special time-saving game state in which infinite mode is set ends. A figure showing an example of the presentation when power is restored during normal gaming mode after the first special time-saving gaming mode has ended. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a game status setting table in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern variation processing of the main control board in the second embodiment. A diagram showing a game flow in a modified example related to a time-saving gaming state.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to Figures 1 to 3. Figure 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, Figure 2 is a perspective view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine 1, and Figure 3 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is provided with an outer frame 2, a gaming board mounting frame 3 that is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 that is rotatably supported relative to the gaming board mounting frame 3, and a gaming board 5 that has a gaming area 5a formed therein through which gaming balls (gaming media) flow down.

The outer frame 2 is made up of a rectangular base frame 2a with a central opening in the front-rear direction, to which a decorative plate 2b is attached at the lower front. The outer frame 2 is fixed to the island equipment of the amusement arcade via fastening members (e.g., nails, fasteners, etc.).

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism 6 at one horizontal end, and is supported rotatably with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door relative to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, making it possible to perform maintenance on various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one horizontal end, and is supported rotatably with the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated like a door relative to the game board mounting frame 3, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-to-rear direction is formed in the approximate center near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or acrylic plate) is attached to cover the opening 8 from the rear, making it possible to see the play area 5a through this opening 8 and transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there are provided an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having multiple decorative LEDs, an upper tray 11 for storing multiple game balls, such as game balls paid out from a payout device 95 described below based on the establishment of the awarding conditions, a lower tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and flow into the overflow ball flow path described below, and a launch operation device 13 that can be operated to launch the game balls.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations spaced apart on the top of the glass frame 4, and output BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to create a sound (music, voice) effect. In addition, multiple frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and create a lighting effect by changing the direction of light irradiation and the color of light emitted by each lamp (LED). In addition, the frame lighting device 10 is equipped with an alarm LED 10a that is controlled to light up/blink when the glass frame 4 opens or a payout abnormality occurs in which game balls cannot be paid out from the payout device 95.

The bottom surface of the storage section 11a of the upper tray 11 for the game balls slopes downward toward the direction (right direction) of the launch operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward slope. When the game balls stored in the storage section 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the ball feed solenoid 11b operates to send the game balls out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3.

In addition, in the central front part of the upper tray 11, a performance button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see Figure 1 or Figure 2) are arranged side by side and function as input devices for performing decision operations and selection operations related to various performances described below.

The effect button device 16 is provided with an effect button 17 capable of performing operations such as decision operations (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a for detecting the operation of the effect button 17, an effect button drive device 17b equipped with a button drive motor for changing the effect button 17 between a normal state and a protruding state positioned higher than the normal state and a button vibration motor for changing the effect button 17 between the normal state and a vibration state in which the effect button 17 vibrates in a predetermined manner, and an effect button light-emitting LED 17c for changing the effect button 17 between an off state and a lit state in which the effect button 17 emits light in a predetermined manner, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

The selection button device 18 is provided with a cross key 19 (upper button 191A, left button 192A, lower button 193A, right button 194A) that can be used to perform operations such as selection, and a cross key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 5) for detecting the operation of the cross key 19, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

In addition, a lending operation unit 20 is provided on the right side of the upper tray 11, which allows the lending of game balls and the return of storage media such as cards that store the remaining balance. When the lending button 20a on the lending operation unit 20 is operated, a ball lending machine (not shown) installed next to the gaming machine 1 subtracts the remaining balance stored in the storage media and lends out game balls, and when the return button 20b on the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the storage media is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed to receive game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and guide them to the lower tray 12. In addition, a full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 5) is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path to detect when the lower tray 12 is full of game balls, and while the full detection switch 32a detects that the lower tray 12 is full, the payout device 95, which will be described later, stops paying out game balls.

The launch operation device 13 is provided with a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a launch handle 15 rotatably mounted on the base 14, a touch sensor 15a (see FIG. 5) that detects whether the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, and a launch volume 15b (see FIG. 5) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the launch handle 15. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, the ball feed solenoid 11b is activated and the game balls are sent out one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 is provided with a game board mounting portion for mounting the game board 5, a launching device 26 (see FIG. 5) for launching game balls toward the game area 5a, a locking mechanism (not shown) for locking the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 in a closed state, and an opening detection switch 31a (see FIG. 5) for detecting the opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4.

The game board mounting section 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape that opens to the front at approximately the center near the top of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. At the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting section 25, an opening that opens in the front-to-rear direction is provided, and through this opening, various devices and the like provided on the back side of the game board 5 face the rear of the gaming machine 1.

The launching device 26 is provided with a launching member for launching the game ball, a launching solenoid 28b (see FIG. 5) for driving the launching member, a launching rail that slopes upward from the launching member toward the lower left end of the game board, and a stopper that stops the game ball at the launch position, which is the lower end of the slope of the launching rail. Then, when the game ball sent out by the ball feed solenoid 11b (see FIG. 5) is received at the launch position, the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launching member.

The locking mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting part 25, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the game board mounting frame 3 is unlocked and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

Curved inner and outer rails 35 and 36 are provided near the outer edge of the game board 5, and the area surrounded by the inner and outer rails 35 and 36 forms a game area 5a into which game balls can flow. A launched ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner and outer rails 35 and 36, which guides game balls launched by the launching device 26 to the upstream part of the game area 5a. An outlet 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a to guide the game balls that have flowed down outside the game area (to the collection part of the game board mounting frame 3).

A decorative frame 40 is provided in the approximate center of the play area 5a, which is a frame-shaped area known as a center case that restricts the entry of game balls into the interior. This decorative frame 40 divides the play area 5a into a left play area where game balls launched with a first launch force flow down, and a right play area where game balls launched with a second launch force that is stronger than the first launch force flow down, and the left play area and the right play area are connected below the decorative frame 40.

A warp device 41 is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 40 to guide the game balls flowing down the left side game area into the interior of the decorative frame 40, and a stage section 42 is provided on the bottom of the decorative frame 40 to roll the game balls introduced into the decorative frame 40 by the warp device 41 and cause them to flow down below the decorative frame 40.

Three general winning openings 43 through which game balls can always enter are provided at intervals at the lower left side of the decorative frame 40, and one general winning opening 43 through which game balls can always enter is provided at the lower right side of the decorative frame 40. When a game ball that has entered this general winning opening 43 is detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 5) (awarding condition is met), a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., five balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarding prize value).

Below the stage section 42 is a first start hole 45 (a start winning area for a first special symbol) where game balls can always enter (enter), and when a game ball that has entered (entered) this first start hole 45 is detected by the first start hole detection switch 45a (see FIG. 5) (awarding conditions are met), a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarding of prize value). In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not a special game (jackpot game) is to be played is granted (special symbol determination information, described later, is stored).

Directly below the first starting port 45 is a starting port lamp 75 that emits light in a predetermined manner when the lamp light-emitting effect described below is executed, and a lens member 75a (object) is provided to cover the front of the starting port lamp 75.

Below the decorative frame 40 and diagonally below and to the right of the first starting hole 45, there is a variable starting section 46 that can be changed from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter (slot in), to an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a winning result in the winning judgment described below).

The variable starting section 46 has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 1) to form a flow path for the game ball, and is provided with a second starting hole opening/closing member 48 that can move in the front-back direction, a second starting hole 47 (starting winning area of the second special pattern) that opens upward directly below the second starting hole opening/closing member 48, a second starting hole detection switch 47a (see FIG. 5) that detects a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting hole 47, and a second starting hole opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 5) that converts the second starting hole 47 to a closed state by moving the second starting hole opening/closing member 48 forward (winning restriction position) and converts the second starting hole 47 to an open state by moving the second starting hole opening/closing member 48 backward (winning allowance position).

When a game ball enters the second start hole 47, which is opened during the auxiliary game described below, and this game ball is detected by the second start hole detection switch 47a (see FIG. 5) (awarding condition is met), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, two balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarded prize value). In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not to play a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special chart determination information described below is stored).

In the right-side game area, which is to the right of the decorative frame 40, there is an upstream flow path 91a into which all game balls launched toward the right-side game area flow, a central flow path 91b into which almost all game balls flowing out from the upstream flow path 91a flow, a left-side flow path 91c into which game balls that do not flow into the central flow path 91b but bounce to the left flow, a right-side flow path 91d into which game balls that do not flow into the central flow path 91b but bounce to the right flow, a first downstream flow path 91e into which almost all game balls that flow out from the central flow path 91b and the right-side flow path 91d flow, and a second downstream flow path 91f into which game balls that do not flow into the first downstream flow path 91e but bounce to the left flow and game balls that flow out from the left-side flow path 91c flow.

At the upstream end of the central flow path 91b, a normal gate 44 (normal starting area) through which game balls can always pass is provided. When a game ball that has passed through the normal gate 44 is detected by the gate detection switch 44a, no prize balls are awarded, but the player is given the right to make an auxiliary game judgment (win judgment) to determine whether or not to execute a winning game (normal game judgment information, described later, is stored).

A first variable winning section 49 (first variable winning device) is provided in the middle of the central flow path 91b. This can be changed from a closed state, in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win (enter the ball), to an open state, in which it is possible or easy to win, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination).

The first variable winning section 49 (first variable winning device) has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) to become a flow path for game balls (forming part of the bottom surface of the central flow path 91b), and is provided with a first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 that can move in the front-back direction, a first large winning opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51, a first large winning opening detection switch 50a that detects game balls that have won (entered) the first large winning opening 50, and a first large winning opening opening opening solenoid 51b (see Figure 5) that converts the first large winning opening 50 to a closed state by moving the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 forward (winning restriction position) and converts the first large winning opening 50 to an open state by moving the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 backward (winning permitted position).

Then, during the small prize game described below, when the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 moves backward and the first large prize opening 50 is converted from a closed state to an open state, the game balls that have flowed down the top surface of the first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51 or that have reached the first large prize opening 50 enter the first large prize opening 50, and when these game balls are detected by the first large prize opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see Figure 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

In addition, downstream of the first large winning hole detection switch 50a, there is a specific area opening/closing member 52 whose upper surface slopes downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) to become a flow path for game balls and which can move in the front-back direction, a specific area 53 that opens upward directly below the specific area opening/closing member 52, a specific area detection switch 53a (see Figure 5) that detects game balls that have flowed into (entered) the specific area 53, a flow path switching solenoid 52b that converts the specific area 53 into a closed state by moving the specific area opening/closing member 52 forward (winning restriction position) and converts the specific area 53 into an open state by moving the specific area opening/closing member 52 backward (winning permission position), and an outlet 54 into which game balls that have not flowed into the specific area 53 flow.

When a game ball passes through (enters) the specific area 53 that is open during the small win game described below and is detected by the specific area detection switch 53a, no prize balls are awarded, but the big win game described below is executed after the small win game ends.

In addition, instead of providing the specific area opening/closing member 52, the specific area 53, and the specific area detection switch 53a, the first large prize opening detection switch 50a may be set as the specific area, and the game ball that flows into the first large prize opening that is opened during the small prize game described below may be detected by the first large prize opening detection switch 50a, so that the large prize game described below is executed after the small prize game ends.

In this embodiment, the big win game and the small win game that convert the big prize opening into an open state are treated as special games that are advantageous to the player, but there are cases where the big win game is treated as a special game and the small win game is treated as a specific game.

A second variable winning section 55 (second variable winning device) is provided in the middle of the first downstream flow path 91e. This can be changed from a closed state, in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win (enter the ball), to an open state, in which it is possible or easy to win, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination).

The second variable prize winning section 55 (first variable prize winning device) has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in the figure) to become a flow path for game balls (forming part of the bottom surface of the first downstream flow path 91e), and is provided with a second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57 that can move in the front-back direction, a second large prize winning opening 56 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57, a second large prize winning opening detection switch 56a that detects game balls that have won (entered) the second large prize winning opening 56, and a second large prize winning opening opening opening solenoid 57b (see Figure 5) that converts the second large prize winning opening 56 to a closed state by moving the second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57 forward (winning restriction position) and converts the second large prize winning opening 56 to an open state by moving the second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57 backward (winning permitted position).

When the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 moves backwards during a jackpot game and the second large prize opening 56 is converted from a closed state to an open state, the game balls that have flowed down the top surface of the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 or that have reached the second large prize opening 56 enter the second large prize opening 56, and when these game balls are detected by the second large prize opening detection switch 56a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see Figure 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

The front of the right game area is covered with a decorative member 91 that allows the rear to be seen through, and on the back side of the decorative member 91, in a position in front of the central flow passage 91b (directly above the first large prize opening opening member 51), multiple front protrusions 91b2 protruding toward the rear are provided at intervals. Furthermore, on the back wall of the central flow passage 91b (directly above the first large prize opening opening member 51), multiple rear protrusions 91b1 are provided so as to alternate with the front protrusions 91b2, and the rear protrusions 91b1 and the front protrusions 91b2 form a serpentine flow passage, which attenuates the flow speed (flow force) of the game balls in the central flow passage 91b (especially the upper surface of the first large prize opening opening member 51). Therefore, it takes one second for the game balls to flow down the upper surface of the first large prize opening opening member 51 from the upstream end to the downstream end.

Furthermore, on the back surface of the decorative member 91, in front of the first downstream flow passage 91e (directly above the second large prize opening opening member 57), multiple front protrusions 91c2 protruding toward the rear are provided at intervals. Furthermore, on the back wall of the first downstream flow passage 91e (directly above the second large prize opening opening member 57), multiple rear protrusions 91c1 are provided so as to alternate with the front protrusions 91c2, and the rear protrusions 91c1 and the front protrusions 91c2 form a serpentine flow passage, thereby attenuating the flow speed (flow force) of the game ball in the first downstream flow passage 91e (especially the upper surface of the second large prize opening opening member 57). Therefore, it takes one second for the game ball to flow down the upper surface of the second large prize opening opening member 57 from the upstream end to the downstream end.

The game balls launched into the left-hand game area will either flow directly down along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40, or flow into the warp device 41 and then flow down through the stage section 42, and will win one of the three general winning openings 43 or the first starting opening 45 located below the decorative frame 40, or will flow into the out opening 39. Therefore, the game balls will not win (pass through) the general winning gate 44, general winning opening 43, first variable winning section 49 (first large winning opening 50), or second variable winning section 55 (second large winning opening 56) located in the right-hand game area.

In addition, a game ball launched into the right-side play area flows through the upstream flow path 91a, then down the central flow path 91b (regular gate 44), the left-side flow path 91c, the right-side flow path 91d, the first downstream flow path 91e, the second downstream flow path 91f, etc., and enters one of the general winning openings 43, the variable starting section 46 (second starting opening 47), the first variable winning section 49 (first large winning opening 50), or the second variable winning section 55 (second large winning opening 56) provided in the right-side play area, or flows into the outlet 39. Therefore, the game ball will not enter the general winning opening 43 or the first starting opening 45 provided in the left-side play area.

On the back side of the game board 5, there is an out-ball flow path that receives and collects out-balls, which are game balls that have won in the general winning port 43, the first starting port 45, the second starting port 47, the first large winning port 50, and the second large winning port 56, as well as game balls that have flowed into the outlet 39, and allows them to flow down, and an out-ball detection switch 39a (see Figure 5) is provided at the most downstream part of the out-ball flow path. Game balls detected by the out-ball detection switch 39a are discharged from the outlet on the back side of the game machine 1 to the outside of the game machine 1 (island equipment).

Outside the play area 5a, there is a pattern display device consisting of a first special pattern display 60, a second special pattern display 61, and a normal pattern display 62, a reserved display device consisting of a first special pattern reserved display 63, a second special pattern reserved display 64, and a normal pattern reserved display 65, and a main information display 69 consisting of a round number display 66, a right hit display 67, and a status confirmation display 68.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a jackpot determination for a first special symbol, which is made based on the entry (entry) of a game ball into the first starting hole 45, the second special symbol display 61 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a jackpot determination for a second special symbol, which is made based on the entry (entry) of a game ball into the second starting hole 47, and the normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a hit determination for a normal symbol, which is made based on the passage (entry) of a game ball into the normal gate 44.

The jackpot determination corresponds to obtaining special symbol determination information (random number value for jackpot determination, random number value for special symbol determination, random number value for reach determination, random number value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) when the game ball enters (enters) the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, and determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game or a small jackpot game based on the obtained special symbol determination information.

When a jackpot is determined based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 45, the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a varying manner, and after a predetermined time has passed, the first special symbol is displayed stationarily to notify the result of the determination. When a jackpot is determined based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 47, the second special symbol is displayed stationarily to notify the result of the determination, and after a predetermined time has passed, the second special symbol is displayed stationarily to notify the result of the determination.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of multiple LEDs, and when each special symbol changes, the LEDs of the corresponding display blink at a predetermined interval or sequence. When a special symbol is displayed in a static state, the LEDs light up in a manner that notifies the result of the jackpot determination (jackpot, small jackpot, or miss).

In this embodiment, a "jackpot" refers to a state in which it has been determined in the jackpot determination that a jackpot game (special game) will be played. A "jackpot game" refers to a game state that is advantageous to a player who plays a round game in which the big prize openings (first big prize opening 50, second big prize opening 56) are converted from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner a predetermined number of times (e.g., four times, ten times, etc.) with intervals between them, making it easier for the player to win prize balls.

The maximum number of times the large prize openings (first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) can be opened and the maximum opening time for each round of play are preset, but if a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enter the large prize openings (balls enter the opening) even before the maximum number of times or maximum opening time are reached, one round of play ends. In this embodiment, it is possible to play one of several types of large prize games (special games) that differ in the degree of advantage given to the player.

"Small win" refers to a state in which it has been determined in the big win determination that a small win game (special game) will be played. "Small win game" refers to a game state that is advantageous to players who play a game in which the big win opening (second big win opening 56) is converted from a closed state to an open state in a less favorable manner than in a big win game, making it easier for the player to win prize balls.

The maximum opening time of the large prize opening during a small prize game (1.8 seconds) is a predetermined time, but if a certain number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the large prize opening before the maximum opening time is reached, the small prize game ends. Unlike a large prize game, the game status does not change just because a small prize game has been played.

The auxiliary game judgment corresponds to obtaining normal game judgment information (random number value for winning judgment, random number value for normal pattern judgment, random number value for normal pattern variation pattern judgment, etc.) based on the passage (entry) of the game ball into the normal game gate 44, and judging whether or not to execute the auxiliary game based on the obtained normal game judgment information. When the auxiliary game judgment is made, the normal pattern display 62 displays the variation of the normal pattern, and after a predetermined time has passed, a stationary display of the normal pattern is made to notify the judgment result.

The normal symbol display 62 is composed of multiple LEDs, and the LEDs flash at a predetermined interval or sequence when displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner. When displaying a normal symbol in a static manner, the LEDs light up in a manner that notifies the result of the auxiliary game judgment (win or miss).

In this embodiment, "win" refers to a state in which it has been determined in the auxiliary game judgment that an auxiliary game (a winning game) will be executed. "Auxiliary game" refers to a game state in which the second starting hole 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

The maximum number of times the second start hole 47 can be opened and the maximum opening time during the auxiliary game (winning game) are preset, but the auxiliary game (winning game) ends when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enter the second start hole 47 even before the maximum number of times the balls can be opened and the maximum opening time are reached. In other words, the "auxiliary game" is a game state in which the conditions for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are likely to be met. In this embodiment, multiple types of auxiliary games (winning games) with different degrees of advantage to the player are provided.

The first special symbol reserved indicator 63 is composed of multiple LEDs, and is intended to display the first reserved number (U1), which is the number of special symbol determination information (first reserved) stored when a gaming ball enters (enters) the first starting hole 45, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of first reserved items. Note that up to a maximum of four first reserved items can be stored, but the number may be more or less than four.

The second special symbol reserve indicator 64 is composed of multiple LEDs, and is intended to display the second reserve number (U2), which is the number of special symbol determination information (second reserve) stored when a gaming ball enters (enters) the second starting hole 47, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of second reserves. Note that, although a maximum of four second reserves can be stored, the number may be less than or more than four, or no second reserves may be stored.

The normal symbol reserve indicator 65 is composed of multiple LEDs, and is intended to display the number of reserved normal symbols, which is the number of normal symbol judgment information (reserved normal symbols) stored when a game ball enters (passes through) the normal symbol gate 44, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of reserved normal symbols. Note that up to four reserved normal symbols can be stored, but the number may be less or more than four, or no reserved normal symbols may be stored.

The first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured with a seven-segment LED. For example, if a big win is determined in the big win determination, numbers such as "3" or "7" are displayed as static numbers, if a small win is determined, alphabets such as "A" or "C" are displayed as static numbers, and if a miss is determined, a static "-" is displayed as static numbers, and during the varying display, the light is turned off and the "-" is alternately displayed.

The round number indicator 66 is composed of multiple LEDs and is intended to display the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game) occurs. When a jackpot game starts, the LEDs start to light up in a predetermined manner indicating the number of rounds, the LEDs continue to light up during the jackpot game, and when the jackpot game ends, the LEDs are turned off. For example, if the jackpot game has four rounds, only the leftmost LED is lit, and if the jackpot game has ten rounds, all LEDs are lit.

The right-hit indicator 67 is composed of one LED, and is used to display a right-hit display that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right-side game area (so-called right hit) during a jackpot state (special game) or during a time-limited game state. The LED lights up during a jackpot state (special game) and during a time-limited game state.

The status confirmation indicator 68 is composed of one LED and is intended to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode described later is set. When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is entered, the LED starts to light up, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, the LED goes out. In this way, the status confirmation indicator 68, which indicates that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine, so that it is possible to easily check whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. The status confirmation indicator 68 may be installed on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1, or may be installed in other locations.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same display mode (illuminated display) is used regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but the display may be made so that it is possible to recognize which mode is set. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be illuminated, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be flashed, or vice versa.

In addition, in this embodiment, a status confirmation indicator 68 is provided as a dedicated indicator to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, but it may be used in combination with other indicators. For example, in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol indicator 60, the second special symbol indicator 61, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63, the second special symbol reserved indicator 64, the round number indicator 66, the right hit indicator 67, etc. are turned off, so one or more LEDs of these indicators may be turned on.

A first image display device 70 (main LCD) consisting of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the performance space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40, a second image display device 71 (sub LCD) consisting of a liquid crystal display formed with a smaller size and display area than the first image display device 70 is provided at the bottom of the performance space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70, a movable performance device 73 for executing action performances is provided at the top of the performance space 40a, and a change notification LED 59 for reporting the changing display status of the special pattern is provided at the right part of the performance space 40a.

The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 display various effects according to the progress of the game. The effects include a customer waiting demo effect that is performed when the variable display of the special pattern is not being executed, a variable effect that accompanies the variable display of the performance pattern 70a that is executed while the variable display of the special pattern is being executed, and a jackpot effect that is executed during the execution of a jackpot game.

The second image display device 71 can also perform a moving effect by moving using a liquid crystal movable device (not shown) composed of a solenoid, motor, etc. while the first image display device 70 is performing a moving effect.

Specifically, the movement effect is achieved by vertical movement (rising and descending) between a standby position (lower position) located near the end of the first image display device 70 and a performance position (upper position) located near the center of the first image display device 70. Note that the movement direction of the second image display device 71 (sub-LCD) may be left-right or front-back, or the movement effect may be achieved by operating the performance button 17.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) is formed with a variable display area for displaying three performance patterns 70a (left pattern, middle pattern, right pattern) and a mode display area showing the performance mode related to the execution of the variable performance.

The performance pattern 70a is composed of patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", for example, and starts to change in response to the start of the changing display of the special pattern executed by the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61, and stops in response to the stop of the changing display of the special pattern. The performance pattern 70a may be a pattern showing the alphabet such as "A" to "F".

The performance symbols 70a are displayed stationary for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) in a manner that indicates the result of the jackpot determination (miss appearance, jackpot appearance, small win appearance). The jackpot appearance and small win appearance are combinations of the same performance symbols 70a, such as "777" and "555," while the miss appearance is any other appearance.

The display of the effect pattern 70a changes in a vertical scroll mode, but it may also scroll horizontally, or it may switch on the spot or rotate (spin).

In addition, during the changing display (changing performance) of the performance pattern 70a, various performance images such as background images and characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 depending on the result of the jackpot determination, thereby increasing the player's anticipation for the execution of the jackpot game (special game).

The first image display device 70 is formed with a first hold icon display area 70B for displaying a number of first hold icons (first hold information) corresponding to the first hold number (U1) in the normal game state described below, a second hold icon display area 70D for displaying a number of second hold icons (second hold information) corresponding to the second hold number (U2) in the time-saving game state described below, an icon display area 70C for displaying the icon (execution information) indicating that a variable performance is being executed, a first hold number display area 70E for displaying the first hold number (U1) numerically, and a second hold number display area 70F for displaying the second hold number (U2) numerically.

The first hold icon display area 70B is divided into a first display section 70B1 (first area), a second display section 70B2 (second area), a third display section 70B3 (third area), and a fourth display section 70B4 (fourth area) from the side closest to the icon display area 70C, and the first display section 70B1 to the fourth display section 70B4 display a number of first hold icons corresponding to the first hold number (U1).

Specifically, the first display unit 70B1 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold memory in which the first special symbol variable display is executed first, the second display unit 70B2 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold memory in which the first special symbol variable display is executed second, the third display unit 70B3 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold memory in which the first special symbol variable display is executed third, and the fourth display unit 70B4 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold memory in which the first special symbol variable display is executed fourth.

The second hold icon display area 70D is divided into a first display section 70D1 (first area), a second display section 70D2 (second area), a third display section 70D3 (third area), and a fourth display section 70D4 (fourth area) from the left, and the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4 display the number of second hold icons corresponding to the second hold number (U2).

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special pattern is executed first, the second display unit 70D2 displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special pattern is executed second, the third display unit 70D3 displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special pattern is executed third, and the fourth display unit 70D4 displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special pattern is executed fourth.

The icon display area 70C is formed directly above a pedestal image to clearly distinguish it from the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D, and the icon is displayed as if it is sitting or floating on top of this pedestal image.

Specifically, as the display of the first special pattern (performance pattern 70a) begins to change, the first reserved icons displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B move (shift) one by one toward the icon display area 70C, and the first reserved icon displayed in the first display section 70B1 moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70C and becomes that icon, and when the display of the first special pattern (performance pattern 70a) ends, the icon disappears (is erased).

In addition, as the display of the second special pattern (performance pattern 70a) begins, the second reserved icons displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D move (shift) one by one toward the icon display area 70C, and the second reserved icon displayed in the first display section 70D1 moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70C and becomes the icon, and when the display of the second special pattern (performance pattern 70a) ends, the icon disappears (is erased). Note that the icon may be made to disappear during the display of the special pattern (performance pattern 70a).

In the embodiment of the present invention, the first image display device 70 displays the changing effect pattern 70a, but the changing effect pattern 70a may be displayed by either the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71, or by both.

The movable performance device 73 has a first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b that can be operated, and can perform a motion performance by making the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b perform a predetermined motion while the variable display of the performance pattern 70a executed by the first image display device 70 is being executed. In addition, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided with a board lighting device 74 having multiple decorative LEDs, and can emit light in a predetermined manner while the motion performance is being executed.

Specifically, the first movable member 73a moves (rising and descending) between a standby position (first position) located toward the end (upper) of the first image display device 70 and a performance position (second position) located toward the center (lower) of the first image display device 70. The second movable member 73b moves between a standby position (first position) that covers a portion of the front of the first movable member 73a and a performance position where it retreats from the front of the first movable member 73a.

The change notification LED 59 is composed of a full-color LED, and includes a first change notification LED 59a corresponding to the first special symbol and a second change notification LED 59b corresponding to the second special symbol. The first change notification LED 59a starts changing color (displaying the change of the first special symbol) in response to the start of the change display of the first special symbol, and stops changing color (displaying the change of the first special symbol) in response to the stop of the change display of the first special symbol, thereby notifying whether the first special symbol is changing. The second change notification LED 59b starts changing color (displaying the change of the second special symbol) in response to the start of the change display of the second special symbol, and stops changing color (displaying the change of the second special symbol) in response to the stop of the change display of the second special symbol, thereby notifying whether the second special symbol is changing.

The result of the first special pattern change display (jackpot determination) may be notified by the combination of the stopped performance pattern 70a and the first special pattern, and the result of the second special pattern change display (special play range) may be notified by the combination of the stopped performance pattern 70a and the second special pattern. Also, the result of the first special pattern change display (jackpot determination) may be notified only by the stopped first special pattern, and the result of the second special pattern change display (jackpot determination) may be notified only by the stopped second special pattern.

In addition, instead of displaying the changes in the first special pattern and the second special pattern using the first change notification LED 59a and the second change notification LED 59b, the first special pattern and the second special pattern may be displayed in a changing manner on the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, there are a payout device 95 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball loans), a game ball storage section 96 for storing game balls supplied from island equipment etc. and supplying them to the payout device 95, a main control device 110A incorporating a main control board 110, a payout control device 120A incorporating a payout control board 120, a performance control device 130A incorporating a performance control board 130, a power supply device 160A incorporating a power supply board 160, a game information output terminal board 90 for outputting game information to the outside of the game machine (information collection device such as a hall computer), etc.

In addition, a cover member 23 with an opening and closing door is provided, which opens and closes in the left and right direction on one side around a rotation axis set on the left or right side to cover the upper part of the main control device and the entire performance control device from the rear, and the performance control device 130A is provided with a changeover switch 22, covered by the cover member 23, for switching adjustment modes related to adjusting the volume of the performance sound output from the audio output device 9 and the light intensity of the image display device and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74).

On the front side of the main control board 110, there are mounted a main control unit 110m consisting of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, an RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal to clear the memory contents of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or to update a setting value which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game (the probability of being judged as a jackpot in the jackpot judgment), a setting key switch 112a for inputting a signal to switch to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode which will be described later by operating the setting key, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values which enable the actual performance of the gaming machine to be grasped, and other electronic components.

The information display 113 is composed of four seven-segment displays (113a to 113d) aligned horizontally. The two seven-segment displays from the left, 113a and 113b, form an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type), and the two seven-segment displays from the right, 113c and 113d, form a numeric segment for displaying numeric information indicating setting values and numerical values of the performance information (see Figure 49).

(Game Board Configuration)
Next, the configuration of the game board 5 in the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 5.

The game board 5 is composed of a board surface unit 500 that forms the front side of the game board 5, and a back surface unit 501 that forms the rear side of the game board 5.

The board unit 500 has a play area 5a formed on its surface by the inner rail 35 and outer rail 36 described above, and a play board 500a made of transparent resin with a window that allows visibility to the rear.

Then, inside the play area 5a of the play board 500a, there are the above-mentioned decorative frame 40, general winning opening 43, general map gate 44 (gate detection switch 44a), first start opening 45 (first start opening detection switch 45a), variable start section 46 (second start opening 47, second start opening detection switch 47a, second start opening opening opening solenoid 48b), first variable winning section 49 (first large winning opening 50, first large winning opening detection switch 50a, first large winning opening A mouth opening/closing member 51, a first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, a specific area 53, a specific area detection switch 53a, a flow path switching solenoid 52b, an outlet 54), and a second variable prize section 55 (second large prize opening 56, a second large prize opening detection switch 56a, a second large prize opening opening opening member 57, a second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) are provided, and the above-mentioned main information display 69 is provided outside the play area 5a.

In addition, a stamp plate 502, on which a stamp bearing unique identification information for the gaming machine 1 is affixed, is provided at the lower right of the gaming board 500a in a state that allows it to rotate left and right around the left side as an axis, and at each of the four corners of the gaming board 500a, fixing devices 503a are provided for detachably attaching the board unit 500 and the back unit 501.

The fixture 503a located at the bottom right of the game board 500a is normally covered by the stamp plate 502, but is exposed when the right side of the stamp plate is pinched with the fingertips and rotated to the left.

The fixing device 503a has an operating section located on the front side of the game board 500a, a shaft section extending from the operating section to the back side of the game board 500a, and an engagement piece provided at the tip of the shaft section and located on the back side of the game board 500a. By operating the operating section, the engagement piece changes between a first state (non-engaged position) and a second state (engaged position).

The rear unit 501 has a unit base 501a formed in a recessed chamber with an open front and a window that allows the rear to be seen. The second image display device 71, the movable performance device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b), etc. are provided inside the recessed chamber, and the first image display device 70 is provided behind the window. In addition, the performance control device 130A is provided behind the first image display device 70, and the main control device 110A is provided below the performance control device 130A.

At each of the four corners of the unit base 501a, there is a fixed receiving portion 503b that engages with the engaging piece of the fixing device 503a described above to detachably attach the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501.

When attaching the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501, the certificate plate 502 is opened and the engagement pieces of the four fixing devices 503a are in the first state (non-engaged position). Then, the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN leading from the various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) provided in the panel unit 500 is passed through the through hole HA provided on the right side of the back unit 501. After that, when the back surface of the panel unit 500 and the front surface of the back unit 501 are abutted against each other, the engagement pieces of the fixing devices 503a enter the interior of the fixed receiving portion 503b.

In this state, when the operating parts of the four fixing devices 503a are rotated to place the engaging pieces in the second state (engaged posture), the engaging pieces engage with the fixed receiving parts 503b, and the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501 are fixed together. After that, the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN leading from the various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) is connected to the female connector of the main control device 110A, and the certificate plate 502 is closed, completing the installation of the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501.

On the other hand, when removing the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501, the male connector CN connected to the female connector of the main control device 110A is pulled out to open the certificate plate 502. After that, the operating parts of the four fixing devices 503a are turned to set the engagement pieces to the first state, and the engagement between the engagement pieces and the fixed receiving parts 503b is released.

In this state, when the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501 are separated, the engagement pieces of the four fasteners 503a retract from the fixed receiving portions 503b. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN is pulled out from the through hole HA, the removal of the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501 is completed.

In this embodiment, in addition to replacing only the game board 5 (a set of the game board unit 500 and the back unit 501), it is also possible to replace only the game board unit 500 from the perspective of like-new of the game machine 1. Therefore, although the attachment and detachment of the game board unit 500 and the back unit 501 when the game board 5 is not attached to the game board mounting frame 3 has been described here, it is also possible to replace only the game board unit 500 from the game board 5 attached to the game board mounting frame 3.

Specifically, when the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting frame 3, only the back unit 501 is fixed to the game board mounting frame 3 via a locking mechanism, and the locking mechanism prevents the board surface unit 500 from being fixed, making it possible to replace (like new) only the board surface unit 500. Therefore, when replacing only the board surface unit 500, it is recommended to open the glass frame 4 and then perform the removal work described above.

(Overall block diagram of the gaming machine)
Next, a control means for controlling the progress of a game will be described with reference to the overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in Fig. 5. Fig. 5 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1.

The control configuration of this embodiment includes a main control board 110 that controls the overall progress of the game (basic operations), a payout control board 120 that controls the payout of game balls based on the receipt of a payout control command from the main control board 110, a presentation control board 130 that controls the presentation related to the game based on the receipt of a presentation control command from the main control board 110, and a power supply board 160 that supplies power to the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, and the presentation control board 130.

The communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to enable bidirectional transmission and reception of commands, while the communication between the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 is configured to enable unidirectional transmission of commands from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130.

The main control board 110 is equipped with a main CPU 110a that performs calculation processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs, etc., a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and a main control unit 110m that is a one-chip microcomputer equipped with input/output ports, etc.

The input/output ports of the main control unit 110m include an out ball detection switch 39a, a general winning hole detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting hole detection switch 45a, a second starting hole detection switch 47a, a second starting hole opening/closing solenoid 48b, a first large winning hole detection switch 50a, a first large winning hole opening/closing solenoid 51b, a flow path switching solenoid 52b, a specific area detection switch 53a, a second large winning hole detection switch 56a, a second large winning hole opening/closing solenoid 57b, a magnetic detection The output sensor 57a, radio wave detection sensor 58a, first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, round number display 66, right hit display 67, status confirmation display 68, game information output terminal board 90, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control board 120, and performance control board 130 are connected.

The main CPU 110a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the game control program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs calculation processing related to the game while using the main RAM 110c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing in response to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoids, displays, etc.), control processing for sending and receiving various control commands, and control processing for sending game information to the outside of the gaming machine (hall computer, etc.) via the game information output terminal board 90.

The "game information" includes a start hole entry signal output each time a game ball enters the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, a pattern determination signal output each time the varying display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern is stopped, a jackpot signal output throughout the jackpot game, an open signal output throughout the round game (opening of the jackpot entry hole), a time-saving state signal output throughout the time-saving game state described below, and a security signal output when a situation occurs that is problematic (threatening) in terms of the security of the gaming machine 1 (RWM clear, error, etc.).

The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs calculation processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores payout programs, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports.

The input/output port of the payout control unit 121 is connected to an open detection switch 31a, a full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 95a for detecting game balls being paid out from the payout device 95, a payout motor 95b for paying out game balls from the payout device 95, and a ball presence detection switch 96a for detecting that game balls are stored in the game ball storage unit 96.

The payout CPU 121a receives an operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs calculation processing related to the payout of game balls while using the payout RAM 121c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing for paying out game balls from the payout device 95 in response to a payout control command from the main control board 110, control processing for sending a command based on the result of the calculation processing to the main control board 110, etc.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit and an input/output port, which are not shown.
The input/output ports of the launch control unit 122 are connected to the ball feeding solenoid 11b, the touch sensor 15a, the launch volume 15b, and the launch solenoid 28b.

When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15 by a touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows current to flow to the ball feed solenoid 11b and the launch solenoid 28b, and when it detects a change in the rotation angle of the launch handle 15 by a detection signal from the launch volume 15b, it drives the ball feed solenoid 11b and drives the launch solenoid 28b so that the launch strength corresponds to the rotation angle of the launch handle 15, thereby launching the game balls (99.9 balls/min).

The performance control board 130 is equipped with a performance control unit 130m that performs overall control of the progress of the performance based on the performance control commands received from the main control board 110, a display control unit 140 that performs control processing of image display and audio output based on the performance control commands received from the performance control unit 130m, and a lamp control unit 150 that performs control processing of various light-emitting components (LEDs, etc.) and various driving sources (motors, etc.) based on the performance control commands received from the performance control unit 130m.

The performance control unit 130m includes a sub-CPU 130a that performs calculation processing, a sub-ROM 130b that stores the performance control program, a sub-RAM 130c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports.

The performance button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the input/output port of the performance control unit 130m.

The sub-CPU 130a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the performance control program stored in the sub-ROM 130b, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while using the sub-RAM 130c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing for determining the performance mode of the variable performance, control processing for sending a performance control command based on the determination result to the display control unit 140, control processing in response to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting devices, motors, etc.), etc.

The display control unit 140 receives commands from the performance control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 to display a specified image, and controls the audio output device 9 to output a specified voice or sound.

The display control unit 140 includes a general control unit 141 that performs general control of image display and audio output based on reception of a performance control command from the performance control unit 130m, an image control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 based on reception of a display control command (display list) from the general control unit 141, a CGROM 146 in which image data and the like are stored, an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) that controls the audio output device 9 based on reception of an audio control command from the general control unit 141, and an audio ROM 149 in which audio data and the like are stored.

The overall control unit 141 includes an overall CPU 141a that performs calculation processing, an overall ROM 141b in which an overall control program is stored, an overall RAM 141c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports to which an image control unit 145 (VDP) and an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) are connected.

The general CPU 141a receives an operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the general control program stored in the general ROM 141b, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while using the general RAM 141c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing for generating display control commands (display lists) that indicate the performance images to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and sending them to the display control unit 140, and control processing for generating audio control commands that indicate the performance sounds to be output from the audio output device 9 and sending them to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs calculation processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores the lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports.

The input/output ports of the lamp control unit 150 are connected to the frame lighting device 10, the performance button drive device 17b (performance button drive motor, performance button vibration motor), the performance button light-emitting LED 17c, the starter lamp 75, the movable performance device 73, and the board lighting device 74.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while using the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. This allows it to control the frame lighting device 10, the performance button drive device 17b, the performance button light-emitting LED 17c, the starter lamp 75, the movable performance device 73, and the board lighting device 74.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power supply (operating power supply) required for the operation of the gaming machine from a power supply supplied from outside the gaming machine, and supplies the main power supply to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, performance control board 130, and various electronic components) (corresponding to a power supply supply means). The power supply board 160 is equipped with a power interruption detection circuit 162 that detects whether the supplied power supply voltage has dropped (a power outage has occurred) and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control board 110 based on the drop in power supply voltage (occurrence of a power outage), and a backup power supply circuit 163 that supplies backup power to the main control board 110 in the event of a power interruption (power outage).

The power supply board 160 also has a power switch that can be operated by an arcade staff member to switch between an ON state that supplies main power to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, presentation control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state that stops the supply. When the power switch is turned ON, the supply of main power begins and the gaming machine 1 starts operating. Note that the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is turned OFF.

The power interruption detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, and stops outputting the voltage drop detection signal when the power supply voltage exceeds the predetermined value while the voltage drop detection signal is being output.

The backup power circuit 163 is equipped with a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is energized, and in the event of a power outage (blackout), the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is supplied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. This allows the contents stored in the main RAM 110c to be retained even in the event of a power outage (blackout), and after recovery from the power outage (blackout), the game control state can be restored to the state before the power outage (blackout).

Although backup power is not supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control unit 130m, backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control unit 130m so that the memory contents of the payout RAM 121c and the sub-RAM 130c are retained even in the event of a power outage. Backup power may also be supplied to only one of the payout control board 120 and the performance control unit 130m.

(Explanation of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In this embodiment, there are a "normal game state (non-time-saving game state)" and a "time-saving game state" as states related to the ease of a game ball entering the second starting hole 47.

The initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "normal game state." Also, during a jackpot game, the game state is set to the "normal game state," but since a jackpot game is being played, the game state is different from the normal game state.

Here, "normal game state (non-time-saving game state)" refers to a game state in which the probability of a win being determined in the auxiliary game judgment, which is performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 44, is set low at 1/256, the average time for the normal symbol fluctuation display is set to approximately 30 seconds, and the opening time of the second start hole 47 in the event of a win is set to 0.180 seconds.

In contrast, the "time-saving game state" refers to a game state that is advantageous to the player in that the consumption of game balls is reduced compared to the normal game state, by setting the probability of a win at a high value of 255/256, setting the average time for the variable display of normal symbols to about 3 seconds, and setting the opening time of the second starting hole 47 when a win is determined to be a win to 6 seconds.

The "time-saving game state" includes a normal time-saving game state that is controlled after the end of a jackpot game (via a jackpot game), which will be described later; a first special time-saving game state that is controlled (without going through a jackpot game) when the number of times the special symbol's missing variable display, which is executed after the first condition is met (executing RWM clear and clearing the number of variations based on the end of the jackpot game to 0), reaches a specified number (500 times in this embodiment); and a second special time-saving game state that is controlled (without going through a jackpot game) when a special missing special symbol is displayed as a result of the special symbol's variable display after a special missing is selected in the jackpot determination (control).

The "time-saving game state" is set to be more favorable than the "normal game state" in terms of the average change time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second start hole 47, and the probability of being determined to be a win, but it may be set to be more favorable in terms of only one of the average change time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second start hole 47, and the probability of being determined to be a win.

The probability of a win being determined in the normal game state is 1/256, but the probability of a win being determined may be set to 0/256 so that no win is determined. In this case, the auxiliary game is not executed in the normal game state, and the game ball does not enter the second starting hole 47 (win).

(Various storage areas in the main RAM)
6 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 6(a) is a diagram showing a special chart judgment information storage area in which special chart judgment information acquired when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 and/or the second starting hole 47 is stored, FIG. 6(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special chart judgment information storage area, FIG. 6(c) is a normal chart judgment information storage area in which normal chart judgment information acquired when a game ball passes through the normal chart gate 44 is stored, and FIG. 6(d) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the normal chart judgment information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), the special pattern determination information storage area is divided into a first special pattern determination information reserve memory area in which special pattern determination information obtained based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is stored, a second special pattern determination information reserve memory area in which special pattern determination information obtained based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 47 is stored, and a special pattern determination information storage area in which special pattern determination information during variable display is stored, and the first special pattern determination information reserve memory area and the second special pattern determination information reserve memory area are each divided into a first memory section to a fourth memory section.

The first memory unit, second memory unit, third memory unit, and fourth memory unit of the first special pattern determination information reserved memory area correspond to the first display unit 70B1, second display unit 70B2, third display unit 70B3, and fourth display unit 70B4 of the first reserved icon display area 70B, respectively. Also, the first memory unit, second memory unit, third memory unit, and fourth memory unit of the second special pattern reserved memory area correspond to the first display unit 70D1, second display unit 70D2, third display unit 70D3, and fourth display unit 70D4 of the second reserved icon display area 70D, respectively.

The number of special pattern judgment information (reserved information) stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special pattern judgment information storage area becomes the first reserved number (U1), and the number of first reserved icons corresponding to these special pattern judgment information are displayed in the first display unit 70B1 to the fourth display unit 70B4 of the first reserved icon display area 70B. Also, the number of special pattern judgment information (reserved information) stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the second special pattern judgment information becomes the second reserved number (U2), and the number of reserved icons corresponding to these judgment information are displayed in the first display unit 70D1 to the fourth display unit 70D4 of the second reserved icon display area 70D.

The 0th memory unit, which is the special chart determination information execution memory area, corresponds to the icon display area 70C. The icon corresponding to the special chart determination information stored in the 0th memory unit is then displayed in the icon display area 70C.

As shown in FIG. 6(b), each memory unit is divided into a random number memory area for determining a jackpot for storing random numbers for determining a jackpot, a random number memory area for determining a special symbol for storing random numbers for determining a special symbol, a random number memory area for determining a reach for a chance for storing random numbers for determining a reach for a chance ...

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 and special pattern determination information is acquired, the acquired special pattern determination information is stored in the smallest-numbered memory section in the first special pattern determination information reserve memory area in which special pattern determination information is not stored. When a game ball enters the second starting hole 47 and special pattern determination information is acquired, the acquired special pattern determination information is stored in the smallest-numbered memory section in the second special pattern determination information reserve memory area in which special pattern determination information is not stored.

When the start condition for the variable display of the first special pattern is satisfied, the special pattern determination information stored in the first memory unit of the first special pattern determination information reserve memory area is shifted to the 0th memory unit, which is the special pattern determination information execution memory area, and is referenced to execute the variable display of the first special pattern. Also, when the start condition for the variable display of the second special pattern is satisfied, the special pattern determination information stored in the first memory unit of the second special pattern determination information reserve memory area is shifted to be referenced to execute the variable display of the second special pattern.

As shown in FIG. 6(c), the normal map judgment information storage area is divided into a normal map judgment information storage area in which normal map judgment information acquired based on the passage of the game ball through the normal map gate 44 is stored, and a normal map judgment information storage area in which normal map judgment information during execution of the variable display is stored, and the normal map judgment information reserve storage area is divided into a first storage section to a fourth storage section. Note that the number of normal map reserves is the number of normal map judgment information stored in the first storage section to the fourth storage section of the normal map judgment information reserve storage area.

As shown in FIG. 6(d), each memory unit is divided into a random number memory area for hit determination for storing random number values for hit determination, a random number memory area for normal pattern determination for storing random number values for normal pattern determination, and a random number memory area for normal pattern variation pattern determination for storing random number values for normal pattern variation pattern determination.

When the game ball passes through the normal map gate 44 and normal map judgment information is acquired, the acquired normal map judgment information is stored in the smallest-numbered memory section in the normal map judgment information reserve memory area in which no normal map judgment information is stored.

When the conditions for starting the display of changes in the normal pattern are met, the 0th memory unit, which is the normal pattern determination information execution memory area, shifts the normal pattern determination information stored in the 1st memory unit of the normal pattern determination information reserve memory area, and the information is referenced to execute the display of changes in the normal pattern.

(flowchart)
Next, the progress of the game on the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to a flowchart.

(Main processing of the main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 7. Fig. 7 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the main control board 110. This main processing is performed when a system reset, which occurs when a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a performs an initial setting process in step S10. Specifically, the initial setting process includes a preparation process for starting game control, a setting change process for changing the setting value based on a setting change operation, an RWM clear process for initializing a predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 110c based on an RWM clear operation, a setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value based on a setting confirmation operation, and a drive source initial operation process for initializing the various drive sources (second start opening opening solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening opening solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500. Details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the random number value for determining the special symbol and the random number value for determining the reach, and in step S51, updates the initial random number value for determining the jackpot, the initial random number value for determining the special symbol, the initial random number value for determining the hit, and the initial random number value for determining the normal symbol.

In step S52, the main CPU 110a determines whether a voltage drop detection signal indicating a voltage drop in the power supply (for example, a voltage drop from 24 volts to less than 18 volts) has been input from the power interruption detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160. If a voltage drop detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S50, and if a voltage drop detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 milliseconds). If the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for the predetermined period, it is assumed that a complete power outage has occurred and the process proceeds to step S54. If the voltage drop detection signal has not been input for the predetermined period, it is assumed that a momentary power outage has occurred, in which the voltage of the power supply drops for just a moment, and the process proceeds to step S52.

In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets an interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and in step S55, sends a power cutoff designation command to the payout control board 120 to notify it that the power cutoff process has begun. As a result, the payout control board 120, which has received the power cutoff designation command, sends a remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining number of game balls stored in the payout RAM 121c to be paid out.

In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a remaining payout number designation command has been received. If a remaining payout number designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S57. If a remaining payout number designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether the waiting time for receiving the remaining payout number designation command has elapsed. If the waiting time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S56. If the waiting time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S58, assuming that normal communication with the payout control board 120 is not possible.

In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the payout number in the payout counter set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if a remaining payout number designation command has been received, the remaining payout number specified by the remaining payout number designation command is saved, and if a remaining payout number designation command has not been received, "0" is saved as the remaining payout number. The remaining payout number saved here is referenced in the timer interrupt payout control process described below, and after the power is restored, a payout number designation command corresponding to the remaining payout number is sent to the payout control board 120.

In step S59, the main CPU 110a clears the output port. This initializes the output state of the output port and stops the operation of various displays and various drive sources (motors, solenoids).

In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the main RAM 110c and saves it in a specified area of the main RAM 110c. In this way, the next time the power is turned on, it becomes possible to perform an abnormality determination of the data in the main RAM 110c using the checksum.

In step S61, the main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the main RAM 110c has been backed up (power has been restored) in the main RAM 110c, and in step S62, prohibits RWM access and waits until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of the operating power (18 volts or more) required for the operation of the gaming machine 1 begins, the initial setting process is performed, but when the supply of operating power resumes following a momentary power outage (voltage drop to less than 18 volts), the initial setting process is not performed. In other words, even if a setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, or RWM clear operation is being performed due to some factor when a momentary power outage occurs, the setting change process, setting confirmation process, and RWM clear process will not be executed, so the gaming machine will not perform unintended operations, and it is possible to ensure the reliability of the gaming machine.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 8. Fig. 8 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial CPU settings such as setting built-in registers in step S12, and performs processing to wait for the startup of other control boards in step S13. Specifically, it waits for one second for the payout control board 120 and performance control board 130 to start up so that no commands from the main control board 110 are missed.

In step S14, the main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S15, sends a launch permission command to the payout control board 120. This causes the payout control unit 121 to carry out processing to permit the launch device 26 to launch game balls.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power has been restored has been saved in the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, the process proceeds to step S17 assuming that power has been restored. If the backup flag has not been saved, the process proceeds to step S18 assuming that power has been turned on for the first time or that power has been restored irregularly (power has been restored after a power outage during execution of steps S18 to S35).

In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the main RAM 110c and clears the backup flag saved in the main RAM 110c.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are ON. If a setting change operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S19 to transition to setting change mode, and if a setting change operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S20.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step S19. Specifically, the main CPU 110a changes (updates) the setting value, which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game (the probability of being determined as a jackpot in the jackpot determination), based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, and performs a process to confirm the setting value by operating the setting key switch 112a. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S24.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it determines whether the checksum saved in the main RAM 110c matches the checksum calculated in step S17. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the process proceeds to step S21; if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the process proceeds to step S22.

If the backup flag has not been saved, it is assumed that this is the first time the power has been turned on or that the power has been restored irregularly as described above, and the checksum is determined to be abnormal, and processing proceeds to step S22.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting value in the setting value area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the setting value in the setting value area is within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S23, and if it is determined that the setting value in the setting value area is not within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S22.

In step S22, the main CPU 110a performs irrecoverable error processing. Specifically, it displays error information "E" indicating an irrecoverable error on the information display 113, sends an irrecoverable error designation command to the performance control board 130 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred, then sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interruption, clears the output port, and then outputs an irrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an irrecoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, and performs processing to wait until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the performance control board 130 performs processing to execute an irrecoverable error notification indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred.

An "irrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is no longer performed (there is no transition to game control), and it cannot be released unless a setting change process is performed. Therefore, when an irrecoverable error occurs, the error will not be released even if the power switch on the power supply board 160 is turned OFF and then turned ON without a setting change operation; it is necessary to turn the power switch ON while performing a setting change operation. Note that during an irrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from the various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Irrecoverable error notification" refers to displaying an irrecoverable error screen ("This is an irrecoverable error. Please change the settings.") on the image display device to make the user aware that an irrecoverable error has occurred, or turning on all of the frame lighting devices 10 and board lighting devices 74 in a specified light color (e.g. red) until the power is turned off, or outputting an irrecoverable error sound ("This is an irrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) from the audio output device 9 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred until the power is turned off.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If an RWM clear operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S24 to perform RWM clearing, and if an RWM clear operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S27.

The main CPU 110a performs an RWM clear process in step S24. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process to initialize the game control state (initialize everything other than the setting value area of the main RAM 110c) based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a performs a drive source initial operation process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process for initializing the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) that are provided in the board unit 500 and that are operated by the main control board 110 as the game progresses, for a predetermined period of time. The initial operation of the various drive sources will be described in detail later.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on command to the payout control board 120 and the presentation control board 130, indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, the non-time-saving game state as the normal game state), and moves processing to step S33. As a result, the presentation control board 130 performs processing to execute a power-on notification indicating that the game control state has been initialized.

The "power-on notification" refers to displaying the initial screen (background image and initial performance pattern "135") on the image display device when the power is turned on to allow the user to recognize that the game control state has been initialized, turning on the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 in a predetermined light color (e.g., white) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds), and outputting from the audio output device 9 a power-on notification sound ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) indicating that the RWM area has been initialized for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds).
In addition, when notifying the power-on, instead of displaying the initial screen on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, a display notifying that the RWM area has been cleared may be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the setting key switch 112a is ON. If a setting confirmation operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S28 to transition to setting confirmation mode, and if a setting confirmation operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S30 to return the game control state to the state before the power was turned off.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S28. Specifically, the setting values saved in the setting value (during gameplay) area of the main RAM 110c are displayed on the information display 113, and the setting key switch 112a is operated to end confirmation of the setting values.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a performs a drive source initial operation process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process for initializing the various drive sources described above (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for a predetermined period of time. Details of the initial operation of the various drive sources will be described later.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a sets the RWM area when power is restored, such as by clearing (clearing to 0) the checksum saved in the main RAM 110c. This returns (restores) the game progress state (control state) to the state before the power was cut off, making it possible to resume play from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S31, the main CPU 110a transmits a power restoration command to the presentation control board 130, indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power outage occurred. This causes the presentation control board 130 to perform processing to end setting confirmation notifications, etc., and execute a power restoration notification indicating that the game control state has returned to the state before the power outage.

"Power restoration notification" refers to displaying a power restoration screen on the image display device for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) to notify the user that the game control state has returned to the state before the power was cut off, turning on all of the frame lighting devices 10 and board lighting devices 74 in a predetermined light color (e.g., white) for a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds), or outputting a power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) from the audio output device 9 for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) to indicate that power has been restored (from a power outage).

In step S32, the main CPU 110a sends other commands (such as a special symbol storage command and a normal symbol storage command, which will be described later) to the performance control board 130. This allows the performance control board 130 to grasp the number of special symbols on hold, and also performs processing to display the first hold icon and the second hold icon on the image display device.

In step S33, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the performance control board 130. This allows the performance control board 130 to grasp the current setting value. Note that this setting value designation command may be transmitted to the performance control board 130 before the power-on designation command or power-restoration designation command is transmitted. The setting value designation command may also be transmitted each time the display of the special pattern begins to change, or each time a jackpot game begins.

In step S34, the main CPU 110a starts the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S35, it starts controlling the progress of the game (timer interrupt of the main control board 110) by allowing all interrupts, and ends this initial setting process.

In other words, from when the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the initial setting process is completed, the machine is in a pre-start state before game progress control begins, and after the initial setting process is completed, the machine is in a playable state in which game progress control is performed.

In this way, when the setting is being changed (in setting change mode) or when the setting is being confirmed (in setting confirmation mode), it is possible to know that the setting is being changed on the front (front side) of the gaming machine 1 by checking the status confirmation display 68, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, and the board lighting device 74, and it is possible to know that the setting is being changed on the back (rear side) by checking the information display 113. In other words, it is possible to know whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (front side) or the back (rear side) of the gaming machine 1.

The power-on command and power restoration command are transmitted together with information indicating the current game status. However, after transmitting the power-on command or power restoration command, a game status command indicating the current game status may be transmitted.

Also, by not judging whether the setting change in progress flag is set or not, unrecoverable error processing may be prevented even if the previous power outage occurred during a setting change.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 9. Fig. 9 is a flow chart showing the timer interrupt process in the main control board 110.

This timer interrupt process is executed after the main processing initialization process is completed, by inputting a clock pulse at a predetermined period (4 milliseconds) from the reset clock pulse generating circuit provided on the main control board 110, and controls the progress of the game.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the registers to the stack area, and in step S110, performs time control processing. Specifically, it performs processing to update various timer counters, such as the stop time of special symbols and the opening time of special electric roles.

The main CPU 110a performs a specific random number value update process in step S120. Specifically, the random number value for determining a big win, the random number value for determining a special symbol, the random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern, the random number value for determining a win, the random number value for determining a normal symbol, and the random number value for determining a normal symbol variation pattern are updated. Specifically, the process is performed to update each random number value and the random number counter by adding +1. Note that if the incremented random number counter value exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (if the random number counter has completed one revolution), the random number counter is reset to 0, and if the random number counter has returned to the initial value for the revolution, the corresponding initial random number value is set as the new initial value for the revolution, and the random number value is updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a performs an initial random number value update process. Specifically, similar to step S30, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the initial random number value for determining a big win, the initial random number value for determining a special symbol, the initial random number value for determining a win, and the initial random number value for determining a normal symbol.

The main CPU 110a performs input control processing in step S200. Specifically, it determines whether or not there has been input to various switches such as the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the first large winning hole detection switch 50a, the second large winning hole detection switch 56a, the first starting hole detection switch 45a, the second starting hole detection switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a, and the specific area detection switch 53a, and performs processing to set predetermined data if there has been input. Details of the input control processing will be described later.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol special electricity control processing. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs processing such as judging the special symbol determination information obtained based on the winning of the game ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, displaying the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, opening and closing the large prize holes (first large prize hole 50, second large prize hole 56), and setting the game state. The details of the special symbol special electricity control processing will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs normal symbol and normal power control processing in step S400. Specifically, it performs processing such as judging the normal symbol judgment information acquired based on the passage of the game ball through the normal symbol gate 44, displaying the normal symbol fluctuation, and opening and closing the second starting hole 47 (auxiliary game). The details of the normal symbol and normal power control processing will be described later.

The types of winning and losing normal symbols determined as a result of the normal symbol determination information performed in the normal symbol and normal power control process remain the same regardless of the setting value. This prevents the game from becoming too complicated, allowing players to play with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratios of various winning normal symbols and various losing normal symbols, which are determined as a result of the normal symbol determination information performed in the normal symbol/normal power control process, are fixed and do not change depending on the setting value. By doing this, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the setting value, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

The main CPU 110a performs payout control processing in step S500. Specifically, it refers to various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c, and performs processing to send payout number designation commands corresponding to the various winning ports (general winning port 43, first start port 45, second start port 47, first large winning port 50, second large winning port 56) to the payout control board 120. This causes the payout control board 120 to execute processing to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95.

The main CPU 110a performs an abnormality determination process in step S600. Specifically, it determines whether various errors (illegal winning errors in which a game ball enters the second start port 47 when not in auxiliary play or a game ball enters the large winning port when not in special play, abnormal winning errors in which the number of game balls entering various winning ports does not match the number of game balls discharged from the winning ball flow path through which the winning balls flow, magnetic errors in which the magnetic detection sensor 57a detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period of time, radio wave errors in which the radio wave detection sensor 58a detects abnormal radio waves for a predetermined period of time, door opening errors in which the opening detection switch 31a changes from an OFF state to an ON state, and operation errors in which the RWM clear switch 111a or the setting key switch 112a is operated while the game progress control is being performed) have occurred, and performs processing to transmit an error designation command corresponding to the error that has occurred to the performance control board 130. This causes the performance control board 130 to execute processing to notify the error.

The main CPU 110a performs data creation processing in step S700. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs processing to create data such as start port opening/closing data to be output to the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b, large prize port opening/closing data to be output to the first large prize port opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second large prize port opening/closing solenoid 57b, special pattern display data to be output to the first special pattern display 60 and the second special pattern display 61, normal pattern display data to be output to the normal pattern display 62, special pattern reserved display data to be output to the first special pattern reserved display 63 and the second special pattern reserved display 64, and normal pattern reserved display data to be output to the normal pattern reserved display 65.

In step S720, the main CPU 110a performs external information data creation processing. Specifically, it performs processing to create game information data to be output from the game information output terminal board 90.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a performs output control processing. Specifically, port output processing is performed to output signals such as the start opening/closing data and the large winning opening/closing data created in step S700, and to output signals such as the game information data created in step S720, and display output processing is performed to output signals such as special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol reserved display data, and normal symbol reserved display data, and processing is performed to send a payout status confirmation designation command to the payout control board 120 to check the payout status of the payout control board 120, and to send a payout number designation command corresponding to each winning port to the payout control board 120 by referring to the prize ball counters (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) described later. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control to pay out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs processing when an information program is called. Specifically, after prohibiting interrupts, the flag register is saved to the main RAM 110c, and processing is performed to call the target information program using the CALL command.

The main CPU 110a performs a game ball counting process in step S810. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process to count game performance information such as the normal payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into various winning ports (general winning port, large winning port start port) during the normal game state, the normal out number, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a during the normal game state, and the total out number, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a regardless of the game state.

The total number of outs, number of payouts during normal play, and number of outs during normal play are game performance information that are not affected by changes to the setting value (are unrelated to the setting value), so by counting these, it is possible to calculate performance information that eliminates the influence of the setting value (the normal base value, described below), which can be used to understand the performance of the gaming machine 1.

In step S830, the main CPU 110a performs a normal base value calculation process. Specifically, the normal base value ((normal payout number ÷ normal out number) × 100) for the current play section, which is divided by the total number of outs, is calculated, and the normal base value rounded off to the first decimal place is saved in the first area of the base memory area set in the main RAM 110c.

The play section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the base memory area is provided with a first area in which the normal base value for the current play section is stored, a second area for storing the normal base value for the play section one period before, a third area for storing the normal base value for the play section two periods before, and a fourth area for storing the normal base value for the play section three periods before, and the normal base values for four play sections including the current one are saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs a performance display data setting process in step S850. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process of setting performance display data for displaying on the information display 113 the normal base values (performance information) for the four play intervals calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base memory area while switching them every five seconds. The performance display data setting process will be described in detail later.

In step S870, the main CPU 110a performs a test data creation process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process to create test data (test information) to be output to the test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing in step S880. Specifically, it performs display output processing to output signals such as the performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 above to various displays, and processing to output signals such as the test data created in step S870 above.

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs processing for returning to the game program. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs processing to return the flag register from the main RAM 110c, permit interrupts, and return to the game program.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a and ends this timer interrupt process.

In this way, in the pre-start state before game progress control begins (during setting change mode, RWM clear mode, and setting confirmation mode), timer interrupts are not executed, so the number of payouts and outs are not counted, the normal base value is not calculated, and the normal base value is not displayed, which reduces the control burden on the main control board.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 10. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing the input control process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general winning hole detection switch input processing. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the general winning hole 43, and then performs processing to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a large prize opening detection switch input process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the first large prize opening detection switch 50a or the second large prize opening detection switch 56a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the first large prize opening 50 or the second large prize opening 56, and then performs a process to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95.

The main CPU 110a performs a first start hole detection switch input process in step S230. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the first start hole 45, and performs a process to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95, as well as a process to obtain and store special game determination information. The details of the first start hole detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs second start hole detection switch input processing in step S240. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the second start hole detection switch 47a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the second start hole 47, and performs processing to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95, as well as processing to obtain and store special game determination information. Details of the second start hole detection switch input processing will be described later.

In step S250, the main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 44a, i.e., whether the game ball has passed through the normal gate 44, and performs processing to obtain and store normal gate determination information.

In step S260, the main CPU 110a performs specific area detection switch input processing and ends the current input control processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the specific area detection switch 53a, i.e., whether the game ball has passed through the specific area 53, and performs processing to set predetermined data. Details of the specific area detection switch input processing will be described later.

(First start port detection switch input processing of the main control board)
The first start hole detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 11. Fig. 11 is a flowchart showing the first start hole detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a. If a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, the process proceeds to step S230-2. If a detection signal has not been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, the current first start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3 prize ball counter used for the 3 prize balls by adding data indicating 3 prize balls, and in step S230-3, obtains special symbol determination information (random number value for determining a jackpot, random number value for determining special symbols, random number value for determining reach, random number value for determining special symbol fluctuation pattern).

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first reserved number (U1) is less than 4. If the first reserved number (U1) is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S230-5, and if the first reserved number (U1) is not less than 4, the current first start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first reserved number (U1) to update it (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, sets the first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first reserved number (U1) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the first special symbol storage designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and the number of first reserved icons corresponding to the first reserved number (U1) is displayed on the image display device.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a searches for available storage units in the first special pattern determination information storage area, starting from the first storage unit, and stores the special pattern determination information acquired in step S230-3 in the available storage unit.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in a normal game mode. If the game is in a normal game mode, the process proceeds to step S230-9 to perform a pre-reading process of the special symbol determination information obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 45. If the game is not in a normal game mode, the process does not perform a pre-reading process of the special symbol determination information obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 45, and ends the first start hole detection switch input process.

The main CPU 110a performs a first look-ahead process (pre-determination process) in step S230-9. In this first look-ahead process, a pre-determination table (see FIG. 26(a) or FIG. 26(b)) is selected for pre-reading (pre-determination) the special pattern determination information, and the currently acquired special pattern determination information is pre-determined before the first special pattern variation display is performed, and a process is performed to generate a first look-ahead designation command for notifying the performance control board 130 of the result of the pre-determination (special pattern planned variation pattern). The pre-determination table will be described in detail later.

This "first look-ahead specification command" is information that can identify the planned variation pattern of the special symbol, so the performance control board 130 can use the first look-ahead specification command to specify the type of special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, the type of jackpot game or small jackpot game (number of rounds), and the number of times (J1, J2, J3) that the time-saving game will play in the time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends.

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first pre-reading designation command generated in step S230-9 above in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the first pre-reading winning designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and a pre-reading notice (continuous notice display, icon change display) is executed, which gives the player the expectation that a jackpot game will be played over one or more display changes, even before the first special symbol corresponding to the first pre-reading designation command starts to change.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the first reserved number (U1) is "4", but it may be more or less than this. Also, the upper limit of the second reserved number may be less than the upper limit of the second reserved number. Furthermore, the first reserved memory itself may be eliminated by storing the special pattern determination information only in the 0th memory section of the first special pattern determination information storage area.

(Main control board second start port detection switch input processing)
The second start hole detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 12. Fig. 12 is a flowchart showing the second start hole detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the second start hole detection switch 47a. If a detection signal has been input from the second start hole detection switch 47a, the process proceeds to step S240-2. If a detection signal has not been input from the second start hole detection switch 47a, the current second start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the two prize ball counter used for two prize balls by adding data indicating two prize balls, and in step S240-3, obtains special symbol determination information (random number value for determining a jackpot, random number value for determining special symbols, random number value for determining reach, random number value for determining special symbol fluctuation pattern).

In step S240-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second reserved number (U2) is less than 4. If the second reserved number (U2) is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S240-5, and if the second reserved number (U2) is not less than 4, the current second start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S240-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the second reserved number (U2) to update it (U2←U2+1), and in step S240-6, sets a second special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the second reserved number (U2) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the second special symbol storage designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and the number of second reserved icons corresponding to the second reserved number (U2) is displayed on the image display device.

In step S240-7, the main CPU 110a searches for available storage units in the second special pattern determination information storage area, starting from the first storage unit, and stores the special pattern determination information acquired in step S240-3 in an available storage unit.

In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in a time-saving game state. If the game is in a time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step S240-9 to perform pre-reading processing of the special chart determination information obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 47, and if the game is not in a non-time-saving game state, the process does not perform pre-reading processing of the special chart determination information obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 47, and ends the current second start hole detection switch input process.

In step S240-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the remaining number of time-saving times (here, the second number of time-saving times (J2), not the first number of time-saving times (J1) or the third number of time-saving times (J3)) is a predetermined number (e.g., 5 times) or more. If the remaining number of time-saving times is the predetermined number or more, the process proceeds to step S240-10. If the remaining number of time-saving times is not the predetermined number or more, the process ends the current second start hole detection switch input process, assuming that the special chart determination information obtained based on the winning of the game ball into the second start hole 47 will not be pre-read.

In step S240-10, the main CPU 110a performs a second look-ahead process (pre-determination process). In this second look-ahead process, a pre-determination table (see FIG. 26(c)) is selected for looking ahead (pre-determination) the special pattern determination information, the currently acquired special pattern determination information is pre-determined before the second special pattern variation display is performed, and a process is performed to generate a second look-ahead designation command for notifying the performance control board 130 of the result of the pre-determination (special pattern planned variation pattern, look-ahead information).

This "second look-ahead specification command" is information that can identify the result of the special symbol determination information, so the performance control board 130 can use the second look-ahead specification command to identify the type of special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, the type of jackpot game or small jackpot game (number of rounds), and the number of times (J1, J2, J3) that the game will be played in the normal time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends.

In step S230-11, the main CPU 110a sets the second pre-reading designation command generated in step S230-9 in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the second look-ahead command is sent to the performance control board 130, and a look-ahead notice (continuous notice performance, icon change performance) is executed, which gives the player the expectation that a jackpot game will be played over one or more display changes, even before the second special symbol corresponding to the second look-ahead command starts to change.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the second reserved number (U2) is "4", but it may be more or less than this. Also, the upper limit of the second reserved number may be less than the upper limit of the first reserved number. Furthermore, the second reserved memory itself may be eliminated by storing the special pattern determination information only in the 0th memory section of the second special pattern determination information storage area.

(Specific area detection switch input processing on main control board)
Specific area detection switch input processing in the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 13. Fig. 13 is a flow chart showing specific area detection switch input processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S260-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the specific area detection switch 53a. If a detection signal has been input from the specific area detection switch 53a, the process proceeds to step S260-2. If a detection signal has not been input from the specific area detection switch 53a, the current specific area detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S260-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current time is within a specific area effective period during which the passage of the gaming ball into the specific area 53 is valid. Specifically, it determines whether or not a small win game (conversion game) is in progress. If a small win game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S260-3. If the current time is not within the specific area effective period, the process proceeds to step S260-5.

In step S260-3, the main CPU 110a sets in the main RAM 110c a specific area passing flag indicating that the game ball passed through the specific area 53 during a small win game, and specific area passing game state information indicating the game state when the game ball passed through the specific area 53 (information indicating that the game is in the normal game state if the current game state is the normal game state, and information indicating that the game is in the time-saving game state if the current game state is the time-saving game state), and in step S260-4, sets in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c a specific area passing designation command indicating that the game ball passed through the specific area 53 during the specific area effective period, and ends this specific area detection switch input process.

As a result, a specific area passage designation command is sent to the presentation control board 130, and a passing notification presentation is executed to notify the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 (a big win game is being executed). This allows the player to know that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 during a small win game, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In step S260-5, the main CPU 110a sets a specific area passage error designation command, indicating that the game ball passed through the specific area 53 at an abnormal timing, in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends this specific area detection switch input process.

As a result, a specific area passing error designation command is sent to the presentation control board 130, and a passing error notification presentation is executed to notify the player of the occurrence of a passing error in which the game ball passes through the specific area 53 at an abnormal timing. This allows the game center's employees to recognize the occurrence of a passing error and take appropriate measures.

(Special diagram special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special pattern special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 14. Fig. 14 is a flowchart showing the special pattern special electric control process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special chart special power processing data, and in step S302, references the branch destination address from the loaded special chart special power processing data, executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address, and ends the current special chart special power control process.

Specifically, if the special pattern special electric processing data = 0, a special pattern memory determination process (step S310) is executed to perform processing to start the variable display of the special pattern based on the pending memory (special pattern determination information) and processing to change the special pattern special electric processing data to "1", etc.
If the special pattern special electric processing data = 1, a special pattern change process (step S320) is executed to perform processes such as stopping the display of the special pattern as the change time passes and sending a pattern confirmation command to the performance control board 130 and changing the special pattern special electric processing data to "2".
If the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, then as the stop time of the special symbol elapses, if it is a losing special symbol, the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "0", if it is a big win special symbol, the opening time of the big win game is set and the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "3", and if it is a small win special symbol, the opening time of the small win game is set and the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "4", a special symbol stop process (step S330) is executed.

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 3, a jackpot game process (step S340) is executed to perform processing to execute a jackpot game and processing to change the special symbol special electric processing data to "5" based on the end of the final round of play.
If the special chart special electric processing data = 4, a small win game process (step S350) is executed to perform processing to execute a small win game and processing to change the special chart special electric processing data to "0" or "3" based on the completion of the ending of the small win game.
If the special chart special electric processing data = 5, a jackpot game end process (step S360) is executed to perform processes such as ending the jackpot game and changing the special chart special electric processing data to "0" based on the completion of the ending of the jackpot game.

(Special pattern memory determination process of the main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 15. Fig. 15 is a flow chart showing the special symbol storage determination process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state. If the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state, the main CPU 110a ends the current special symbol memory determination process, and if the special symbol is not being displayed in a changing state, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second reserved number (U2) is 1 or greater. If the second reserved number (U2) is 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S310-3, and if the second reserved number (U2) is not 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S310-4.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a updates the second reserved number (U2) by subtracting "1", and in step S310-6, sets a special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the second reserved number (U2) after subtraction in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to update the reserved icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, shifts the data stored in the second special pattern determination information storage area, shifting the special pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special pattern determination information stored in the fourth memory section of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area is shifted to the third memory section of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area. In addition, the special pattern determination information stored in the first memory section of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area is shifted to the zeroth memory section, which is the special pattern determination information execution memory area, and the special pattern determination information used in the previous game that was stored in the zeroth memory section is erased.

On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first reserved number (U1) is 1 or greater. If the first reserved number (U1) is 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S310-5, and if the first reserved number (U1) is not 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S319-1.

The main CPU 110a updates the first reserved number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and sets a special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first reserved number (U1) after subtraction in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S310-6. This causes the special symbol storage designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to update the reserved icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, shifts the data stored in the first special symbol reserve memory area, shifting the special symbol determination information stored in the first memory unit to the fourth memory unit to the previous memory unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area is shifted to the third memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area. In addition, the special symbol determination information stored in the first memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area is shifted to the zeroth memory section, which is the special symbol determination information execution memory area, and the special symbol determination information used in the previous game that was stored in the zeroth memory section is erased.

In addition, in conjunction with the shifting process of the special symbol determination information in step S310-8, special symbol reserved display data indicating the first reserved number (U1) and the second reserved number (U2) after subtraction is set in a specified area of the main RAM 110c. This updates the display contents of the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 and the second special symbol reserved indicator 64.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second special chart determination information reserve memory area is shifted in priority over the first special chart determination information reserve memory area in steps S310-2 to S310-8 (the second reserved number is subtracted in priority over the first reserved number), but the first special chart determination information reserve memory area or the second special chart determination information reserve memory area may be shifted in the order in which the game balls enter the starting hole (the first reserved number and the second reserved number are subtracted in the order of winning), or the first special chart determination information reserve memory area may be shifted in priority over the second special chart determination information reserve memory area (the first reserved number is subtracted in priority over the second reserved number).

In step S311, the main CPU 110a executes a jackpot determination process to determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached and the special symbol stop data based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th memory unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution memory area. The details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the big win determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the special symbol designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the performance symbol 70a that will be displayed in a stopped state as a result of the variable performance.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a performs a special pattern change pattern determination process to determine the change pattern (change time) of the special pattern based on the special pattern determination information stored in the 0th memory unit, which is the special pattern determination information execution memory area. The details of the special pattern change pattern determination process will be described later.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special pattern change pattern designation command corresponding to the type of special pattern change pattern determined in the special pattern change pattern determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the special pattern change pattern designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the change performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the change performance performed during the special pattern change display.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol fluctuation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol fluctuation pattern determined in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316 starts displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol. As a result, the data creation process in step S700 creates LED lighting data for displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process in step S800, thereby displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag to end the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets the special symbol special signal processing data to "1" and ends this special symbol memory determination process.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. If the customer waiting state flag is set, the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S319-2. Note that the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the special symbol changing display and special game (jackpot game) are not being executed, but the requirement may also include that the normal symbol changing display and auxiliary game are not being executed.

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S319-3, sets a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the machine is in a customer waiting state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends this special symbol memory determination process. This causes the customer waiting state designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute a customer waiting demo performance to encourage the player to play.

(Main control board jackpot determination process)
The big win determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 16. Fig. 16 is a flow chart showing the big win determination process in the main control board 110.

In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a refers to the setting value stored in the setting value area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S311-2, selects a jackpot determination table (see FIG. 17) for determining whether or not a jackpot has been reached (or whether or not a small jackpot has been reached). Details of the jackpot determination table will be described later.

In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a compares the current setting value and the random number value for determining a jackpot with the jackpot determination table to determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached (whether or not a small jackpot has been reached). If it is a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S311-4; if it is not a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S311-6.

In step S311-4, the main CPU 110a sets the game status information at the time of winning the jackpot in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S311-5, selects a special jackpot symbol determination table (see FIG. 18(a)) for determining the type of special jackpot symbol, and proceeds to step S311-11. Details of the special jackpot symbol determination table will be described later.

In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a compares the current setting value and the random number value for determining a big win against the big win determination table to determine whether or not a small win has occurred. If it has, the process proceeds to step S311-7. If it has not, the process proceeds to step S311-8, assuming that it has not occurred.

In step S311-7, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for small wins (see FIG. 18(b)) for determining the type of special symbol for small wins, and proceeds to step S311-11. Details of the special symbol determination table for small wins will be described later.

In step S311-8, the main CPU 110a compares the current setting value and the random number value for determining a jackpot with the jackpot determination table to determine whether or not a special miss has occurred. If it is a special miss, the process proceeds to step S311-9. If it is a normal miss, not a special miss, the process proceeds to step S311-10.

In step S311-9, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for special misses (see FIG. 18(c)) for determining the type of special symbol for special misses, and proceeds to step S311-11. Details of the special symbol determination table for special misses will be described later.

In step S311-8, the main CPU 110a selects the special symbol determination table for normal misses (see FIG. 18(d)) for determining the special symbol for normal misses, and proceeds to step S311-11. Details of the special symbol determination table for normal misses will be described later.

In step S311-11, the main CPU 110a compares the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) for which a jackpot determination is to be made and the random number value for special symbol determination with the special symbol determination table to determine the special symbol that will be displayed as a result of the variable display performed on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61.

In step S311-12, the main CPU 110a sets the special stop symbol data corresponding to the special symbol determined in step S311-9 in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and ends this jackpot determination process.

In this way, when a special miss (time-saving) is won, the special miss symbol is determined from the special miss symbol determination table for special miss (time-saving). This makes it possible to distinguish it from a normal miss, and when the special miss symbol stops and is displayed, the player can be informed that a second special time-saving game state has occurred, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

(Big win determination table)
Figure 17(a) is a jackpot determination table for the first special pattern for determining (jackpot determination) special pattern determination information obtained based on the entry (scoring) of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 45, and Figure 17(b) is a jackpot determination table for the second special pattern for determining (jackpot determination) special pattern determination information obtained based on the entry (scoring) of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 47.

As shown in Figures 17(a) and 17(b), the jackpot determination table associates the current setting value, the random number value for jackpot determination, and the determination result (jackpot, special miss, normal miss), and for reference, the rightmost column lists the approximate probability of winning in the case of a "jackpot" and a "special miss."

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 17(a) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 17(b), and determines whether it is a "jackpot," "special miss," or "normal miss" based on the current setting value and the random number value for jackpot determination.

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 17(a), when the set value is "1", 200 random numbers for jackpot determination from "100" to "299" are determined as "jackpots", 100 random numbers for jackpot determination from "2000" to "2099" are determined as "special misses", and any other random numbers for jackpot determination are determined as "misses".

(Special symbol determination table)
Figure 18(a) is a special pattern determination table for a big win that is referred to when determining the stopping pattern of a special pattern when a big win is determined, Figure 18(b) is a special pattern determination table for a small win that is referred to when determining the stopping pattern of a special pattern when a small win is determined, Figure 18(c) is a special pattern determination table for a special miss that is referred to when determining the stopping pattern of a special pattern when a special miss is determined, and Figure 18(d) is a special pattern determination table for a normal miss that is referred to when determining the stopping pattern of a special pattern when a normal miss is determined.

As shown in Figures 18(a) to (d), the special symbol determination table associates the type of special symbol that determines the stop symbol, the random number value for special symbol determination, the result of the special symbol determination, the stop special symbol data indicating the result of this determination, and the special symbol designation command indicating the result of the special symbol determination, and for reference, the lighting state of the LED in the special symbol display is described in the rightmost column.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are normal miss special symbols that do not execute a jackpot game. The special symbol "01" is a jackpot special symbol that executes the first jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play, the special symbol "02" is a jackpot special symbol that executes the second jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play, the special symbol "03" is a jackpot special symbol that executes the first jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play, and the special symbol "11" is a jackpot special symbol that executes the fourth jackpot game consisting of ten rounds of play. The special symbol "12" is a jackpot special symbol that executes the fifth jackpot game consisting of ten rounds of play, the special symbol "13" is a small jackpot special symbol that executes the first small jackpot game, the special symbol "14" is a small jackpot special symbol that executes the second small jackpot game, and the special symbol "15" is a small jackpot special symbol that executes the third small jackpot game. The special symbols "20", "21", "30", and "31" are special losing symbols that will not trigger a jackpot game.

Details will be given later, but the degree of advantage of each type of jackpot game is 3rd jackpot game < 1st jackpot game < 2nd jackpot game < 4th jackpot game = 5th jackpot game.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18 is that the types of big win special symbols, small win special symbols, special miss special symbols, and normal miss special symbols are the same and do not change depending on the setting value. By doing so, the gameplay does not become too complicated, and players can play with peace of mind. Note that at least one of the big win special symbols and small win special symbols may be one type.

The second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18 is that the selection ratios of various losing symbols, the selection ratios of various special big win symbols, and the selection ratios of various small win symbols are constant and do not change depending on the setting value. This prevents the player's degree of advantage from changing drastically depending on the setting value, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

A third feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18 is that the number of LEDs (light-emitting components) of the special symbol display that are lit when displaying a small win special symbol or a losing special symbol is fewer than the number of LEDs (light-emitting components) of the special symbol display that are lit when displaying a big win special symbol. This makes it easier to understand the type of special symbol being displayed, making the game more interesting.

The fourth feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18 is that the number of LEDs (light-emitting components) of the special symbol display that are lit when displaying a normal loss special symbol is fewer than the number of LEDs (light-emitting components) of the special symbol display that are lit when displaying a small win special symbol. This makes it easier to understand the type of special symbol being displayed, making the game more interesting.

The fifth feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18 is that the number of LEDs (light-emitting components) of the special symbol display that are lit when a normal miss special symbol is displayed is smaller than the number of LEDs (light-emitting components) of the special symbol display that are lit when a special miss special symbol is displayed. This makes it easier to understand the type of special symbol being displayed, making the game more interesting.

The sixth feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18 is that the LEDs (light-emitting members) of the special symbol display that light up when displaying the small win special symbol include the same LEDs (light-emitting members) of the special symbol display that light up when displaying the losing special symbol. This makes it easier to know that it is a small win special symbol or a losing special symbol, rather than a big win special symbol, and makes the game more interesting.

The seventh feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18 is that when the special symbol determination information (first special symbol) obtained based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 45 is determined to be a jackpot (first result), any of the first to third jackpot games can be played, and when the special symbol determination information (second special symbol) obtained based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 47 is determined to be a jackpot (first result), any of the fourth to fifth jackpot games can be played. In this way, the type of jackpot game that can be played changes depending on the type of special symbol, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Note that one losing special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but multiple losing special symbols may be associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The number of LEDs on the special pattern display that light up when displaying the big win special pattern may be more than three or less than three. The number of LEDs on the special pattern display that light up when displaying the small win special pattern may be more than two or less than two, but even in this case, the number may be different from the number of LEDs on the special pattern display that light up when displaying the big win special pattern.

Also, the LED of the special pattern display that lights up when displaying the small win special pattern and the LED of the special pattern display that lights up when displaying the losing special pattern may not be the same (they may be completely different).

In addition, the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol does not allow a small jackpot to be won, but it may be possible to make it so that a small jackpot is won. In this case, it is preferable to make the probability of winning lower than that of the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol.

(Main control board special chart variation pattern determination process)
The special pattern variation pattern determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 19. Fig. 19 is a flowchart showing the special pattern variation pattern determination process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current game state is normal. If the current game state is normal, the process proceeds to step S313-2. If the current game state is not normal, the process proceeds to step S313-3, assuming that the current game state is time-saving.

In step S313-2, the main CPU 110a selects the appropriate table (matching the game situation) from the normal special pattern change pattern determination table (see FIG. 20) for determining the special pattern change pattern in the normal game state, and moves the process to step S313-4. Details of the normal special pattern change pattern determination table will be described later.

In step S313-3, the main CPU 110a selects the relevant table (matching the game situation) from the time-saving special chart fluctuation pattern determination table (see Figures 21 to 25) for determining the special chart fluctuation pattern in the time-saving game state, and moves the process to step S313-4. Details of the time-saving special chart fluctuation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step S313-4, the main CPU 110a compares the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the random number value for reach determination, the reserved number (U1 or U2), and the random number value for special symbol variation pattern determination against the special symbol variation pattern determination table to determine the special symbol variation pattern.

In step S313-5, the main CPU 110a sets the change time corresponding to the determined special chart change pattern in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S313-6, sets a special chart change pattern designation command corresponding to the determined change pattern in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special chart change pattern designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the change performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the change performance.

In step S313-7, the main CPU 110a increments by +1 the number of times the special symbol has changed since the specified condition was met (RWM cleared, the number of times the special symbol has changed since the end of the jackpot game was cleared to 0) stored in the main RAM 110c. Note that the number of times the special symbol has changed is incremented by +1 regardless of whether the game is in a normal game mode, a time-saving game mode, or whether the first special symbol or second special symbol has changed. Note that this number of times the special symbol has changed is referenced in the special symbol change process described below.

In step S313-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in a time-saving game state. If the game is not in a time-saving game state, the current special chart variation pattern determination table is terminated, and if the game is in a time-saving game state, in step S313-9, a time-saving count designation command corresponding to the remaining number of time-saving times is set in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the time-saving count designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and the remaining number of time-saving times is notified. When this process is completed, the current special chart variation pattern determination process is terminated.

In this embodiment, in order to prevent the occurrence of a high probability game state (high probability time-saving game state) in which the probability of determining a jackpot is higher than in the normal game state, the number of fluctuations is updated by +1 regardless of the game state. However, if a high probability game state different from the normal time-saving game state is to be generated after the end of a jackpot game state (for example, after the end of a second jackpot game), it is advisable not to update the number of fluctuations in the high probability game state.

(Normal special chart variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 20 is a normal special symbol variation pattern determination table that is referenced when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol in the normal game state.

Specifically, FIG. 20(a) is a normal special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 1 that is referenced when there is no jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c, or when there is jackpot history information and the number of fluctuations until the first special time-saving game state is 51 or more, or when the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol is consumed after the end of a normal time-saving game state (entering battle mode described later) in which the number of time-saving times (J2) of the second special symbol is set to 7, and FIG. 20(b) is a normal special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 2 that is referenced when there is jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c and the number of fluctuations until the first special time-saving game state is 50 or less (during the countdown mode described later).

FIG. 20(c) is a normal special pattern change pattern determination table 3 that is referenced when a change display is executed when the remaining reserved (second reserved memory) of the second special pattern is consumed after a normal time-saving game state (Ranbu mode, Super Ranbu mode, Infinite mode, described later) in which the time-saving number of times (J2) of the second special pattern is set to 55 times or more has ended normally by the time-saving number of times (any of J1 to J3) becoming "0", and FIG. 20(d) is a normal special pattern change pattern determination table 4 that is referenced when a change display is executed when the remaining reserved (second reserved memory) of the second special pattern is consumed after a normal time-saving game state (Ranbu mode, Super Ranbu mode, Infinite mode, described later) in which the time-saving number of times (J2) of the second special pattern is set to 55 times or more has ended normally by the time-saving number of times (any of J1 to J3) becoming "0", or after the first special time-saving game state has ended, or after the second special time-saving game state has ended.

(Special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for normal time reduction and second special time reduction)
21 to 24 are special symbol variation pattern determination tables for normal time-saving and second special time-saving game states, which are referenced when determining the variation pattern of special symbols in the normal time-saving game state and the second special time-saving game state.

Specifically, FIG. 21(a) is a special pattern change pattern determination table 1 for normal time-saving and second special time-saving that is referenced when the normal time-saving game state and the second special time-saving game state are in a normal time-saving game state and a second special time-saving game state when the time-saving number of times (J2) for the second special pattern is set to 7 times and the remaining number of small wins is 1 time, and when the change display before the final time-saving change is executed (during the entry battle mode described later), and FIG. 21(b) is a special pattern change pattern determination table 2 for normal time-saving and second special time-saving that is referenced when the normal time-saving game state and the second special time-saving game state are in a normal time-saving game state and a second special time-saving game state when the time-saving number of times (J2) for the second special pattern is set to 7 times and the remaining number of small wins is 1 time, and when the final time-saving change is executed (during the entry battle mode described later).

Figure 22(a) is a special pattern change pattern determination table 3 for normal time-saving that is referenced when the change display before the final time-saving change is executed (during the Ranbu mode described later) in the normal time-saving game state when the number of time-saving times (J2) of the second special pattern is set to 55, 95, or 496 times and the number of remaining small wins is 1, and Figure 22(b) is a special pattern change pattern determination table 4 for normal time-saving that is referenced when the final time-saving change is executed (during the Ranbu mode described later) in the normal time-saving game state when the number of time-saving times (J2) of the second special pattern is set to 55, 95, or 496 times and the number of remaining small wins is 1.

Figure 23(a) is a special pattern change pattern determination table 5 for normal time-saving that is referenced when the number of time-saving times (J2) for the second special pattern is set to 95 times and the number of remaining small wins is 2 in the normal time-saving game state and a change display before the final time-saving change is executed (during the super wild dance mode described later), and Figure 23(b) is a special pattern change pattern determination table 6 for normal time-saving that is referenced when the number of time-saving times (J2) for the second special pattern is set to 95 times and the number of remaining small wins is 2 in the normal time-saving game state and a change display before the final time-saving change is executed (during the super wild dance mode described later).

Figure 24(a) is a special pattern change pattern determination table 7 for normal time-saving that is referenced when the change display before the final time-saving change is executed (in infinite mode, described later) in the normal time-saving game state when the number of time-saving times (J2) of the second special pattern is set to 496 times and the number of remaining small wins is 2, and Figure 24(b) is a special pattern change pattern determination table 8 for normal time-saving that is referenced when the final time-saving change is executed (in infinite mode, described later) in the normal time-saving game state when the number of time-saving times (J2) of the second special pattern is set to 496 times and the number of remaining small wins is 2.

(Special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for first special time reduction)
FIG. 25 is a special symbol change pattern determination table for the first special time-saving mode, which is referenced when determining the change pattern of the special symbol in the first special time-saving game state.

Specifically, FIG. 25(a) is a special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 1 for the first special time-saving game that is referenced when the first special time-saving game state is in a state where there is no jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c, or when the first special time-saving game state is in a state where there is jackpot history information and the remaining number of small wins is two, and the second or subsequent fluctuation display is executed from the start of the first special time-saving game state (in the infinite mode described below). FIG. 25(b) is a special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 2 for the first special time-saving game that is referenced when the first special time-saving game state is in a state where there is jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c and the remaining number of small wins is two, and the first fluctuation of the time-saving game is executed (in the infinite mode). FIG. 25(c) is a special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 3 for the first special time-saving game that is referenced when the fluctuation display is executed in the first special time-saving game state when the remaining number of small wins is one (in the wild dance mode described below).

As shown in Figures 20 to 25, the special symbol variation pattern determination table associates the type of special symbol (starting hole) that performs the variation display, the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the special symbol determination (stop special symbol data), a random number value for reach determination, the first reserved number (U1) or the second reserved number (U2), a random number value for determining the special symbol variation pattern, the special symbol variation pattern as the determination result, and the variation time of the special symbol, and the contents of the variation performance are listed for reference.

Therefore, a "special symbol variation pattern" can be said to be capable of identifying at least the type of special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol. In addition, as will be described in detail later, since a jackpot game or a small jackpot game is executed depending on the type of special symbol, it can also be said to be capable of identifying the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game or small jackpot game. In addition, since the number of times the time-saving game state (time-saving number of times) is set at the end of a jackpot game depending on the type of special symbol, it can also be said to be capable of identifying the number of time-saving times.

The effects shown in the special pattern change pattern determination table shown in Figures 20 to 25 are "normal change," "shortened change," and "ultra-shortened change," which mean that the three effect patterns 70a change independently at high speed and stop without reaching a reach.

"Reach" refers to a variation mode that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be played, such as when some of the combinations of performance symbols 70a that indicate a jackpot temporarily stop and other performance symbols 70a change. For example, when a combination of three performance symbols 70a, "777," is set as the combination of performance symbols 70a that indicate a jackpot (jackpot result mode), the same performance symbol 70a temporarily stops at "7" in the left and right areas, and the remaining performance symbols 70a change in the center area.

"Temporary stop" refers to a state in which the performance pattern 70a sways slightly or deforms slightly, making it appear to the player that the performance pattern 70a is stopped (but is not completely stopped).

"Normal reach" refers to a reach effect in which the same effect pattern 70a temporarily stops in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect pattern 70a fluctuates in the center area, and this is the reach with the lowest expectation of a jackpot. Note that in this embodiment, a "normal reach" does not result in a jackpot, but it may be configured so that a jackpot occurs with a "normal reach."

"SP Reach" is a super reach that occurs after a normal reach and has a higher chance of resulting in a jackpot than a normal reach.

An "SPSP reach" is a special reach that occurs after a normal reach or a super reach and has a higher chance of winning than a super reach. For example, the three performance symbols 70a shrink and move to the corners of the image display device, creating a more special performance than an "SP reach" using almost the entire display area of the image display device.

The "full rotation reach" is a reach that occurs after a normal reach or a super reach, and guarantees a big win. For example, from a blackout effect, the three effect patterns 70a all move at a slow speed while being identical, and a more special effect than the "SPSP reach" is produced using almost the entire display area of the image display device.

The "chance effect" is a effect that indicates a chance for the second special time-saving game state to occur when a special miss special symbol is displayed without a reach effect, and also notifies the player whether the second special time-saving game state will occur.

"Super short fluctuation after result" refers to the first fluctuation display in the normal game state that follows the final fluctuation display in the normal time-saving game state, in which the result display shows the results of the game during the series of advantageous periods during which the time-saving game state continues, triggered by a jackpot game from the normal game state or a special time-saving game state, known as the first hit, (this does not include the number of winning balls or the number of balls won, which are the results of the game in the special time-saving game state before the jackpot game) is displayed, and only the fluctuation display of the special symbol TZ is displayed.

"Long revival fluctuation after result" refers to the first fluctuation display in normal play mode that follows the final fluctuation display in normal time-saving play mode, in which only the fluctuation display of the special pattern TZ is displayed after the result display described above, and a revival display is displayed to suggest that the result is favorable to the player (a big win or a small win).

"Post-result revival variation" refers to the first variation display in normal play mode that follows the final variation display in normal time-saving play mode, in which only the variation display of the special TZ pattern is displayed after the result display described above, and the revival display is shorter than the result revival long variation.

The "time-saving return effect after result" refers to a display in which, following the display of the final variation in the normal time-saving play state, a variation display corresponding to the remaining reserve (second reserve memory) of the second special symbol in the normal play state is performed, and, with the result display described above being performed, only the variation display of the special symbol TZ is performed, and a return display is performed to return to the time-saving play state (second special time-saving play state).

"Super-shortened fluctuation after shutter" refers to a fluctuation display before the final round of the normal time-saving game state, or the final round of the first special time-saving game state, or the final round of the second special time-saving game state, followed by a fluctuation display corresponding to the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special pattern in the normal game state, in which a shutter display (end suggestion display) suggesting the end of the time-saving game state is performed and only the fluctuation display of the special pattern TZ is performed.

"Long revival fluctuation after shutter" refers to a fluctuation display before the final round of the normal time-saving game state, or the final round of the first special time-saving game state, or the final round of the second special time-saving game state, followed by a fluctuation display corresponding to the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special pattern in the normal game state, in which a shutter display (end suggestion display) suggesting the end of the time-saving game state is displayed and only the fluctuation display of the special pattern TZ is displayed, and a revival display is displayed suggesting a result favorable to the player (a big win or a small win) while appearing to transition to the normal game state.

"Post-shutter revival fluctuation" refers to a fluctuation display before the final round of the normal time-saving game state, or the final round of the first special time-saving game state, or a fluctuation display corresponding to the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special pattern in the normal game state that is displayed following the final round of the second special time-saving game state, in which a shutter display (end suggestion display) suggesting the end of the time-saving game state is displayed and only the fluctuation display of the special pattern TZ is displayed, and a revival display that is shorter than the post-shutter revival long fluctuation is displayed.

The "time-saving return effect after shutter" refers to a display in which, in the change display before the final time of the normal time-saving play state, or the change display of the final time of the first special time-saving play state, or the change display of the final time of the second special time-saving play state, which is followed by a change display corresponding to the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special pattern in the normal play state, a shutter display (end suggestion display) is made suggesting the end of the time-saving play state, and then a return display is made to return to the time-saving play state (second special time-saving play state).

"Battle Reach" is a reach effect where an ally character and an enemy character battle to see whether or not they will enter Ranbu Mode, Super Ranbu Mode, or Infinite Mode (which will result in a miss, big win, or small win). The modes that are most advantageous to the player are Ranbu Mode < Super Ranbu Mode < Infinite Mode.

The "rewrite effect" is an effect that indicates a chance to rewrite the number of time-saving times (J2) of the second special symbol displayed on the image display device without a reach effect being performed, and if the number of time-saving times (J2) of the second special symbol increases, a rewrite success indication is displayed, and if the number of time-saving times (J2) of the second special symbol does not increase, a rewrite failure indication is displayed.

The "Final Battle Reach" is a reach effect that indicates whether or not the friendly character and enemy character will have a final battle and enter the Ranbu Mode, Super Ranbu Mode, or Infinite Mode (which will result in a miss, big win, or small win) as described below.

"Promotion Battle Hyping Change" is a scene where an ally character and enemy character hype up the possibility of a battle, but then the battle doesn't actually take place.

The "Promotion Battle Reach" is a reach effect in which an ally character and an enemy character battle each other to indicate whether or not the player will be promoted from Ranbu Mode (described below) to Super Ranbu Mode or Infinite Mode (either a miss, big win, or small win).

"Result fluctuation" refers to a display that shows the results of play during a series of advantageous periods in which the time-saving play state continues, triggered by a jackpot play from a normal play state or a special time-saving play state, known as the first win (this does not include the number of winning balls or the number of balls won, which are the results of play in the special time-saving play state before the jackpot play).

"Result revival fluctuation" refers to a presentation in which, after the start of the result display that shows the game results during the series of advantageous periods during which the time-saving game state continues, triggered by a jackpot game from a normal game state or a special time-saving game state, known as the first hit, a revival display is displayed suggesting that the result is favorable to the player (jackpot or small win).

The "Continuous Battle Reach" is a reach effect in which an ally character and an enemy character battle each other, indicating whether or not the Super Ranbu Mode or Infinite Mode described below will continue (either a miss, big win, or small win).

"Unbeatable Battle Hyping Fluctuation" is a performance in which an ally character and enemy character hype up the possibility of a battle, and then the battle does not take place.

The "Unbeatable Battle Reach" is a reach effect in which a friendly character and an enemy character battle each other, and the friendly character always wins, resulting in a favorable outcome for the player (a big win or a small win).

A "(entry effect) long fluctuation" is an effect that, if it is the first fluctuation of the first special time-saving play state, results in a miss after the entry effect that suggests entry into the first special time-saving play state is performed, and if it is not the first fluctuation of the first special time-saving play state (if it is the second or subsequent fluctuation display), then the entry effect is not performed and results in a miss.

The "(entry effect) immediate win change" is a change that, if it is the first change of the first special time-saving game state, will notify the player that a favorable result (a big win or a small win) will occur without going through a reach after the entry effect that suggests entering the first special time-saving game state is performed, and if it is not the first change of the first special time-saving game state (if it is the second or subsequent change display), will notify the player that a favorable result (a big win or a small win) will occur without going through a reach.

The "(Entry Effect) Unbeaten Battle Reach" is an effect where, if this is the first change of the first special time-saving play state, an entry effect is performed that suggests entry into the first special time-saving play state, followed by the aforementioned Unbeaten Battle Reach. If this is not the first change of the first special time-saving play state (if this is the second or subsequent change indication), then the aforementioned Unbeaten Battle Reach is performed without an entry effect being performed.

A "long entry effect" is an effect that occurs during the first change of the first special time-saving game state, in which an entry effect is performed that suggests entering the first special time-saving game state, and then ends in a miss.

"Reach change without entry effect" refers to the first change of the first special time-saving game state in which a reach effect is performed without any entry effect suggesting entry into the first special time-saving game state, followed by a big win or small win.

The first feature of the special chart variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 20 to 25 is that, regardless of whether or not a special time-saving play state has been passed, during the normal time-saving play state (series of advantageous periods), when the number of time-saving times (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and the final time is reached, a variation effect is executed in which the result is displayed. This allows the player to check the results of the play during the series of advantageous periods, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the special chart variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 20 to 25 is that during the variation display that is the final round of the first special time-saving game state that does not involve a jackpot game, a variation effect is executed in which a shutter display (end suggestion display) is displayed to indicate the end of the time-saving game state without displaying the results. This makes it possible to prevent players from becoming dissatisfied by the results of a series of advantageous periods being displayed even though a jackpot game has not been played, and makes it possible to increase interest in the game.

The third feature of the special chart variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 20 to 25 is that during the variation display that is performed after the remaining number of small wins (Z) becomes "0" before the number of time-saving times (J1 to J3) becomes "0" in the normal time-saving play state and the normal time-saving play state ends, a variation effect is executed in which a shutter display (end suggestion display) is performed to indicate the end of the time-saving play state without displaying the results. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming dissatisfied by the results of the game during a series of advantageous periods being displayed even though the normal time-saving play state has ended, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the special chart variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 20 to 25 is that it is possible to perform variation display using different special chart variation pattern determination tables for the normal time-saving play state and the first special time-saving play state. By doing so, even if the time-saving play state is the same, the presentation content can be made different between the normal time-saving play state and the first special time-saving play state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the special chart change pattern determination table shown in Figures 20 to 25 is that, in the first change during the first special time-saving game state, it is possible to perform a change display using a different special chart change pattern determination table depending on whether or not there is a jackpot history (RWM clear). In this way, the presentation content during the first change display during the first special time-saving game state can be made different depending on whether or not there is a jackpot history, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the special chart fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figures 20 to 25 is that, in the second to final fluctuations during the first special time-saving game state, regardless of the presence or absence of a jackpot history (RWM clear), it is possible to display the fluctuations using a common special chart fluctuation pattern determination table (special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 1 for special time-saving). This makes it possible to reduce data volume and achieve efficient control, which in turn makes it possible to shorten the development period.

The seventh feature of the special chart variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 20 to 25 is that a variation pattern with a short variation time (instant win variation where no reach effect is executed) is more likely to be determined when a jackpot occurs during the first special time-saving game state than when a jackpot occurs during the normal game state. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction in a situation where a jackpot game that would cause the first special time-saving game state is not executed for a long period of time, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the special chart variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 20 to 25 is that a variation pattern with a short variation time (instant win variation where no reach effect is executed) is more likely to be determined when a jackpot occurs during the first special time-saving game state than when a jackpot occurs during the normal time-saving game state or the second special time-saving game state. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction in a situation where a jackpot game that would cause the first special time-saving game state is not executed for a long period of time, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the special chart fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figures 20 to 25 is that the average fluctuation time is shorter when the fluctuation display is executed during the first special time-saving game state than when the fluctuation display is executed during the normal time-saving game state or the second special time-saving game state. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction in a situation where a jackpot game that would cause the first special time-saving game state is not executed for a long period of time, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figures 20 to 25 is that it is possible to display fluctuations using different fluctuation pattern determination tables (different fluctuation patterns) for a specific period (the consumption period of the remaining reserved second special symbol) after the end of the normal time-saving game state (normal end when the number of time-saving games becomes "0") and a specific period (the consumption period of the remaining reserved second special symbol) after the end of the first special time-saving game state. By doing so, it is possible to give the player different aftertastes when the normal time-saving game state ends and when the first special time-saving game state ends, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. Also, even if the same normal game state is reached, the presentation content can be made different depending on the previous game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figures 20 to 25 is that it is possible to display fluctuations using the same fluctuation pattern determination table (same fluctuation pattern) in a specific period (the consumption period of the remaining reserved second special symbol) after the end of the normal time-saving game state (the end of the break due to the remaining number of small wins becoming "0") and in a specific period (the consumption period of the remaining reserved second special symbol) after the end of the first special time-saving game state. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the memory capacity related to the fluctuation pattern determination table (fluctuation pattern) and to make the control at the end of the time-saving game state more efficient. In addition, even if a different time-saving game state ends, the same normal game state is presented for the specific period, so the presentation can be done in a natural flow, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

It is possible to use different special chart fluctuation pattern determination tables during the normal time-saving play state and during the first special time-saving play state, but for example, when executing fluctuation display other than the initial fluctuation or the final fluctuation in the first special time-saving play state, a special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for normal time-saving (for example, special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 3 for normal time-saving, or special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 5 for normal time-saving, or special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 7 for normal time-saving, etc.) may be used. In this way, it is possible to reduce the data volume and realize efficient control, which in turn makes it possible to shorten the development period.

In addition, for the initial fluctuation during the first special time-saving game state, a different special chart fluctuation pattern determination table is used depending on whether or not there is a jackpot history (RWM clear), but the same special chart fluctuation pattern determination table (for example, special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 1 for the first special time-saving or special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 2 for the first special time-saving) may be used. In this way, it is possible to reduce the data volume and achieve efficient control, which in turn makes it possible to shorten the development period.

In addition, the same special chart change pattern determination table is used for the final change during the first special time-saving game state regardless of whether there is a jackpot history (RWM clear), but a different special chart change pattern determination table may be used. By doing this, the presentation content during the final change display during the first special time-saving game state can be made different depending on whether there is a jackpot history, making the game more interesting.

In addition, different special pattern change pattern determination tables are used for the specific period (the consumption period of the remaining reserved second special pattern) after the end of the normal time-saving play state (normal end when the time-saving count becomes "0") and the specific period (the consumption period of the remaining reserved second special pattern) after the end of the first special time-saving play state, but the same special pattern change pattern determination table (special pattern change pattern) may be used to execute the special pattern change display. In this case, the special pattern change display may be executed using any of the normal special pattern change pattern determination table 1 shown in FIG. 20(a), the normal special pattern change pattern determination table 3 shown in FIG. 20(c), and the normal special pattern change pattern determination table 4 shown in FIG. 20(d). However, it is preferable that the result display is executed after the end of the normal time-saving play state (normal end), but the result display is not executed after the end of the first special time-saving play state.

In addition, the same special pattern change table is used in the specific period (the consumption period of the remaining reserved second special pattern) after the end of the normal time-saving game state (the end of the break due to the remaining number of small wins becoming "0") and the specific period (the consumption period of the remaining reserved second special pattern) after the end of the first special time-saving game state, but the special pattern change display may be executed using a different special pattern change pattern determination table (special pattern change pattern). In this case, in the specific period after the end of the normal time-saving game state (the end of the break), the special pattern change display may be executed using the normal special pattern change pattern determination table 3 shown in FIG. 20(c), and in the specific period after the end of the first special time-saving game state, the special pattern change display may be executed using the normal special pattern change pattern determination table 4 shown in FIG. 20(d). However, it is preferable that the result display is executed after the end of the normal time-saving game state (after the end of normal end), but the result display is not executed after the end of the first special time-saving game state.

It is also possible to use the same special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table (normal special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 1) in the normal time-saving play state and the second special time-saving play state, but a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table (special symbol fluctuation pattern) dedicated to the second special time-saving play state may be provided to execute the special symbol fluctuation display, or the same special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table (special symbol fluctuation pattern) may be used in the first special time-saving play state and the second special time-saving play state to execute the special symbol fluctuation display. In this case, it is recommended to execute the special symbol fluctuation display using the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 3 for the first special time-saving play state shown in FIG. 25(c).

In addition, in the first change in the second special time-saving game state, the same special chart change pattern determination table is used regardless of whether or not there is a jackpot history (RWM clear), but it is also possible to use a different special chart change pattern determination table depending on whether or not there is a jackpot history (RWM clear).

In addition, in the normal game state, if there is no jackpot history, the normal special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 1 in FIG. 20(a) is used, while if there is a jackpot history, the normal special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 2 in FIG. 20(b) is used. However, even if there is no jackpot history, if there is a small jackpot history (such as a case where a small jackpot game was played but a jackpot game was not played), the normal special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 2 in FIG. 20(b) may be used.

In addition, in the first special time-saving game state, if there is no jackpot history, the special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 1 for the first special time-saving game in FIG. 25(a) is used, while if there is a jackpot history, the special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 2 for the first special time-saving game in FIG. 25(b) is used. However, even if there is no jackpot history, if there is a small jackpot history (such as a case where a small jackpot game was executed but a jackpot game was not executed), the special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 2 for the first special time-saving game in FIG. 25(b) may be used.

(Pre-judgment table)
FIG. 26 is a pre-determination table that is referenced when pre-determining (reading ahead) special chart determination information obtained based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole.

Specifically, FIG. 26(a) is normal pre-determination table 1 that is referenced when the game is in a normal game state and there is no jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c, or when there is jackpot history information and the number of changes until the first special time-saving game state is 51 or more, FIG. 26(b) is normal pre-determination table 2 that is referenced when a change display is executed when the game is in a normal game state and there is jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c and the number of changes until the first special time-saving game state is 50 or less, and FIG. 26(c) is a time-saving pre-determination table that is referenced when the game is in a time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 26, the pre-determination table associates the game state, the type of special symbol (starting hole), the result of the jackpot determination (random number value for jackpot determination), the result of the special symbol determination (random number value for special symbol determination), the random number value for reach determination, the random number value for special symbol variation pattern determination, and the special symbol planned variation pattern as the determination result.

Therefore, the "special symbol planned change pattern" and "preview information" can be said to be capable of identifying at least the type of special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the planned special symbol change pattern. In addition, as will be described in detail later, since a jackpot game or a small jackpot game is executed depending on the type of special symbol, it can also be said to be capable of identifying the type (number of rounds) of a jackpot game or a small jackpot game. In addition, since the number of time-saving game states (time-saving number of times) is set at the end of a jackpot game depending on the type of special symbol, it can also be said to be capable of identifying the number of time-saving number of times.

(Special pattern change processing on the main control board)
The special symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 27. Fig. 27 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the change time set in the special symbol change pattern determination process described above has elapsed. If the change time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S320-2, and if the change time has not elapsed, the current special symbol change process is terminated.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a stops the display of the special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process described above, and in step S320-3, sets the stop time according to the game status in a specified area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the display shows the final variation in the time-saving game state, 8.0 seconds is set, and if the display shows any other variation, 0.5 seconds is set.

In step S320-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether a time-saving flag (either the normal time-saving flag, the first special time-saving flag, or the second special time-saving flag) is set in the main RAM 110c. If the time-saving flag is set, the process proceeds to step S320-5 to update the remaining number of time-saving times, and if the time-saving flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S320-13 to not update the remaining number of time-saving times.

In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the current variable display of the special symbol is the first special symbol. If it is the first special symbol, in step S320-6, the first time-saving number (J1), which is the number of time-saving times for the first special symbol saved in the main RAM 110c, and the third time-saving number (J3), which is the total number of time-saving times for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are decremented by one each. If it is not the first special symbol (it is the second special symbol), in step S320-7, the second time-saving number (J2), which is the number of time-saving times for the second special symbol saved in the main RAM 110c, and the third time-saving number (J3) mentioned above are decremented by one each.

In step S320-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether any one of the first time-saving count (J1), the second time-saving count (J2), and the third time-saving count (J3) has become "0." If it has become "0," the process moves to step S320-12 to end the time-saving game state, and if it has not become "0," the process moves to step S320-9.

In step S320-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a small win special symbol has stopped and been displayed. If it is not a small win special symbol, the process proceeds to step S320-13. If it is a small win special symbol, in step S320-10, the remaining number of small wins (Z) until the time-saving game state is terminated, which is saved in the main RAM 110c, is decremented by 1.

In step S320-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the remaining number of small wins has reached "0." If the remaining number of small wins has reached "0," the time-saving game state is terminated and processing proceeds to step S320-12. If the remaining number of small wins has not reached "0," processing proceeds to step S320-13.

In step S320-12, the main CPU 110a clears the time-saving flag (either the normal time-saving flag, the first special time-saving flag, or the second special time-saving flag) and the various time-saving counts (J1, J2, J3) saved in the main RAM 110c, and ends the time-saving game state.

In step S320-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a special jackpot symbol has stopped and been displayed. If it is not a special jackpot symbol, processing proceeds to step S320-15. If it is a special jackpot symbol, processing proceeds to step S320-14, where the time-saving flag and the various time-saving counts (J1, J2, J3) saved in the main RAM 110c are cleared to end the time-saving game state (start the normal game state). Once this processing is completed, processing proceeds to step S320-22.

In step S320-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of times of change saved in the main RAM 110c has reached a specified number (496 times, which is the maximum number of times of time-saving in the normal time-saving play state, plus 500 times, which is set to the remaining number of reserved balls of 4). If the number of times of change has reached the specified number, the first special time-saving play state is to be started and processing proceeds to step S320-16, and if the number of times of change has not reached the specified number, the first special time-saving play state is not to be started and processing proceeds to step S320-18.

In step S320-16, the main CPU 110a saves the number of times the first special time-saving feature will be played (J1=60, J2=750, J3=750) and the number of remaining small wins (Z=2) in the main RAM 110c, and in step S320-17, sets the first special time-saving flag in the main RAM 110c to transition to the first special time-saving game state.

In step S320-18, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a special miss symbol has stopped being displayed. If it is not a special miss symbol (if it is a normal miss symbol), the second special time-saving game state is not started and processing proceeds to step S320-21. If it is a special miss symbol, processing proceeds to step S320-19.

In step S320-19, the main CPU 110a saves the number of time-saving times for the second special time-saving mode (J1=60, J2=10, J3=12) and the remaining number of small wins (Z=1) in the main RAM 110c, and in step S320-20, sets the second special time-saving flag in the main RAM 110c to transition to the second special time-saving game state.

In step S320-21, the main CPU 110a sets the time-saving count designation command corresponding to the various time-saving counts (J1, J2, J3) saved in the main RAM 110c in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the time-saving count designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, which notifies the user of the remaining time-saving count.

In step S320-22, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special signal processing data to "2", and in step S320-23, sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state (the game state identified from the presence or absence of the time-saving flag) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the game state designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing to update the game state is performed on the performance control board 130. When this processing is completed, the current special symbol variation processing ends.

In this way, when any of the various time-saving play counts (J1 to J3) becomes "0" during the time-saving play state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 47, the time-saving play state (normal time-saving play state, first special time-saving play state, second special time-saving play state) is terminated even if the remaining number of small wins (Z) is not "0". Therefore, the time-saving play state can be terminated according to the progress of the game (the execution status of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol), which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game. Also, even if there is no second reserved number when the normal play state is changed to the time-saving play state and the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first reserved memory is executed, the number of times (the number of J2) of the variable display of the second special symbol that is to be executed in the time-saving play state can be executed to the maximum, which makes it possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when a small win symbol is displayed (a small win game is executed) during a time-saving game state in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 47, even if various time-saving times (J1, J2, J3) remain, the time-saving game state ends when the remaining number of small wins (Z) becomes "0". Therefore, even if a player tries to play advantageously (whether to pass the game ball through the specific area 53 in a small win game by aiming for an advantageous jackpot) by referring to the type of pre-reading performance or the special pattern (combination of performance patterns 70a) displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage depending on the playing method during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, even if there are remaining small wins (Z), the time-saving game state ends when the various time-saving counts (J1, J2, or J3) reach "0." This prevents the time-saving game state from continuing until the small win symbol is stopped and displayed, giving the player an excessive advantage, and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, when the number of times that the special symbol's missing variable display is executed after the first condition is met (RWM cleared) reaches a specified number of times (the specified number of times that the special symbol's variable display is a missing result), and when the number of times that the special symbol's missing variable display is executed after the second condition is met (the number of times that the special symbol's variable display is cleared to 0 due to the end of the jackpot game) reaches a specified number of times (the specified number of times that the special symbol's variable display is a missing result), it is possible to generate a first special time-saving game state for a specified period of time (until 750 times of the special symbol variable display are executed). Therefore, it is possible to give the player the surprise of the time-saving state occurring without going through a jackpot game, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the number of times (500) at which the first special time-saving game state occurs is greater than the maximum number of times (496) set in the normal time-saving game state. This means that the first special time-saving game state will not occur during the normal time-saving game state, eliminating the inconvenience of players losing track of the game's progress, and making the game more interesting.

In addition, the number of fluctuations (500 times) at which the first special time-saving game state occurs is greater than the maximum number of time-saving times (496 times) set in the normal time-saving game state by the upper limit number of the second reserved number (4 pieces). Therefore, when the maximum number of time-saving times (496 times) is set in the normal time-saving game state, it can be felt as if the player has moved directly from the normal time-saving game state to the first special time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the first special time-saving game state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is not cleared to 0. Therefore, the first special time-saving game state will not occur again between big wins (after the special time-saving game state starts or ends), which ensures a balance of benefits between the gaming facility and the player, and also makes it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, when a special miss special pattern different from the normal miss special pattern is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern, it is possible to generate a second special time-saving game state for a period (J2 = 10 times) different from the number of time-saving times in the normal time-saving game state (J2 = 7 times / 55 times / 95 times / 496 times). Therefore, it is possible to give the player the unexpected feeling that the time-saving state occurs without going through a jackpot game, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game. It is also easier to distinguish this from the normal time-saving game state which goes through a jackpot game, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of setting the maximum number of time-saving times in the normal time-saving game state (J2 = 496 times) to a number less than the number of fluctuations (500 times) at which the first special time-saving game state occurs, the maximum number of time-saving times in the normal time-saving game state and the number of fluctuations at which the first special time-saving game state occurs may be set to the same number. In this way, the normal time-saving game state and the first special time-saving game state are seamlessly connected, making it feel as if the normal time-saving game state has been extended, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, the maximum number of time-saving times in the normal time-saving game state (J2 = 496 times) may be set to a number greater than the number of fluctuations (500 times) at which the first special time-saving game state occurs. In this case, rather than overlapping (parallel) the normal time-saving game state and the first special time-saving game state, it is advisable to switch from the normal time-saving game state to the first special time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to simplify the control of the time-saving game state, and it is also easier for players to grasp the gameplay, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, regardless of whether the first special time-saving game state is in progress or not, it is possible to generate a second special time-saving game state when a special miss special symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol. However, when a special miss special symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol during the first special time-saving game state, instead of overlapping the first special time-saving game state and the second special time-saving game state, the first special time-saving game state may be continued without generating the second special time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to simplify the control of the time-saving game state, and it is also possible to make it easier for players to grasp the gameplay, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, regardless of whether or not the normal time-saving game state is in progress, when the special miss symbol is stopped and displayed, it is possible to generate a second special time-saving game state. However, when the special miss symbol is stopped and displayed during the normal time-saving game state, instead of overlapping the normal time-saving game state and the second special time-saving game state, the normal time-saving game state may continue without generating the second special time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to simplify the control of the time-saving game state, and it is also possible to make it easier for players to grasp the gameplay, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, regardless of whether or not the game is in the normal time-saving game state, it is possible to generate a second special time-saving game state when a special miss symbol is displayed, but it is preferable to switch from the normal time-saving game state to the second special time-saving game state when a special miss symbol is displayed during the normal time-saving game state, rather than overlapping the normal time-saving game state and the second special time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to simplify the control of the time-saving game state, and it is also easier for players to grasp the gameplay, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when a first special miss symbol (e.g., a special symbol for which the second time-saving count is set to 10) is stopped during the normal time-saving game state, the normal time-saving game state may continue without generating the second special time-saving game state, and when a second special miss symbol (e.g., a special symbol for which the second time-saving count is set to 20) is stopped during the normal time-saving game state, the normal time-saving game state may be switched to the second special time-saving game state, or the reverse may be true. In this way, it is possible to improve the gameplay and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, regardless of whether or not the second special time-saving game state is in progress, when the special miss symbol is stopped and displayed, it is possible to generate the second special time-saving game state. However, when the special miss symbol is stopped and displayed during the second special time-saving game state, instead of overlapping the previously generated second special time-saving game state with a new second special time-saving game state, the previously generated second special time-saving game state may be continued without generating a new second special time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to simplify the control of the time-saving game state, and it is also possible to make it easier for players to grasp the gameplay, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, regardless of whether or not the second special time-saving game state is in progress, when the special miss special symbol is stopped and displayed, it is possible to generate the second special time-saving game state. However, when the special miss special symbol is stopped and displayed during the second special time-saving game state, it is preferable to switch from the previously generated second special time-saving game state to a new second special time-saving game state, rather than overlapping the previously generated second special time-saving game state with the new second special time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to simplify the control of the time-saving game state, and it is also possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the gameplay, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the first special miss special symbol (e.g., a special symbol for which the second time-saving count is set to 10) is stopped during the second special time-saving game state, the previously occurring second special time-saving game state may be continued without generating a new second special time-saving game state, and when the second special miss special symbol (e.g., a special symbol for which the second time-saving count is set to 20) is stopped during the second special time-saving game state, the previously occurring second special time-saving game state may be switched to a new second special time-saving game state, or the reverse may be true. In this way, it is possible to improve the gameplay and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, when the first special time-saving game state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c may be cleared to 0, and a first special time-saving game state occurring flag indicating that the first special time-saving game state has already occurred may be set in the main RAM 110c. In this case, if the first special time-saving game state occurring flag is not present when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number (500 times), the number of fluctuations may be cleared to 0 to cause the first special time-saving game state to occur, and if the first special time-saving game state occurring flag is present, the number of fluctuations may be cleared to 0 to prevent the first special time-saving game state from occurring.

In addition, the number of time-saving times in the second special time-saving play state (J2 = 10) was different from the number of time-saving times in the normal time-saving play state (J2 = 7 times/55 times/95 times/496 times), but for example, it may be set to the same as a specific number of time-saving times in the normal time-saving play state (J2 = 7 times/55 times) so as to be less than the maximum number of time-saving times in the normal time-saving play state (J2 = 496), or it may be set to a number of time-saving times less than the minimum number of time-saving times in the normal time-saving play state (J2 = 7 times) (for example, J2 = 5).

In addition, during the special symbol change process (when the special symbol starts to stop displaying), various time-saving game states are terminated, a first special time-saving game state is generated, or a second special time-saving game state is generated. However, during the special symbol stop process (when the special symbol stops displaying), which will be described later, various time-saving game states may be terminated, a first special time-saving game state may be generated, or a second special time-saving game state may be generated.

(Special pattern stop processing of main control board)
The special symbol stop processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 28. Fig. 28 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stop time set in the special symbol variation process described above has elapsed. If the stop time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S330-2, and if the stop time has not elapsed, the current special symbol stop process is terminated.

In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a special jackpot symbol is displayed. If it is, the process proceeds to step S330-3. If it is not (it is) a special jackpot symbol (it is) a special small jackpot symbol or a special miss symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-5.

In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot opening transition process, such as selecting jackpot game control data (maximum number of rounds, maximum number of winnings, opening time, etc.) corresponding to the stop special symbol data (special jackpot symbol) from the jackpot game jackpot winning hole control data determination table (see FIG. 29(a)) for executing a jackpot game, and in step S330-4, sets "3" to the special symbol special power processing data in order to transition to jackpot game processing, and proceeds to step S330-8. Details of the jackpot game jackpot winning hole control data determination table will be described later.

In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a small win special symbol is displayed. If it is a small win special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-6. If it is not a small win special symbol (if it is a losing special symbol), the process proceeds to step S330-10.

In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a performs a small win opening transition process, such as selecting control data for the small win game (maximum number of winnings, opening time, etc.) corresponding to the stop special symbol data (special small win symbol) from the large win port control data determination table for small win game (see FIG. 29(b)) for executing the small win game, and in step S330-7, sets "4" to the special symbol special power processing data to transition to the small win game, and proceeds to step S330-8.

In step S330-8, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time corresponding to the selected control data in the main RAM 110c, and in step S330-9, sets the opening designation command in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the opening designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute the opening performance of the big win game or small win game. When this processing is completed, the current special pattern stop processing ends.

In step S330-10, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special signal processing data to "0" to move processing to the special symbol memory determination process, and ends this special symbol stop process.

(Control Data Table)
Figure 29(a) is a diagram showing a large prize opening control data judgment table for jackpot play for controlling the large prize opening during jackpot play (special play), Figure 29(b) is a diagram showing a large prize opening control data judgment table for small prize play for controlling the large prize opening during small prize play, and Figure 29(c) is a diagram showing a specific area control data judgment table for small prize play for controlling a specific area during small prize play.

As shown in FIG. 29(a), the big prize opening control data judgment table for big prize play corresponds to the special stop data of the special pattern, the maximum number of rounds in a big prize play, the maximum number of winning balls in a big prize opening in one round play, the opening time from the start of a big prize play until the first round play is executed, the type of big prize opening to be opened in each round play, the maximum number of openings of the big prize opening in each round play, the opening time of the big prize opening for one opening of each round play, the interval time during which the big prize opening is closed after the end of a round play (the time required to eject the game balls from the big prize opening), and the ending time from the end of the final round play until the end of the big prize play.

When the special stop data is "01", a first jackpot game is played in which three rounds of play are played, when the special stop data is "02", three rounds of play are played and a second jackpot game is played in which the state after the jackpot game is more favorable to the player than the first jackpot game, when the special stop data is "03", three rounds of play are played and a third jackpot game is played in which the state after the jackpot game is more unfavorable to the player than the first jackpot game.

In addition, when the stop special data is "11", 10 rounds of play are played and a fourth jackpot game is executed in which the state after the jackpot game is more favorable to the player than the third jackpot game, and when the stop special data is "12", 10 rounds of play are played and a fifth jackpot game is executed in which the state after the jackpot game is more favorable to the player than the third jackpot game (with the same degree of favorability as the fourth jackpot game).

In addition, when the stop special data is "13", the first V jackpot game is executed, in which the remaining two rounds of play are played via the first small jackpot game, which is the first round of play; when the stop special data is "14", the remaining nine rounds of play are played via the second small jackpot game, which is the first round of play, and the second V jackpot game, which is more advantageous to the player than the first V jackpot game, is executed; when the stop special data is "15", the remaining two rounds of play are played via the third small jackpot game, which is the first round of play, and the third V jackpot game, in which the jackpot game conditions may be more disadvantageous to the player than the first V jackpot game, is executed.

The big prize winning hole control data judgment table for big prize games shown in FIG. 29(a) has the following features: when a big prize game (first to third big prize games) based on winning in the first starting hole 45 is executed, the maximum number of rounds (10 rounds) of big prize games are not executed, whereas when a big prize game (fourth to fifth big prize games) based on winning in the second starting hole 47 is executed, the maximum number of rounds (10 rounds) of big prize games can be executed. By doing this, it is possible to differentiate the playability when a game ball wins in the first starting hole 45 from when a game ball wins in the second starting hole 47, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 29(b), the large prize opening control data judgment table for small prize games associates the special stop data of the special pattern (type of small prize game), the maximum number of times the large prize opening can be opened in a small prize game, the maximum number of prizes won into the large prize opening in a small prize game, the opening time until the large prize opening is converted to an open state, the type of large prize opening to be opened, the opening time of the large prize opening for one opening, the interval time during which the large prize opening is closed (the time required to eject the game ball from the large prize opening), and the ending time from the final closure of the large prize opening to the end of the small prize game.

If the stop special data is "13", the first small win game is executed, if the stop special data is "14", the second small win game is executed, and if the stop special data is "15", the third small win game is executed.

The large prize opening control data judgment table for small prize games shown in FIG. 29(b) has the following feature: the interval time during which the first large prize opening 50 is closed is set to a time during which at least one game ball is rolling on the top surface of the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 from the start to the end of the interval (0.82 seconds for an interval of 0.67 seconds). By doing so, the opening time of the first large prize opening 50 can be shortened, and the number of times the first large prize opening is opened can be increased within the predetermined maximum opening time of the large prize opening in small prize games (1.8 seconds), making the game more interesting.

As shown in FIG. 29(c), the specific area control data judgment table for small win games associates the special stop data of the special pattern (type of small win game), the maximum number of times the specific area 53 opens in a small win game, the opening timing of the specific area 53, and the closing timing of the specific area 53.

In a small win game, regardless of the type of small win game, the specific area 53 is converted to an open state when the large prize winning opening is opened in the small win game, and the specific area 53 is converted to a closed state when the large prize winning opening is closed.

The specific area control data judgment table for small win games shown in FIG. 29(c) has the following feature: the timing for opening and closing the specific area 53 is set so that a game ball that enters the first large winning port 50 during a small win game passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of nearly 100% (1/1). This allows the player to play the small win game with peace of mind, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, instead of opening and closing the specific area 53 so that the game ball that enters the first large winning port 50 during a small win game passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of almost 100% (1/1), the specific area 53 may be opened and closed with a probability of 50% (1/2) or 25% (1/4).

In addition, depending on the type of small prize game, there may be a case where the specific area 53 is opened or closed so that a game ball that has entered the first large prize opening 50 has a probability of passing through the specific area 53 of approximately 100% (1/1) (e.g., the second small prize game), and a case where the specific area 53 is opened or closed so that a game ball that has entered the first large prize opening 50 has a probability of passing through the specific area 53 of 25% (1/4) (e.g., the third small prize game).

(Jackpot Game Processing on the Main Control Board)
The big win game processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 30. Fig. 30 is a flow chart showing the big win game processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening is currently in progress. Specifically, it determines whether or not the opening time set in the special symbol stop process described above is equal to or greater than "0". If the opening is in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-2, and if the opening is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-5.

In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening time set in the special symbol stop process described above has elapsed. If the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-3. If the opening time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process is terminated.

In step S340-3, the main CPU 110a performs a round play transition process. Specifically, it adds "1" to the number of round play times (R) stored in the main RAM 110c, and sets a round in progress flag in the main RAM 110c to indicate that a round play is in progress.

In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds played (R) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game processing. This causes the round designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute a round performance corresponding to the current round of play.

In step S340-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a round of play is currently in progress. Specifically, it determines whether or not a round-in-progress flag is set in the main RAM 110c. If a round of play is in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-6. If a round of play is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-12.

In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for opening the large prize opening have been met. Specifically, it determines whether the time elapsed since the start of the current round of play has reached the timing for opening the large prize opening specified by the control data for the large prize game. If the conditions for opening the large prize opening have been met, the process proceeds to step S340-7. If the conditions for opening the large prize opening have not been met, the process proceeds to step S340-8.

The main CPU 110a performs a large prize opening process in step S340-7. Specifically, it identifies the type of large prize opening to be opened (first large prize opening 50 or second large prize opening 56) and the opening time of the current large prize opening (first large prize opening 50 or second large prize opening 56) from the control data for the large prize game, and sets the opening time of the large prize opening and the drive data for the large prize opening opening solenoid (first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b or second large prize opening opening solenoid 57b) in the main RAM 110c. This converts the large prize opening into an open state.

In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for closing the large prize opening have been met. Specifically, it determines whether the current opening of the large prize opening is the opening before the final opening in the current round of play, and whether that opening time has elapsed. If the conditions for closing the large prize opening have been met, processing proceeds to step S340-9, and if the conditions for closing the large prize opening have not been met, processing proceeds to step S340-10.

The main CPU 110a performs a large prize opening closing process in step S340-9. Specifically, it identifies the interval time (closing time) of the current large prize opening (first large prize opening 50 or second large prize opening 56) from the control data for the large prize game, sets the interval time (closing time) of the large prize opening in the main RAM 110c, and clears the drive data for the large prize opening opening/closing solenoid set in the main RAM 110c. This converts the large prize opening to a closed state.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the condition for transitioning to an interval has been met. Specifically, it determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening (first large prize opening 50 or second large prize opening 56) in the current round of play has reached the maximum number of winning balls or whether the opening time for the final opening of the large prize opening in the current round of play has elapsed. If the condition for transitioning to an interval has been met, processing proceeds to step S340-11, and if the condition for transitioning to an interval has not been met, processing for the current large prize game is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs interval transition processing in step S340-11. Specifically, it identifies the current interval time (the time when the large prize opening is closed) from the control data for the large prize game, sets the interval time in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and clears the drive data for the large prize opening solenoid set in the main RAM 110c. This converts the large prize opening into a closed state. It also sets an interval in progress flag, indicating that an interval is in progress, in place of the round in progress flag stored in the main RAM 110c. When the interval transition processing is completed, the current large prize game processing is terminated.

In step S340-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current time is during an interval. Specifically, it determines whether or not an interval flag is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the current time is during an interval, the process proceeds to step S340-13. If the current time is not during an interval, the process proceeds to step S340-19.

In step S340-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether the interval time has elapsed. If the interval time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-14. If the interval time has not elapsed, the process for this jackpot game ends.

In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether the final round of play in the current jackpot game has ended. If the final round of play has ended, the process proceeds to step S340-17. If the final round of play has not ended, the process proceeds to step S340-15.

The main CPU 110a performs a round play transition process in step S340-15. Specifically, it adds "1" to the number of round play times (R) stored in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. It also sets a round play in progress flag in place of the interval in progress flag stored in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S340-16, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds played (R) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game processing. This causes the round designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute a round performance corresponding to the current round of play.

The main CPU 110a performs ending transition processing in step S340-17. Specifically, it identifies the current ending time from the control data for the big win game, and sets the ending time in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. It also sets an ending in progress flag, indicating that the ending is in progress, in place of the interval in progress flag stored in the main RAM 110c.

In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a sets an ending designation command indicating that this is the ending of the jackpot game in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game processing. This causes the ending designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute the ending performance corresponding to the current jackpot game.

In step S340-19, the main CPU 110a determines whether the game is currently ending. Specifically, it determines whether the ending flag is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the game is currently ending, the process proceeds to step S340-20. If the game is not currently ending, the current jackpot game process ends.

In step S340-20, the main CPU 110a determines whether the ending time has elapsed. If the ending time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game processing is terminated. If the ending time has elapsed, in step S340-21, the special chart special signal processing data is set to "5" to move processing to the jackpot game termination processing, and the current jackpot game processing is terminated.

(Small win game processing of the main control board)
The small win game processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 31. Fig. 31 is a flow chart showing the small win game ending processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening is currently in progress. Specifically, it determines whether or not the opening time set in the special symbol stop process described above is equal to or greater than "0". If the opening is in progress, the process proceeds to step S350-2, and if the opening is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S350-4.

In step S350-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening time set in the special symbol stop processing described above has elapsed. If the opening time has elapsed, in step S350-3, an open/close game in progress flag is set in the main RAM 110c to indicate that an open/close game in which the large prize opening is opened and closed is in progress, and if the opening time has not elapsed, the current small prize game processing is terminated.

In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special prize opening is being opened or closed. If it is being opened or closed, the process proceeds to step S350-5. If it is not being opened or closed, the process proceeds to step S350-21.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for opening the large prize opening have been met. Specifically, it determines whether the opening or interval of the small prize game has ended. If the conditions for opening the large prize opening have been met, the process proceeds to step S350-6. If the conditions for opening the large prize opening have not been met, the process proceeds to step S350-7.

The main CPU 110a performs a large prize opening process in step S350-6. Specifically, it specifies the type of large prize opening to be opened (first large prize opening 50 or second large prize opening 56) and the opening time of this large prize opening (first large prize opening 50 or second large prize opening 56) from the control data for the small prize game shown in FIG. 10(c), and sets the opening time of the large prize opening and the drive data for the large prize opening opening solenoid (first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b or second large prize opening opening solenoid 57b) in the main RAM 110c. This causes the large prize opening to be converted into an open state.

In step S350-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for opening the specific area 53 have been met. Specifically, it determines whether the timing for opening the specific area 53 specified by the control data for the specific area shown in FIG. 10(c) (here, the timing for opening the large prize opening) has arrived. If the conditions for opening the specific area 53 have been met, processing proceeds to step S350-8; if the conditions for opening the specific area 53 have not been met, processing proceeds to step S350-9.

The main CPU 110a performs a specific area opening process in step S350-8. Specifically, the drive data for the specific area opening/closing solenoid 53b is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the specific area 53 to be converted to an open state.

In step S350-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for closing the specific area 53 have been met. Specifically, it determines whether the timing for closing the specific area 53 (here, the timing for closing the large prize opening) specified by the control data for the specific area shown in FIG. 10(c) has arrived. If the conditions for closing the specific area 53 have been met, processing proceeds to step S350-10; if the conditions for closing the specific area 53 have not been met, processing proceeds to step S350-11.

The main CPU 110a performs a specific area closing process in step S350-10. Specifically, it clears the drive data for the specific area opening/closing solenoid 53b that is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the specific area 53 to be converted to a closed state.

In step S350-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for closing the large prize opening have been met. Specifically, it determines whether the opening time for the large prize opening has elapsed and whether the number of prizes won through the large prize opening has reached the maximum number of prizes. If the conditions for closing the large prize opening have been met, processing proceeds to step S350-12; if the conditions for closing the large prize opening have not been met, processing proceeds to step S350-13.

The main CPU 110a performs the large prize opening closing process in step S350-12. Specifically, it identifies the interval time (closing time) from the control data for the small prize game shown in FIG. 10(c), sets the interval time for the large prize opening in the main RAM 110c, and clears the drive data for the large prize opening opening solenoid set in the main RAM 110c. This converts the large prize opening to a closed state.

In step S350-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether the final interval time in the small win game has elapsed. If the final interval time has elapsed, in step S350-14, the open/close game in progress flag set in the main RAM 110c is cleared, and if the final interval time has not elapsed, the current small win game processing is terminated.

In step S350-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether the above-mentioned specific area passing flag has been saved in the main RAM 110c. If the specific area passing flag has been saved, the process proceeds to step S350-16 assuming that a jackpot game will be executed when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the open/close game, and if the specific area passing flag has not been saved, the process proceeds to step S350-19 assuming that an ending will be executed when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 during the open/close game.

In step S350-16, the main CPU 110a clears the specific area passing flag saved in the main RAM 110c, and in step S350-17, performs a process to transition to a jackpot game. Specifically, the main CPU 110a selects control data (maximum number of rounds, maximum number of winnings, opening time, etc.) corresponding to the stopped special symbol data (stopped special symbol) from the jackpot game jackpot prize opening control data judgment table shown in FIG. 10(a), and performs processes such as clearing the time-saving flag and various time-saving numbers (J1, J2, J3) saved in the main RAM 110c.

In step S350-18, the main CPU 110a sets the special chart special electric processing data to "3" to move processing to the big win game processing, and ends this small win game processing.

The main CPU 110a performs ending transition processing in step S350-19. Specifically, it identifies the current ending time from the control data for the small win game, and sets the ending time in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S350-20, the main CPU 110a sets an ending designation command indicating that this is the ending of the small win game in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current small win game processing. This causes the ending designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute an ending performance corresponding to the current small win game (such as a disappointment notification performance that notifies players that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 53 during the small win game, more specifically during the open/close game).

In step S350-21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently ending. Specifically, it determines whether or not the ending time set in step S350-19 is equal to or greater than "0". If the game is currently ending, the process proceeds to step S350-22. If the game is not currently ending, the current small win game process ends.

In step S350-22, the main CPU 110a determines whether the ending time set in step S350-19 described above has elapsed. If the ending time has not elapsed, the current small win game processing is terminated, and if the ending time has elapsed, in step S350-23, the special symbol special power processing data is set to "0" to move processing to the special symbol memory determination processing, and then the current small win game processing is terminated.

In this way, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during a small win game, the big win game will not be executed until the small win game (conversion game) ends (the first big win opening is opened ten times or ten game balls win). Therefore, the player will not be put at a disadvantage depending on the timing when the game ball passes through the specific area 53, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during a small win game, the big win game is executed without ending the small win game. This prevents the time between the small win game and the big win game from being prolonged, making the game more interesting. Note that the big win game may be executed after the ending of the small win game.

(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The big win game ending process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 32. Fig. 32 is a flow chart showing the big win game ending process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S360-1, the main CPU 110a obtains the special stop symbol data saved in the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-2, it determines whether the special stop symbol data is a special jackpot symbol. If it is a special jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to step S360-3, and if it is not a special jackpot symbol (it is a special small jackpot symbol), the process proceeds to step S360-5.

In step S360-3, the main CPU 110a acquires the game state information at the time of winning the jackpot that is saved in the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-4, selects a first game state setting table (see FIG. 33(a)) for setting the game state after the jackpot based on the game state information at the time of winning the jackpot, and proceeds to step S360-7. Details of the first game state setting table will be described later.

In step S360-5, the main CPU 110a acquires the game state information at the time of passing the specific area saved in the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-6, selects a second game state setting table (see FIG. 33(b)) for setting the game state after the big win based on the game state information at the time of passing the specific area, and proceeds to step S360-7. Details of the second game state setting table will be described later.

In step S360-7, the main CPU 110a compares the acquired game status information with the selected game status setting table, determines the game status flag, the number of time-saving times (J1 to J3), and the number of remaining small wins (Z) as the game status after the big win, and sets them in the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-8, sets a game status designation command corresponding to the game status flag in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the game status designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing to update the game status is performed on the performance control board 130.

In step S360-9, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special signal processing data to "0" to move processing to the special symbol memory determination process, and ends the current jackpot game end process.

In this way, at the end of a big win game that is executed when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during a small win game, it is possible to perform a predetermined process (specifically, a process of determining the game conditions after the big win game (game state, number of time-saving rounds, number of remaining small wins) and setting the determined game conditions in the main RAM 110c) based on the game state when the game ball passed through the specific area during the small win game. Therefore, it is possible to control the game (set the game conditions) by utilizing events that occur during the actual game, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small jackpot game, it is possible to carry out a predetermined process (specifically, a process of determining the game conditions after the jackpot game (game state, number of time-saving rounds, number of remaining small jackpots) and setting the determined game conditions in the main RAM 110c) based on the game state when the jackpot was determined. Therefore, it is possible to make the gameplay different depending on whether it is a jackpot game that goes through a small jackpot game or a jackpot game that does not go through a small jackpot game, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, at the end of a big win game that does not involve a small win game, a predetermined process may be performed based on the game state when the big win special symbol is displayed, rather than performing a predetermined process based on the game state when the big win is determined.

(Game Status Setting Table)
Figure 33(a) is a diagram showing a first game status setting table for setting the game status after the end of a jackpot game that does not involve a small win, and Figure 33(b) is a diagram showing a second game status setting table for setting the game status after the end of a jackpot game that involves a small win.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), the first game state setting table corresponds to the special stop data of the jackpot special symbol, the game state information at the time of winning the jackpot indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the game state flag to be set (time-saving flag indicating the time-saving game state), the first time-saving number (J1) which is the number of times the first special symbol changes to end the time-saving game state, the second time-saving number (J2) which is the number of times the second special symbol changes to end the time-saving game state, the third time-saving number (J3) which is the number of times the combined first special symbol and second special symbol change to end the time-saving game state, and the remaining number of small wins (Z) which is the number of times the small win changes to end the time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 33(b), the second game state setting table corresponds to the stop special symbol data of the small win special symbol, game state information at the time of passing a specific area 53 indicating the game state when the game ball passes through the specific area 53, the game state flag to be set (time-saving flag indicating the time-saving game state), the first time-saving number (J1) which is the number of times the first special symbol changes to end the time-saving game state, the second time-saving number (J2) which is the number of times the second special symbol changes to end the time-saving game state, the third time-saving number (J3) which is the number of times the combined first special symbol and second special symbol changes to end the time-saving game state, and the remaining number of small wins (Z) which is the number of times the small win changes to end the time-saving game state.

The first feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 33 is that there are jackpot games (first jackpot game, third jackpot game) in which the second time-saving number of times (J2) set when executed in the time-saving game state is greater than the second time-saving number of times (J2) set when executed in the normal game state. By doing this, the second time-saving number of times (J2) set can be made different depending on the type of jackpot game, improving playability and making the game more interesting.

The second feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 33 is that there are jackpot games (second jackpot game, fourth jackpot game, fifth jackpot game) in which the second time-saving number of times (J2) set when executed in the normal game state is the same as the second time-saving number of times (J2) set when executed in the time-saving game state, and the second time-saving number of times (J2) of these jackpot games is greater than the second time-saving number of times (J2) of the other jackpot games (first jackpot game, third jackpot game). In this way, the value of the jackpot game can be differentiated by the number of time-saving times, rather than by the difference in the prize balls that can be acquired during the jackpot game, making it possible to improve the playability and increase the interest in the game.

A third feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 33 is that there are jackpot games (first jackpot game, second jackpot game, third jackpot game) in which the remaining number of small wins (Z) set when executed in the time-saving game state is greater than the remaining number of small wins (Z) set when executed in the normal game state. By doing this, the remaining number of small wins (Z) set can be made different depending on the type of jackpot game, improving playability and making the game more interesting.

The fourth feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 33 is that there are jackpot games (fourth jackpot game, fifth jackpot game) in which the remaining number of small wins (Z) set when executed in the normal game state is the same as the remaining number of small wins (Z) set when executed in the time-saving game state, and in the normal game state, the remaining number of small wins (Z) of that jackpot game is greater than the remaining number of small wins (Z) of the other jackpot games (first jackpot game, second jackpot game, third jackpot game). In this way, the value of the jackpot game can be differentiated by the remaining number of small wins, rather than the difference due to the prize balls that can be acquired during the jackpot game, making it possible to improve the playability and increase the interest in the game.

The fifth feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 33 is that there are jackpot games (first V jackpot game, third V jackpot game) in which the second time-saving number of times (J2) set when executed in the time-saving game state is greater than the second time-saving number of times (J2) set when executed in the normal game state, among the jackpot games executed via the small jackpot game. In this way, the second time-saving number of times (J2) set can be made different depending on the type of jackpot game that is executed via the small jackpot game, which improves the playability and makes the game more interesting.

The sixth feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 33 is that the number of remaining small wins (Z) set for a jackpot game that is executed via a small win game in the time-saving game state is greater than the number of remaining small wins (Z) set for a jackpot game in the normal game state. In this way, the value of a jackpot game that passes through a small win game can be made different depending on the game state, improving the gameplay and making the game more interesting.

The seventh feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 33 is that when the first jackpot game (second jackpot game, fourth jackpot game, fifth jackpot game, second V jackpot game) is played, the number of times (first time-saving number, second time-saving number, third time-saving number) of the variable display of the special symbol that ends the normal time-saving game state does not change regardless of the game state before the jackpot game is played (whether it is a normal game state or a time-saving game state), and when the second jackpot game (first jackpot game, third jackpot game, first V jackpot game, third V jackpot game) is played, the number of times (second time-saving number) of the variable display of the special symbol that ends the normal time-saving game state changes depending on the game state before the jackpot game is played. In this way, the progress of the game can be reflected in the profit that the player can obtain, so that the player's interest in the game state before the jackpot game is played can be attracted and the fun of the game can be improved.

The eighth feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 33 is that the normal time-saving game state can be ended when the number of times the variable display of the special symbol has been executed in the normal time-saving game state reaches a predetermined number (J1 to J3 = 0), or when the number of times it has been determined that a small win game will be executed reaches a predetermined number (the remaining number of small wins (Z) reaches "0"). This makes it possible to give the player a thrilling feeling that the normal time-saving game state will end even if the number of time-saving times (J1 to J3) does not reach "0", and also to prevent the player from choosing a type of small win game (type of big win game) that directly leads to a big win game and executing the big win game, which would harm fair play, and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The number of times the special symbols change display to end the time-saving game state is set to three types: the first time-saving number of times (J1), the second time-saving number of times (J2), and the third time-saving number of times (J3). However, it may be two types: the first time-saving number of times (J1) and the second time-saving number of times (J2), or two types: the first time-saving number of times (J1) and the third time-saving number of times (J3), or two types: the second time-saving number of times (J2) and the third time-saving number of times (J3), or it may be one type: the third time-saving number of times (J3).

In addition, when a jackpot game that does not go through a small jackpot game (first to fifth jackpot games) is executed, the number of times the special symbol variable display that ends the normal time-saving game state (first time-saving number of times, second time-saving number of times, third time-saving number of times) does not change regardless of the game state before the jackpot game is executed (whether it is a normal game state or a time-saving game state), and when a jackpot game that goes through a small jackpot game (first V to third V jackpot games) is executed, the number of times the special symbol variable display that ends the normal time-saving game state (second time-saving number of times) may change depending on the game state before the jackpot game is executed.

In addition, instead of generating the normal time-saving game state after all jackpot games are completed, for example, the game may transition to the normal game state without generating the normal time-saving game state after the first jackpot game or the first V jackpot game is completed, and the normal time-saving game state may be generated after the other jackpot games are completed.

(Game state referenced at the end of a big win game without going through a small win game)
Figure 34 is a diagram showing the game state referenced at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small jackpot game, where Figure 34(a) is a timing chart when a jackpot fluctuation display is executed in a normal game state, Figure 34(b) is a timing chart when a jackpot fluctuation display is executed in a time-saving game state (before the final fluctuation), and Figure 34(c) is a timing chart when a jackpot fluctuation display is executed in a time-saving game state (final fluctuation).

The game state that is referenced to set the game conditions (game state, number of time-saving rounds, number of remaining small wins) at the end of a jackpot game that does not involve a small win game is the timing at which a jackpot is determined to have occurred (when the jackpot is won).

As shown in FIG. 34(a), when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the normal game state, at the end of the jackpot game at T4, the game conditions (game state, number of various time-saving turns, number of remaining small wins) are set by referring to the game state at the start of the jackpot fluctuation display at T1, that is, at the time when the jackpot was won. In this case, the timing of T1 is the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 34(b), when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the time-saving game state (before the final fluctuation), at the end of the jackpot game at T4, the game conditions (game state, number of various time-saving times, number of remaining small wins) are set by referring to the game state at the start of the jackpot fluctuation display at T1, that is, at the time when the jackpot was won. In this case, the timing of T1 is the time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 34(c), when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the time-saving game state (final fluctuation), at the end of the jackpot game at T4, the game conditions (game state, number of various time-saving times, number of remaining small wins) are set by referring to the game state at the start of the jackpot fluctuation display at T1, that is, at the time when the jackpot was won. In this case, the timing of T1 is the time-saving game state.

(Game state referenced at the end of a big win game via a small win game)
Figure 35 is a diagram showing the game state referenced at the end of a jackpot game that has passed through a small jackpot game, where Figure 35(a) is a timing chart when a small jackpot variable display is executed in a normal game state, Figure 35(b) is a timing chart when a small jackpot variable display that does not satisfy the time-saving end condition is executed in a time-saving game state, and Figure 34(c) is a timing chart when a small jackpot variable display that satisfies the time-saving end condition is executed in a time-saving game state.

The game state that is referenced to set the game conditions (game state, number of time-saving rounds, number of remaining small wins) at the end of a big win game that has gone through a small win game is the timing when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small win game (when transitioning to the big win game).

As shown in FIG. 35(a), when the small win variable display is executed in the normal game state, at the end of the big win game of T6, the game state when the game ball passed through the specific area 53 during the small win game of T4 is referenced and the game conditions (game state, number of various time-saving times, number of remaining small wins) are set. In this case, since the normal game state has been in place since the start of the small win variable display, the timing of T4 is the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 35(b), when a small win variable display that does not satisfy the time-saving end condition is executed in the time-saving game state, the game state when the game ball passed through the specific area 53 during the small win game of T4 is referenced at the end of the big win game of T6, and the game conditions (game state, various time-saving number of times, remaining number of small wins) are set. In this case, since the various time-saving number of times and the remaining number of small wins are not "0" when the small win variable display of T2 is stopped and the time-saving game state is maintained, the timing of T4 is the time-saving game state. Note that when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 at the timing of T4, the big win game starts and the game transitions to the normal game state, but the time of passing through the specific area 53 is considered to be the time-saving game state before transitioning to the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 35(c), when a small win variable display that satisfies the time-saving end condition is executed in the time-saving game state, at the end of the big win game of T6, the game state when the game ball passed through the specific area 53 during the small win game of T4 is referenced and the game conditions (game state, various time-saving number of times, remaining number of small wins) are set. In this case, when the small win variable display of T2 stops being displayed, one of the time-saving number of times becomes "0", the time-saving game state ends and transitions to the normal game state, so the timing of T4 is the normal game state.

As shown in Figures 34 and 35, the sampling timing (acquisition timing) of the game state referenced to set the game conditions (game state, number of various time-saving times, number of remaining small wins) at the end of a jackpot game differs between when the jackpot variation display is executed and a jackpot game is played, and when the small win variation display is executed and a jackpot game is played. Therefore, the gameplay can be made different depending on whether it is a jackpot or a small win, making the game more interesting.

(Main control board general-purpose power control processing)
36, the normal power control process of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the normal power control process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S401, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the normal map normal power processing data, and in step S402, references the branch destination address from the loaded normal map normal power processing data, executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address, and ends the current normal map normal power control process.

Specifically, if the normal pattern normal electricity processing data = 0, a normal pattern change process (step S410) is executed to perform a process for executing a change display of the normal pattern based on the reserved memory (normal pattern determination information) and a process for changing the normal pattern normal electricity processing data to "1". Details of the normal pattern change process will be described later.

If the normal map/normal power processing data = 1, auxiliary game processing (step S420) is executed to execute a process for executing an auxiliary game that opens the second starting hole 47 in a predetermined manner, or to change the normal map/normal power processing data to "0", etc.

(Main control board normal pattern change processing)
The normal symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 37. Fig. 37 is a flow chart showing the normal symbol variation process in the main control board 110.

In step S410-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal pattern is being displayed in a changing state. If the normal pattern is being displayed in a changing state, the process proceeds to step S410-12. If the normal pattern is not being displayed in a changing state, the process proceeds to step S410-2.

In step S410-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of reserved normal symbols (G) is 1 or more. If the number of reserved normal symbols (G) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S410-3, and if the number of reserved normal symbols (G) is not 1 or more, the current normal symbol change process is terminated.

In step S410-3, the main CPU 110a updates the number of reserved normal symbols (G) by subtracting "1", and in step S410-4, shifts the data stored in the reserved normal symbol memory area, shifting the normal symbol determination information stored in the first to fourth memory units to the previous memory unit.

For example, the special map judgment information stored in the fourth memory section of the regular map judgment information holding memory area is shifted to the third memory section of the regular map judgment information holding memory area. In addition, the regular map judgment information stored in the first memory section of the regular map judgment information holding memory area is shifted to the zeroth memory section, which is the regular map judgment information execution memory area, and the regular map judgment information used in the previous game that was stored in the zeroth memory section is erased.

The main CPU 110a performs a win determination process in step S410-5. Specifically, using a win determination table for normal symbols (see FIG. 38(a)), it determines whether or not a win has occurred based on the game state and the random number value for win determination stored in the normal symbol execution memory area. Details of the win determination table for normal symbols will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs normal symbol determination processing in step S410-6. Specifically, using a normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 38(b)), the stopped normal symbol data of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display is determined based on the game state, the win determination result, and the normal symbol determination random number value. Details of the normal symbol determination table will be described later.

In step S410-7, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol designation command corresponding to the type of normal symbol determined in the normal symbol determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the normal symbol designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, making it possible for the performance control board 130 to grasp the stop normal symbol data.

The main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process in step S410-8. Specifically, using a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table (see Figures 38 (c) to (e)) corresponding to the game state, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) for displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner is determined based on the winning determination result and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number value. The details of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step S410-9, the main CPU 110a sets a normal map fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the normal map fluctuation pattern determined in the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the normal map fluctuation pattern designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, making it possible for the performance control board 130 to grasp the normal map fluctuation pattern.

In step S410-10, the main CPU 110a sets the normal pattern fluctuation time corresponding to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determined in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination process in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S410-11 starts the normal pattern fluctuation display and ends this normal pattern fluctuation process. As a result, LED lighting data for executing the normal pattern fluctuation display is created in the data creation process of step S700 above, and is output in the output control process of step S800 above, causing the normal pattern fluctuation display to be performed on the normal pattern display 62.

In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether the normal pattern change time has elapsed. If the change time has not elapsed, the current normal pattern change process is terminated, and if the change time has elapsed, in step S410-13, the change display of the normal pattern is stopped, and in step S410-14, a normal pattern confirmation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the normal pattern confirmation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, making it possible to know that the normal pattern has stopped being displayed on the performance control board 130.

In step S410-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stopped normal symbol is a winning normal symbol (a winning win). If it is not a winning normal symbol, the current normal symbol variation process is terminated, and if it is a winning normal symbol, in step S410-16, auxiliary game control data for controlling the auxiliary game is obtained from the auxiliary game control table (see FIG. 38(f)). Details of the auxiliary game control table will be described later.

In step S410-17, the main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the type of auxiliary game in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM. This causes the opening designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, making it possible for the performance control board 130 to recognize that the opening of the auxiliary game has begun.

In step S410-18, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time corresponding to the auxiliary game control data acquired in step S410-16 of the auxiliary game in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S410-19, sets the normal symbol/normal power processing data to "1", terminating this normal symbol variation process.

(Winning judgment table for normal symbols)
Figure 38 (a) is a hit determination table for normal symbols that is referenced when determining a hit based on normal symbol determination information obtained based on the passage of the gaming ball through the normal symbol gate 44.

As shown in FIG. 38(a), the hit determination table for normal symbols associates the game state when a hit determination is made, the random number value for hit determination, and the result of the hit determination (win, miss), and for reference, the approximate probability of winning is listed in the rightmost column.

A "win" is a judgment result in which the auxiliary game will be executed, and a "lose" is a judgment result in which the auxiliary game will not be executed. Note that the win judgment only includes misses, and there are no special misses (time reduction).

The first feature of the winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 38(a) is that the probability (proportion) of a winning judgment is the same regardless of whether the game state is a non-time-saving state (normal game state) or a time-saving state (normal time-saving game state, first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state). By doing this, it is possible to make the player expect that the auxiliary game will be executed regardless of the game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The probability (proportion) of determining that a win is made in the normal time-saving play state or the special time-saving play state may be higher than in the non-time-saving play state (normal play state) (generating a normal probability variation). In this case, the probability (proportion) of determining that a win is made in the normal time-saving play state and the special time-saving play state may be the same, or the probability (proportion) of determining that a win is made in the special time-saving play state may be higher than in the normal time-saving play state, or the probability (proportion) of determining that a win is made in the normal time-saving play state may be higher than in the special time-saving play state.

(Normal symbol determination table)
Figure 38 (b) is a normal symbol determination table which is referenced when determining the normal symbol stopping symbol based on the normal symbol determination information obtained based on the passage of the gaming ball through the normal symbol gate 44.

As shown in FIG. 38(b), the normal symbol determination table associates the game state when the determination is made, the result of the win determination (win, miss), a random number value for winning symbol determination, the result of the normal symbol determination, stopping normal symbol data indicating this determination result, and a normal symbol designation command indicating the result of the normal symbol determination.

The normal symbol "0" is a losing normal symbol that does not result in an auxiliary game being executed.
The normal symbol "1" is a winning normal symbol that executes an auxiliary game in which the second starting hole 47 is opened once or twice depending on the game state.
The normal symbol "2" is a winning normal symbol that causes an auxiliary game in which the second start hole 47 is opened twice regardless of the game state.

(Normal map fluctuation pattern determination table)
Figure 38(c) is a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table for normal use that is referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of normal patterns in the normal game state, Figure 38(d) is a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table for normal time-saving that is referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of normal patterns in the normal time-saving game state, and Figure 38(e) is a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table for special time-saving that is referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of normal patterns in the special time-saving game state (first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state).

As shown in Figures 38(c) to 38(e), the map fluctuation pattern determination table associates the result of a hit determination, a random number value of the map fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation time that is the result of the map fluctuation pattern determination, and a map fluctuation pattern designation command that indicates this determination result.

The first feature of the normal game fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figures 38(c) to 38(e) is that a relatively long fluctuation time is determined in the non-time-saving state (normal game state), whereas a relatively short fluctuation time is determined in the various time-saving game states (normal time-saving game state, first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state). In other words, a short fluctuation time is more likely to be determined in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. By doing this, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 47 in the various time-saving game states than in the non-time-saving state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the normal symbol variation pattern determination tables shown in Figures 38(c) to 38(e) is that it is possible to determine the variation pattern of the normal symbol using different normal symbol variation pattern determination tables for the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state (first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state). By doing so, it is possible to give the game characteristics such as different performance depending on the type of time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the normal symbol variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 38(c) to 38(e) is that it is possible to display the variation of the normal symbol using different normal symbol variation patterns in the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state (first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state). By doing so, it is possible to give the device characteristics such as different performance depending on the type of time-saving game state, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figures 38(c) to 38(e) is that it is easier to determine a normal map fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time in a special time-saving game state than in a normal time-saving game state. By doing so, it is possible to give the game characteristics such as different performance depending on the type of time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figures 38(c) to 38(e) is that it is possible to determine the normal map fluctuation pattern using the same normal map fluctuation pattern determination table in the first special time-saving game state and the second special time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to reduce the memory capacity related to the normal map fluctuation pattern and to make the control during the time-saving game state more efficient, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the normal symbol variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 38(c) to 38(e) is that it is possible to display the variation of the normal symbol using the same normal symbol variation pattern in the first special time-saving game state and the second special time-saving game state. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the memory capacity related to the normal symbol variation pattern and to make the control during the time-saving game state more efficient, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The same normal map fluctuation pattern determination table (for example, the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table in FIG. 38(d) or the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table in FIG. 38(e)) may be used in the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state (first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state). In this way, the memory capacity related to the normal map fluctuation pattern can be reduced, and control during the time-saving game state can be made more efficient, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

It is also possible to use different normal pattern determination tables for the first special time-saving game state and the second special time-saving game state (for example, the normal pattern determination table of FIG. 38(e) for the first special time-saving game state, and a normal pattern determination table that determines a 0.5 second change time regardless of whether or not there is a win for the second special time-saving game state). In this way, it is possible to give the game characteristics such as different performance depending on the type of time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the same normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (e.g., the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table in FIG. 38(d)) may be used for the normal time-saving play state and either the first special time-saving play state or the second special time-saving play state, and a different normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (e.g., the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table in FIG. 38(e)) may be used only for the other of the first special time-saving play state or the second special time-saving play state.

In addition, a normal pattern change pattern determination table is used in which the normal pattern change time is more likely to be shorter in the special time-saving game state (first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state) than in the normal time-saving game state, but it is also possible to use a normal pattern change pattern determination table in which the normal pattern change time is more likely to be shorter in the normal time-saving game state than in the special time-saving game state (first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state).

(Auxiliary Game Control Table)
FIG. 38(f) is an auxiliary game control table used to control the auxiliary game based on the type of winning normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 38(f), the auxiliary game control table associates the game state when the auxiliary game occurs, the stop map data, the number of times the second start opening 47 is opened, the opening time of the auxiliary game, the first opening time of the second start opening 47, the interval time between openings, the second opening time of the second start opening 47, and the ending time of the auxiliary game.

The first feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 38(f) is that the second start hole 47 is opened for a longer period of time when an auxiliary game is played in various time-saving game states (normal time-saving game state, special time-saving game state) than when an auxiliary game is played in a non-time-saving game state (normal game state). By doing this, it becomes easier for a game ball to enter the second start hole 47 in various time-saving game states than in a non-time-saving game state, making the game more interesting.

The second feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 38(f) is that it is possible to open the second start hole 47 in different opening modes (opening time, number of openings) depending on whether the game is in a normal time-saving game state or a special time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to give the table characteristics such as different performance depending on the type of time-saving game state, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

A third feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 38(f) is that the second start hole 47 is more likely to open in a more advantageous opening mode (opening time, number of openings) in the special time-saving game state than in the normal time-saving game state. In this way, the degree of advantage to the player can be varied depending on the type of time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 38(f) is that it is possible to open the second start opening 47 in the same opening mode (opening time, number of openings) in the first special time-saving game state and the second special time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to reduce the memory capacity related to the opening mode of the second start opening 47, and to make the control during the time-saving game state more efficient, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second start hole 47 may be opened in the same opening mode (opening time, number of openings) in the normal time-saving play state and the special time-saving play state (first special time-saving play state, second special time-saving play state). In this case, the opening mode may be set according to the normal time-saving play state shown in FIG. 38(f), or according to the special time-saving play state. In this way, the memory capacity related to the opening mode of the second start hole 47 can be reduced, and control during the time-saving play state can be made more efficient, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second start hole 47 may be opened in different opening modes (opening time, number of openings) in the first special time-saving game state and the second special time-saving game state. In this case, the second start hole 47 may be opened in an opening mode corresponding to the special time-saving game state shown in FIG. 38(f) in the first special time-saving game state, and the second start hole 47 may be opened in an opening mode (different number of openings and/or opening time) that is more advantageous or disadvantageous to the player than the opening mode corresponding to the special time-saving game state shown in FIG. 38(f) in the second special time-saving game state. In this way, the degree of advantage to the player can be varied depending on the type of time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the second start opening 47 may be opened in the same opening manner (e.g., an opening manner corresponding to the normal time-saving game state in FIG. 38(f)) in the normal time-saving game state and one of the first and second special time-saving game states, and the second start opening 47 may be opened in a different opening manner (e.g., an opening manner corresponding to the special time-saving game state in FIG. 38(f)) only in the other of the first and second special time-saving game states.

(Example of initializing various drive sources after changing settings)
A specific example of initializing the various drive sources after changing the settings will be described with reference to Fig. 39. Fig. 39 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing the various drive sources after changing the settings.

First, at timing T0, the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large prize opening opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 47, first large prize opening 50, specific area 53, second large prize opening 56) (ball entry difficulty level), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize slot LEDs that illuminate the large prize slots (first large prize slot 50, second large prize slot 56) in a specified manner during a round of play are turned off, and the main information displays 69 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67, status check display 68), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and a setting change operation (setting key switch 112a is ON, RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed, the setting change mode is started on the main control board 110, and the state becomes a pre-start state before control of the progress of the game is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the setting change notification described above is started. In addition, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the seven-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

At the timing of T2, when the setting value confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is turned OFF) is performed, the setting change mode and setting change notification are terminated, the initial operation of the various drive sources is started, and the setting value displayed on the seven-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113 is erased and becomes hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is terminated, and an initial operation notification (display of an initial operation in progress screen, output of an initial operation confirmation voice "Please check the operation of the solenoid") is initiated to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various drive sources (drive sources = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, when the operation time of the various drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive sources = OFF).

At time T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at time T6, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At the timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing T8, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T9, when the operation of the various drive sources stops and the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the notification of the initial operation end, and the main control board 110 transitions from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of number of reserved special symbols, display of number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) begin on the main information display 69, and the power-on notification described above begins. In addition, the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the performance control board 130 begins, and all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d on the information display 113 are fully lit to begin confirmation of their illumination. Note that when a predetermined period has elapsed, the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 ends.

At timing T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 113, the illumination of all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

(Example of initial operation of various drive sources after checking the settings)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources after setting confirmation will be described with reference to Fig. 40. Fig. 40 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources after setting confirmation.

First, at timing T0, the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large prize opening opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 47, first large prize opening 50, specific area 53, second large prize opening 56) (ball entry difficulty level), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize slot LEDs that illuminate the large prize slots (first large prize slot 50, second large prize slot 56) in a specified manner during a round of play are turned off, and the main information displays 69 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67, status check display 68), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and a setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is turned ON) is performed, the setting confirmation mode is started on the main control board 110, and the state becomes a pre-start state before control of the progress of the game is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification is started. In addition, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the seven-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

At the timing of T2, when the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 112a is turned OFF) is performed, the setting confirmation mode and setting confirmation notification are ended, the initial operation of the various drive sources is started, and the setting value displayed on the seven-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113 is erased and becomes hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is ended, and an initial operation notification (display of an initial operation in progress screen, output of an initial operation confirmation voice "Please check the operation of the solenoid") is started to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources.

Note that the specific example from timing T3 to timing T10 is the same as the specific example from timing T3 to timing T10 in the specific example of initializing the various drive sources after changing the settings shown in Figure 49, so a description of it will be omitted here.

In this way, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies that affect the game outcome (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large prize opening opening opening member 57) are initialized, so that when the game machine 1 (including the case where only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or when it is replaced at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500), it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive sources controlled by the main control means that controls the game progress.

In addition, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are being initially operated (in the pre-start state), the main information displays 69 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67) except for the status confirmation display 68 are in a non-display (non-operating) state, which prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110 and allows it to concentrate on checking the operation of the various drive sources.

In addition, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of a game are initially operated, an initial operation notification is issued to prompt the operator to check the operation of the various drive sources. This notifies the operator (factory worker, game store staff) who checks the operation of the gaming machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of the various drive sources, enabling the operator to check the operation appropriately.

In addition, even in the pre-start state before game progress control begins, various drive sources for operating movable objects that affect the game outcome are initialized after the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode) ends, so there is no need to carry out complex operations such as checking the operation of various drive sources while changing settings (checking settings), and operation checks can be carried out appropriately.

In addition, after the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode) ends, the operation of the various drive sources for operating the movable objects that affect the outcome of the game begins after an operation standby time has elapsed. This allows for ample time between the end of the setting change (setting confirmation) and the start of the operation check of the various drive sources, making it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, the same initial operation notification is given regardless of whether the initial operation of the various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game outcome occurs after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, so control of the initial operation notification can be simplified, making it possible to reduce the development costs of the gaming machine 1 (shortening the development period, etc.).

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 are being initially operated, the large prize opening LED is kept off, which avoids the inconvenience of the light from the large prize opening LED making it difficult to check the operation of the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57, making it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is performed, various initial operations of the drive sources are performed to operate movable bodies that affect the game outcome, and in the playable state in which the game progress control is performed, initial operations of the movable presentation device 73 that do not affect the game outcome are performed. Therefore, two types of initial operations can be checked in sequence, making it possible to properly check the operations.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operating, no open signal is output even though the first large prize opening 50 and the second large prize opening are open. This prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110, and also makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collection device, such as a hall computer, which collects information output from the gaming machine 1 collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, from the time the gaming machine is turned on until game progress control begins, the information display 113 does not display the gaming machine's performance information (normal base value) (the display of performance information is restricted), so it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110.

In addition, since the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of performance information is permitted) after the game progress control has started, it is possible to check whether the game progress control has started and to inform the user that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, during the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, by not displaying performance information on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d that displays the current setting value, the current setting value can be properly notified, and convenience for the gaming establishment can be ensured.

In addition, during the initial operation of the various drive sources, the information display 113 does not display setting values or performance information of the gaming machine, so that the attention of the employees of the gaming facility can be focused on checking the initial operation of the various drive sources, and it becomes possible to accurately determine the malfunction of the various drive sources.

After the game progress control is started, all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d of the information display 113 are turned on to check whether they are on or off. However, after the setting change mode or setting check mode, the lighting check may not be performed.

(Operation comparison table)
Using Figure 41, the operation of the various driving sources (second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize port opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize port opening/closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 at various operating timings (initial operation, large prize game operation, small prize game operation, auxiliary game operation in normal game state, auxiliary game operation in time-saving game state) is compared.

The number of times the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven is the same during auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state and during initial operation. Therefore, during initial operation, it is possible to check whether the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, which makes it possible to improve the accuracy of the operation check.

The time for one drive of the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b is longer during initial operation than during auxiliary game operation during normal game mode. Therefore, it is possible to check during initial operation whether or not auxiliary game operation can be performed during normal game mode, which improves the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, the total drive time of the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b is shorter during initial operation than during auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b.

The driving time of the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b is longer during initial operation than during small prize game operation. Therefore, it is possible to check whether the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b can perform a small prize game operation during initial operation, which makes it possible to improve the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, the total drive time of the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b is shorter during initial operation than during small prize game operation. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b.

The number of times the flow path switching solenoid 52b is driven is greater during initial operation than during small win game operation. Therefore, whether the flow path switching solenoid 52b can perform a small win game operation can be confirmed during initial operation, which makes it possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

In addition, the total drive time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b is shorter during initial operation than during small win game operation. This makes it possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the flow path switching solenoid 52b.

The total drive time of the second large prize opening opening solenoid 57b is shorter during initial operation than during the large prize game operation. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second large prize opening opening solenoid 57b.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven, the time required for one drive, and the total drive time during initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the number of times the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven, the time required for one drive, and the total drive time during auxiliary game operation during normal game mode. In this way, it is possible to check during initial operation whether the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform auxiliary game operation during normal game mode, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the second start opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven, the time required for one drive, and the total drive time during initial operation may be set to a value smaller than the number of times the second start opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven, the time required for one drive, and the total drive time during auxiliary game operation during normal game play. In this way, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second large prize opening/closing solenoid 57b.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven, the time required for one drive, and the total drive time during initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the number of times the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven, the time required for one drive, and the total drive time during auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to check during initial operation whether the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven, the time for one drive, and the total drive time during initial operation may be set to a value greater than the number of times the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven, the time for one drive, and the total drive time during auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to check during initial operation whether the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven, the time required for one drive, and the total drive time during initial operation may be set to a value smaller than the number of times the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven, the time required for one drive, and the total drive time during auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b is driven, the time required for one drive, and the total drive time during initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the number of times the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b is driven, the time required for one drive, and the total drive time during small prize game operation. In this way, it is possible to check whether the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b is capable of performing a small prize game operation during initial operation, which makes it possible to improve the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b is driven and the total driving time during initial operation may be set to a value greater than the number of times the first large prize opening opening opening solenoid 51b is driven and the total driving time during small prize game operation. In this way, it is possible to check whether the first large prize opening opening opening solenoid 51b can perform a small prize game operation during initial operation, which makes it possible to improve the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is driven and the total driving time during initial operation may be set to a value smaller than the driving time of one time of the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b during small prize game operation. In this way, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the flow path switching solenoid 52b is driven, the time required for one drive, and the total drive time during initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the number of times the flow path switching solenoid 52b is driven, the time required for one drive, and the total drive time during small win game operation. In this way, it is possible to check whether the flow path switching solenoid 52b is capable of performing a small win game operation during initial operation, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, at least one of the drive time and the total drive time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b during the initial operation may be set to a value greater than the drive time and the total drive time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b during the small win game operation. In this way, it is possible to check whether the flow path switching solenoid 52b can perform the small win game operation during the initial operation, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, the number of times the flow path switching solenoid 52b is driven during initial operation may be set to a value smaller than the number of times the flow path switching solenoid 52b is driven during small win game operation. In this way, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the flow path switching solenoid 52b.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the second large prize opening opening solenoid 57b is driven, the duration of one drive, and the total drive time during initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the duration of one drive and the total drive time during a jackpot game operation (4R or 10R). In this way, it is possible to check whether the second large prize opening opening solenoid 57b is capable of performing a jackpot game operation during initial operation, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the second large prize opening opening solenoid 57b is driven, the duration of one drive, and the total drive time during initial operation may be set to a value greater than the duration of one drive and the total drive time during jackpot game operation. In this way, it is possible to check whether the second large prize opening opening solenoid 57b is capable of performing jackpot game operation during initial operation, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

(First Modification)
A first modified example of the first embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to Figures 42 to 45. Note that the first modified example differs from the first embodiment in that the RWM clear process continues until the RWM clear switch 111a is operated again, that the drive source initial operation process is performed during the execution of the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, or the RWM clear process, and that the RWM is cleared during the execution of the setting change process. Therefore, only the differences from the first embodiment will be described here.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process of the main control board 110 in the first modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 42. Fig. 42 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110.
Here, the same reference numerals are used for the parts that are the same as those in the initial setting process of the main control board of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 8, and the explanation is omitted, and only the different parts and the surroundings are explained.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, it performs a process to change (update) the setting value, which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game (the probability of being determined as a jackpot in the jackpot determination), and the drive source initial operation process described above, and then proceeds to step S26.

The main CPU 110a performs an RWM clear process in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, it performs a process to initialize the game control state (initializes everything other than the set value area of the main RAM 110c) and the drive source initial operation process described above, and then proceeds to step S26. Details of the RWM clear process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S28. Specifically, it performs a process for displaying the setting values saved in the setting value (during gameplay) area of the main RAM 110c on the information display 113, and the drive source initial operation process described above, and then proceeds to step S30.

(Main control board RWM clear processing)
The RWM clear processing of the main control board 110 in the first modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 43. Fig. 43 is a flow chart showing the RWM clear processing of the main control board 110.

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a sends an RWM clear preparation command to the performance control board 130 and transitions to the RWM clear preparation mode. This causes the performance control board to carry out processing to notify the RWM clear preparation.

"RWM clear preparation notification" refers to displaying a clear preparation screen on the image display device to notify the user that preparation for RWM clear is in progress, and outputting an audio notification from the audio output device 9 for a specified period of time saying "Please press the RWM clear switch again."

The main CPU 110a executes drive source initial operation processing in step S24-2. Specifically, it performs processing to initialize the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) that are provided in the board unit 500 and that are to be operated by the main control board 110 as the game progresses until the RWM clear preparation mode ends. Details of the initial operation of the various drive sources during the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later.

In step S24-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an RWM clear approval operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is ON. If an RWM clear approval operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S24-4 to end the RWM clear preparation mode and perform RWM clear; if an RWM clear approval operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S24-2.

In step S24-4, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears to 0) the main RAM 110c except for the setting value area. This initializes the game progress state to the initial state (the state when the gaming machine 1 was shipped), and the data in the main RAM 110c before the RWM was cleared is not carried over.

In step S24-5, the main CPU 110a performs processing to output an RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs processing to output an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM has been cleared from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90.

In step S24-6, the main CPU 110a sends an RWM clear command indicating that the game control state has been initialized to the payout control board 120 and the presentation control board 130. This causes the presentation control board 130 to carry out processing to end the RWM clear preparation notification described above.

In step S24-7, the main CPU 110a performs processing to stop the initial operations of various drive sources as the RWM clear preparation mode ends due to the RWM clear approval operation, and then ends this RWM clear processing.

(Specific example of initializing various drive sources during preparation for clearing RWM)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources during preparation for clearing the RWM will be described with reference to Fig. 44. Fig. 44 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources during preparation for clearing the RWM.

First, at timing T0, the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large prize opening opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 47, first large prize opening 50, specific area 53, second large prize opening 56) (ball entry difficulty level), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize slot LEDs that illuminate the large prize slots (first large prize slot 50, second large prize slot 56) in a specified manner during a round of play are turned off, and the main information displays 69 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67, status check display 68), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and an RWM clear operation (the RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed, the RWM clear preparation mode is started on the main control board 110, and the game goes into a pre-start state before the progress control of the game starts.

At this time, the status confirmation display 68 displays a status confirmation display indicating that preparations are being made to clear the RWM, and the various drive sources start operating (drive sources = ON) as their initial operation. In addition, an RWM clear preparation notification is started to inform the user that preparations are being made to clear the RWM and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources (display of the clear preparation screen, alternating output of the notification voice saying "Please press the RWM clear switch again" and the initial operation confirmation voice saying "Please check the operation of the solenoid").

At the time T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF), and thereafter, the operation and stopping of the various drive sources is repeated from the time T3 to the time T10.

At time T10, if the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed before the operation time of the various drive sources that began at time T9 has elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and the RWM clear preparation notification will end, and the operation of the various drive sources will immediately stop (drive sources = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources will end, and the main control board 110 will transition from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of number of reserved special symbols, display of number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) begin on the main information display 69, and the power-on notification described above begins. In addition, the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the performance control board 130 begins, and all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d on the information display 113 are fully lit to begin confirmation of their illumination. Note that the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 ends after a predetermined period has elapsed.

At timing T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 113, all illumination of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

In this way, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies that affect the game outcome (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large prize opening opening opening member 57) are initialized, so that when the game machine 1 (including the case where only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or when it is replaced at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500), it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive sources controlled by the main control means that controls the game progress.

In addition, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are being initially operated (in the pre-start state), the main information displays 69 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67) except for the status confirmation display 68 are in a non-display (non-operating) state, which prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110 and allows it to concentrate on checking the operation of the various drive sources.

In addition, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of a game are initially operated, a setting change notification is issued to indicate that a setting change is being made and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources (a setting confirmation notification is issued to indicate that a setting confirmation is being made and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources). This notifies the worker (factory worker, game store staff) who checks the operation of the gaming machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of the various drive sources, enabling the user to check the operation appropriately.

In addition, in the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode), various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are initialized, so there is no need to create multiple pre-start states before game progress control begins, making it possible to reduce the development costs of the gaming machine 1 (shortening development time, etc.).

In addition, when the pre-start state ends with a setting value confirmation operation (confirmation end operation), the operation of the various drive sources is immediately terminated even before the operation time of the various drive sources has elapsed. This means that the initial operation of the various drive sources is not performed to a playable state, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of confusing the operation of the various drive sources with the operation of the various drive sources according to the progress of the game.

In addition, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is performed, various initial operations of the drive sources are performed to operate movable bodies that affect the game outcome, and in the playable state in which the game progress control is performed, initial operations of the movable presentation device 73 that do not affect the game outcome are performed. Therefore, two types of initial operations can be checked in sequence, making it possible to properly check the operations.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 are being initially operated, the large prize opening LED is kept off, which avoids the inconvenience of the light from the large prize opening LED making it difficult to check the operation of the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57, making it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operating, no open signal is output even though the first large prize opening 50 and the second large prize opening are open. This prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110, and also makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collection device, such as a hall computer, which collects information output from the gaming machine 1 collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, from the time the gaming machine is turned on until game progress control begins, the information display 113 does not display the gaming machine's performance information (normal base value) (the display of performance information is restricted), so it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110.

In addition, since the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of performance information is permitted) after the game progress control has started, it is possible to check whether the game progress control has started and to inform the user that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, during the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, by not displaying performance information on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d that displays the current setting value, the current setting value can be properly notified, and convenience for the gaming establishment can be ensured.

In the setting change notification in the setting change mode, a setting change screen was displayed displaying the text "Settings being changed." However, in addition to the text "Settings being changed," a setting change screen may be displayed displaying the text "Drive source initial operation in progress" or "Check solenoid operation" to encourage visual confirmation of the initial operation of the various drive sources.

(Operation comparison table)
Using Figure 45, the operation of the various driving sources (second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize port opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize port opening/closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 at various operating timings (initial operation, large prize game operation, small prize game operation, auxiliary game operation in normal game state, auxiliary game operation in time-saving game state) is compared.

The time for one drive of the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b is longer during initial operation than during auxiliary game operation during normal game mode. Therefore, it is possible to check during initial operation whether or not auxiliary game operation can be performed during normal game mode, which improves the accuracy of the operation check.

The driving time of the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b is longer during initial operation than during small prize game operation. Therefore, it is possible to check whether the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b can perform a small prize game operation during initial operation, which makes it possible to improve the accuracy of the operation check.

The time taken for one drive of the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b during initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the time taken for one drive during auxiliary game operation during normal game mode. In this way, it is possible to check whether the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform auxiliary game operation during normal game mode during initial operation, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, the time required for one drive of the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b during initial operation may be set to a value smaller than the time required for one drive of the auxiliary game operation during normal game mode. In this way, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time required for the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b during initial operation.

In addition, the time for one drive of the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b during initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the time for one drive during auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to check whether the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state during initial operation, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, the time for one drive of the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b during initial operation may be set to a value greater than the time for one drive during auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to check during initial operation whether the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, the driving time of the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b during initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the driving time of the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b during small prize game operation and the total driving time. In this way, it is possible to check whether the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b can perform a small prize game operation during initial operation, which makes it possible to improve the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, the driving time of the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b during initial operation may be set to a value smaller than the driving time of the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b during small prize game operation. In this way, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b.

In addition, the time for one drive of the flow path switching solenoid 52b during initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the time for one drive of the flow path switching solenoid 52b during small win game operation. In this way, it is possible to check whether the flow path switching solenoid 52b can perform a small win game operation during initial operation, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, the time for driving the flow path switching solenoid 52b once during initial operation may be set to a value greater than the time for driving the flow path switching solenoid 52b once during small win game operation. In this way, it is possible to check whether the flow path switching solenoid 52b can perform a small win game operation during initial operation, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, the time for one drive of the second large prize opening opening solenoid 57b during initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the time for one drive during a jackpot game operation (4R or 10R). In this way, it is possible to check whether the second large prize opening opening solenoid 57b can perform a jackpot game operation during initial operation, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, the time for one drive of the second large prize opening opening solenoid 57b during initial operation may be set to a value greater than the time for one drive during jackpot game operation. In this way, it is possible to check whether the second large prize opening opening solenoid 57b can perform a jackpot game operation during initial operation, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

(Timing chart when normal time-saving game state occurs)
FIG. 46 is a timing chart showing when the normal time-saving gaming state occurs.

First, at timing T1, the display of the special symbols that will result in a jackpot starts to change. At this time, since the game is in normal play mode, all information is collected (counted), such as the number of normal payouts and the number of normal outs to calculate the normal base value, and the total number of outs to set the play area.

Next, at the timing of T2, the display of the winning normal symbol begins. This display uses a relatively long normal symbol pattern (change time of 60 or 80 seconds) for the non-time-saving state.

After that, at the timing of T3, the display of the special symbol starts to stop, and at the timing of T4, when the stop time N of the special symbol (0.5 seconds for a jackpot) has elapsed, the jackpot game (opening) starts, the right-hit indicator 67 lights up, and the output of a special game signal indicating that a jackpot game is in progress and an advantageous state signal indicating that the player is in an advantageous state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state starts. In addition, the tallying (counting) of the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play for calculating the normal base value stops, and the tallying (counting) of the total number of outs for setting the play period continues (the calculation of the normal base value and the display of the normal base value also continue).

Then, at the timing T5, the stopped display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing T6, when the stopped time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts, but because the variable display of the normal symbols started during the normal game state, the second start hole 47 opens with a short opening time for the non-time-saving state.

Also, at the timing of T7, the auxiliary game ends and the display of the normal symbols that will become the winning symbols begins. Since this display of the symbols begins during a big win game (low probability non-time-saving game state), the display of the symbols is based on a relatively long normal symbol display pattern (with a display time of 60 or 80 seconds) for the non-time-saving state.

Next, at the timing of T8, the normal symbols start to be displayed in a stopped state, and at the timing of T9, when the stopped time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts. However, because the variable display of the normal symbols started during the big win game, the second start hole 47 opens in a short opening time for the non-time-saving state.

After that, at the timing of T10, the auxiliary game ends and the display of the normal symbols begins. Since this display began during a jackpot game, it is performed in a relatively long normal symbol display pattern for a non-time-saving state. Then, at the timing of T11, when the jackpot game (ending) ends, the normal time-saving game state begins and the output of the special game signal is stopped.

In addition, at the timing of T12, the stopped display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing of T13, when the stopped time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts. However, because the variable display of the normal symbols started during a jackpot game (low probability non-time-saving game state), the second start hole 47 opens in the short opening time for the non-time-saving state.

Next, at the timing of T14, the auxiliary game ends and the display of the normal symbols that will be the winning symbols begins. This display of the symbols begins during the normal time-saving game mode, so it is performed in a relatively short normal symbol display pattern for the time-saving mode.

After that, at the timing of T15, the stopped display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing of T16, when the stopped time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts, but because the variable display of the normal symbols started during the normal time-saving game state, the second start hole 47 opens with a long opening time for the time-saving state. Then, at the timing of T16, when the auxiliary game ends, the variable display of the normal symbols that will be the winning symbols starts.

Here, we have shown an example where the normal time-saving game state occurs while the normal symbol is changing, but even if the normal time-saving game state occurs while the normal symbol is stopped or during auxiliary play, the next normal symbol will display a relatively short normal symbol change pattern for the time-saving state.

In this way, when the normal time-saving game state occurs, it occurs a predetermined period of time after the special symbol that results in a jackpot has stopped displaying (after the jackpot game ends). This prevents players from gaining an excessive advantage during jackpot play, and ensures a balance of benefits between the gaming establishment and the player.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state occurs, the right-hit indicator 67 is turned on a predetermined period of time before the normal time-saving game state occurs (when the stop time of the losing special symbol has elapsed and the jackpot game, which is a low-probability time-saving game state, begins). This makes it possible to prevent the player from suffering disadvantages related to the occurrence of the normal time-saving game state, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state occurs, the tallying (counting) of the normal payout number and normal out number for calculating the normal base value is stopped (interrupted) a predetermined period before the normal time-saving game state occurs (when the stop time of the losing special symbol has elapsed and the jackpot game, which is a low-probability time-saving game state, begins). This makes it possible to calculate an appropriate normal base value, and to accurately grasp the performance of the gaming machine from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, even when the tallying (counting) of the normal payout number and normal out number for calculating the normal base value is stopped (interrupted), the calculation of the normal base value and the display of the normal base value continue, making it possible to accurately grasp the performance of the gaming machine from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state occurs, the advantageous state signal is output from a predetermined period before the normal time-saving game state occurs (at the start of the jackpot game, which is a low-probability time-saving game state). Therefore, the advantageous state signal can be output accurately throughout the advantageous state period, making it possible to accurately grasp the state of the gaming machine externally.

In addition, if a normal time-saving game state occurs during the normal symbol variable display, regardless of whether or not auxiliary play is being performed, the next normal symbol variable display will be displayed using a relatively short normal symbol variable pattern for the time-saving state. This makes it possible to reduce the processing burden by eliminating the need for complex processing such as changing the control of the normal symbol variable display midway due to the occurrence of the normal time-saving game state.

In addition, if a normal time-saving game state occurs during the execution of an auxiliary game, the next normal symbol change display will be followed by a relatively short normal symbol change pattern for the time-saving state, and the second start opening 47 will open with a long opening time for the time-saving state from the next auxiliary game. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complex processing such as changing the control of the normal symbol change display or the auxiliary game control midway due to the occurrence of a normal time-saving game state, which makes it possible to reduce the processing burden.

(Timing chart when the normal time-saving game mode ends)
FIG. 47 is a timing chart showing when the normal time-saving gaming state ends.

First, at timing T1, the display of the special symbols that will be the final symbols in the normal time-saving play state, that is, the display of the special symbols that will be the losing symbols, begins. At this time, since the normal time-saving play state is in effect, the right-hit indicator 67 is lit and an advantageous state signal is being output. Also, since the normal time-saving play state is in effect, the information collection (counting) of the normal payout number and normal out number for calculating the normal base value is stopped (interrupted), while the information collection (counting) of the total number of outs for setting the play period is being executed.

Next, at the timing of T2, the display of the winning normal symbol begins. Because this display begins during the normal time-saving game mode, it is performed in a relatively short normal symbol display pattern for the time-saving mode.

Then, at the timing T3, the stopped display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing T4, when the stopped time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts, but because the variable display of the normal symbols started during the normal time-saving game state, the second start hole 47 opens with a long opening time for the time-saving state.

After that, at the timing of T5, when the auxiliary game ends, the display of the normal winning symbols begins. Because this display of the symbols begins during the time-saving mode, it is done in a relatively short normal symbol display pattern for the time-saving mode.

In addition, at the timing of T6, the stopped display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing of T7, when the stopped time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts, but because the variable display of the normal symbols started during the normal time-saving game state, the second start hole 47 opens with a long opening time for the time-saving state.

Next, at the timing of T8, when the auxiliary game ends, the display of the normal winning symbols begins. Because this display of the symbols begins during the normal time-saving game state, it is performed in a relatively short normal symbol display pattern for the time-saving game state. Then, at the timing of T9, when the display of the special symbols begins, the normal time-saving game state ends and the normal game state begins, the right-hit indicator 67 goes out, and the output of the advantageous state signal stops. Also, because the game is now in the normal game state, the tallying (counting) of the normal payout number and the normal out number for calculating the normal base value resumes. Also, the display of the normal symbols begins to stop.

After that, at the timing of T10, the stop time of the normal symbol has elapsed and the auxiliary game starts, but because the variable display of the normal symbol has started during the normal time-saving game state, the second start hole 47 opens with a long opening time for the time-saving state.

Then, at the timing of T11, when the auxiliary game ends, the display of the normal winning symbols begins. Because this display of the symbols begins during normal game play, the display of the symbols is based on a relatively long normal symbol display pattern (the display time is 60 or 80 seconds) for non-time-saving modes.

After that, at the timing of T12, when the stop time M of the special symbol (8.0 seconds when the time-saving feature ends) has elapsed, the display of the next losing special symbol begins. Then, at the timing of T13, the display of the stopped normal symbol is revealed, and at the timing of T14, when the stop time of the normal symbol has elapsed, the auxiliary game begins; however, because the display of the normal symbol began during the normal game state, the second start hole 47 opens with a long opening time for the non-time-saving state. Then, at the timing of T15, when the auxiliary game ends, the display of the normal symbol beginning to change, which is the winning symbol, begins.

Here, we have shown an example in which the normal time-saving game state ends while a normal symbol is stopped and displayed, but even if the normal time-saving game state ends while a normal symbol is changing or during auxiliary play, the next normal symbol will change and a relatively long normal symbol change pattern (change time is 60 or 80 seconds) for non-time-saving state will be displayed.

In addition, when the special symbols change and are displayed a specified number of times after the start of the normal time-saving play state, the losing special symbol is displayed stationary, and the normal time-saving play state ends. The right-hit indicator 67 goes out, the output of the advantageous state signal stops, and the tallying (counting) of the normal payout number and the normal out number for calculating the normal base value is resumed.

In this way, when a losing special symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol a specified number of times since the start of the normal time-saving game state, the normal time-saving game state that is advantageous to the player ends. This ensures a balance of profits between the gaming facility and the player, and provides players with unprecedented gameplay in the normal time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when a losing special symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol a specified number of times from the start of the normal time-saving play state, the normal time-saving play state ends and the right-hit display 67 goes out. This makes it possible to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantages related to the end of the normal time-saving play state, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when a losing special symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol a specified number of times since the start of the normal time-saving game state, the normal time-saving game state ends and the tallying (counting) of the normal payout number and the normal out number for calculating the normal base value is resumed. Therefore, the appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, when a losing special symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol a specified number of times from the start of the normal time-saving game state, the normal time-saving game state ends and the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped. Therefore, the advantageous state signal can be output accurately throughout the advantageous state period, making it possible to accurately grasp the state of the gaming machine externally.

In addition, if the normal time-saving game state ends while the normal symbol is being displayed, regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is being played, the next normal symbol will be displayed in a relatively long normal symbol display pattern for the non-time-saving state. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load by eliminating the need for complex processing such as changing the control of the normal symbol display when the normal time-saving game state ends.

In addition, if a normal time-saving game state occurs during the execution of an auxiliary game, the next normal symbol change display will be followed by a relatively long normal symbol change pattern for the time-saving game state, and the second start opening 47 will open with a short opening time for the non-time-saving game state from the next auxiliary game. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complex processing such as changing the control of the normal symbol change display or the auxiliary game control midway due to the occurrence of a normal time-saving game state, which makes it possible to reduce the processing burden.

(Timing chart from before the start to the end of the first special time-saving gaming state)
FIG. 48 is a timing chart showing the period from before the start to the end of the first special time-saving game state when the varying display of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times (500 times).

First, at the timing of T1, when a predetermined condition is met (RWM clear is executed, the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game is cleared to 0), the display of the special symbol that will be a losing symbol for the specified number of times (500 times) begins. Also, at the timing of T2, the display of the normal symbol that will be a winning symbol begins. In this display of fluctuations, a relatively long normal symbol fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time of 60 or 80 seconds) for the non-time-saving state is displayed.

After that, at the timing of T3, when the display of the special symbol starts, the first special time-saving game state starts regardless of whether the player is in a waiting state or not, the right-hit indicator 67 lights up, and the output of an advantageous state signal that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state starts. Also, since the first special time-saving game state has started, the tallying (counting) of the normal payout number and the normal out number for calculating the normal base value stops (interrupts), and the tallying (counting) of the total out number for setting the game period continues (the calculation of the normal base value and the display of the normal base value also continue).

Then, at the timing of T4, when the stop time N of the special symbol (normally 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the display of the losing special symbol begins to change.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the stopped display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing of T6, when the stopped time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts, but because the variable display of the normal symbols started during the normal game state, the second start hole 47 opens with a short opening time for the non-time-saving state.

Next, at the timing of T7, the auxiliary game ends and the display of the normal symbols that will be the winning symbols begins. This display of the symbols begins during the first special time-saving game state, so it is performed in a relatively short normal symbol display pattern for the time-saving state.

Then, at the timing T8, the stopped display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing T9, when the stopped time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts, but because the variable display of the normal symbols started during the first special time-saving game state, the second start hole 47 opens with a long opening time for the time-saving state. Also, the stopped display of the losing special symbols starts.

At the timing of T10, when the stop time N of the special symbol (0.5 seconds for a loss) has elapsed, the display of the next losing special symbol begins. At the timing of T11, the auxiliary game ends and the display of the normal symbol that will be the winning symbol is revealed. This display of the change is done in a relatively short normal symbol change pattern for the time-saving state, because it was started during the first special time-saving game state.

After that, at the timing of T12, the display of the special symbols that will be the last in the first special time-saving game state, that is, the display of the special symbols that will be the losing symbols, begins. Also, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game is started, but because the display of the normal symbols was started during the first special time-saving game state, the second start hole 47 opens with a long opening time for the time-saving state.

Next, at the timing of T13, the auxiliary game ends and the display of the normal symbols that will be the winning symbols begins. This display of the symbols begins during the first special time-saving game state, so it is performed in a relatively short normal symbol display pattern for the time-saving state.

Then, at the timing of T14, the stopped display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing of T15, when the stopped time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts, but because the variable display of the normal symbols started during the first special time-saving game state, the second start hole 47 opens with a long opening time for the time-saving state.

In addition, at the timing of T16, when the stop display of the losing special symbol (M for the final time-saving fluctuation) starts, the first special time-saving game state ends and the normal game state starts, the right-hit indicator 67 goes out, and the output of the advantageous state signal stops. Also, since the game has entered the normal game state, the counting of the normal payout number and the normal out number for calculating the normal base value resumes.

Furthermore, at the timing of T17, the auxiliary game ends and the display of the normal symbols that will result in a win begins. This display of the symbols begins during the normal game mode (non-time-saving mode), so it is performed in a relatively long normal symbol display pattern for the non-time-saving mode.

In addition, at the timing of T18, when the stop time M of the losing special symbol (8.0 seconds for the final time-saving change) has elapsed, the display of the changing special symbol that will be the losing symbol begins, and at the timing of T19, the display of the losing special symbol begins to stop.

Then, at the timing of T20, the display of the special symbols that will result in a loss begins. Also, when the auxiliary play ends, the display of the normal symbols that will result in a win begins. This display of the symbols begins during the normal play state (non-time-saving state), so it is performed in a relatively long normal symbol display pattern for the non-time-saving state.

Then, at the timing of T21, when the stop time of the normal symbol has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts, but because the variable display of the normal symbol has started during the normal game state, the second start hole 47 opens in the short opening time for the non-time-saving state.

Here, we have shown an example in which the first special time-saving game state begins while a normal symbol is changing, but even if the first special time-saving game state occurs while a normal symbol is stopped or during auxiliary play, the next normal symbol will start changing and a relatively short normal symbol change pattern for the time-saving state will be displayed.

Also, an example was given in which the first special time-saving game state ended while the auxiliary game was being played, but even if the first special time-saving game state ended while the normal symbol fluctuation display was in progress or while the normal symbol was still being displayed, the next normal symbol fluctuation display will be followed by a relatively long normal symbol fluctuation display for the non-time-saving state.

In addition, although an example was shown in which the special symbol change display that is the final time in the first special time-saving game state is a miss, even if it is a small win, the next normal symbol change display will be a relatively long normal symbol change display for the non-time-saving state.

In this way, when the losing special symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol a specified number of times (500 times) after the establishment of a predetermined condition (executing RWM clear, clearing the variable number of times based on the end of the jackpot game) the first special time-saving game state advantageous to the player is generated (initiated) regardless of whether or not the player is in a waiting state for customers. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with unprecedented gameplay in which the time-saving state occurs even when the player has lost, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when the losing special symbol is displayed stationary (the stop time begins) as a result of the special symbol changing display a prescribed number of times (500 times) from the establishment of a predetermined condition (executing RWM clear, clearing the number of changing times based on the end of the jackpot game), the first special time-saving game state occurs (starts) and the right-hit display 67 lights up. This makes it possible to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantages in relation to the occurrence of the first special time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the special losing symbol is displayed frozen (the freeze time begins) as a result of the special symbol varying display a prescribed number of times (500 times) from the establishment of a prescribed condition (executing RWM clear, clearing the variation count to 0 based on the end of a jackpot game), the first special time-saving game state occurs (starts) and the counting of the normal payout number and normal out number for calculating the normal base value is stopped; in other words, the calculation of the normal payout number and normal out number continues until just before the special time-saving game state occurs. This makes it possible to calculate an appropriate normal base value, and accurately grasp the performance of the gaming machine from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, even when the counting of the normal payout number and normal out number for calculating the normal base value is stopped, the calculation of the normal base value and the display of the normal base value continue, making it possible to accurately grasp the performance of the gaming machine from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, when the losing special symbol is displayed stationary (the stop time starts) as a result of the special symbol changing display a prescribed number of times (500 times) from the establishment of a predetermined condition (executing RWM clear, clearing the number of changes to 0 based on the end of the jackpot game), the first special time-saving game state occurs (starts) and an advantageous state signal is output. Therefore, the advantageous state signal can be output accurately throughout the advantageous state period, making it possible to accurately grasp the state of the gaming machine externally.

In addition, if the first special time-saving game state occurs during the normal symbol variable display, regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is being played, the next normal symbol variable display will be displayed in a relatively short normal symbol variable pattern for the time-saving state. This makes it possible to reduce the processing burden by eliminating the need for complex processing such as changing the control of the normal symbol variable display midway due to the occurrence of the first special time-saving game state.

In addition, if the first special time-saving game state occurs during the execution of the auxiliary game, the next normal symbol change display will be followed by a relatively short normal symbol change display for the time-saving state, and the second start port 47 will open with a long opening time for the time-saving state from the next auxiliary game. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complex processing such as changing the control of the normal symbol change display or the auxiliary game control midway due to the occurrence of the first special time-saving game state, which makes it possible to reduce the processing burden.

In addition, when a losing special symbol is displayed as a result of the changing display of the special symbol in the final round (750th round) in the first special time-saving game state, the first special time-saving game state that is advantageous to the player ends. This ensures a balance of benefits between the gaming establishment and the player, and provides players with unprecedented gameplay in the first special time-saving game state, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, when a losing special symbol is displayed as a result of the changing display of the special symbol in the final round (750th round) in the first special time-saving game state, the first special time-saving game state ends and the right-hit display 67 goes out. This makes it possible to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantages in connection with the end of the first special time-saving game state, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when a losing special symbol is displayed as a result of the final (750th) variable display of the special symbol in the first special time-saving game state, the first special time-saving game state ends and the counting of the normal payout number and normal out number for calculating the normal base value resumes; in other words, the calculation of the normal payout number and normal out number resumes from the end of the first special time-saving game state. This allows the calculation of an appropriate normal base value, and makes it possible to accurately grasp the performance of the gaming machine from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, when a losing special symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol in the final round (750th round) in the first special time-saving game state, the first special time-saving game state ends and the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped. Therefore, the advantageous state signal can be output accurately throughout the advantageous state period, and the state of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped externally.

In addition, if the first special time-saving game state ends while the normal symbol is being displayed, regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is being played, the next normal symbol will be displayed in a relatively long normal symbol display pattern for the non-time-saving state. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load by eliminating the need for complex processing such as changing the control of the normal symbol display when the first special time-saving game state ends.

In addition, if the first special time-saving game state occurs during the execution of the auxiliary game, the next normal symbol change display will be followed by a relatively long normal symbol change pattern for the time-saving state, and the second start port 47 will open with a short opening time for the non-time-saving state from the next auxiliary game. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complex processing such as changing the control of the normal symbol change display or the auxiliary game control midway due to the occurrence of the first special time-saving game state, which makes it possible to reduce the processing burden.

The losing special symbol that is displayed as a result of the special symbol changing display a prescribed number of times (500 times) from the establishment of a predetermined condition (executing RWM clear, clearing the number of changes to 0 based on the end of the jackpot game) may be displayed as a stopped symbol for a period longer than the normal stopping time (0.5 seconds). In this way, the length of the stopping time can make the player aware that the first special time-saving game state has occurred, and time can be secured to create the effect of the first special time-saving game state occurring, making the game more interesting.

In addition, if the losing special symbol that is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol a specified number of times (500 times) is displayed for a period longer than the normal stop time, a presentation may be executed that suggests that the first special time-saving game state will occur during the stop time. In this way, the occurrence of the first special time-saving game state can be immediately notified to the player, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Note that, although we have explained the cases where the first special time-saving game state begins and ends, when the special miss symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display and the second special time-saving game state begins and ends, apart from the number of time-saving turns being different, it is basically the same as when the first special time-saving game state begins and ends, so it is best to read the first special time-saving game state as the second special time-saving game state.

(Main processing of the production control section)
The main processing of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 49. Fig. 49 is a flowchart of the main processing in the performance control unit 130m.

First, the sub-CPU 130a disables all interrupts in step E1, performs initial CPU settings such as setting internal registers in step E2, and allows access to the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c in step E3.

In step E4, the sub-CPU 130a initializes (clears to 0) all RWM areas (work area, stack area, unused area) of the sub-RAM 130c, in step E5 it starts the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step E6 it enables all interrupts.

In step E7, the sub-CPU 130a performs a sub-random number update process. Specifically, it performs a process to update the various random numbers stored in the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c. Thereafter, the process of step E7 is repeated.

(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit)
The timer interruption process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 50. Fig. 50 is a flowchart of the timer interruption process in the performance control unit 130m. This timer interruption process is executed by inputting a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) from a reset clock pulse generating circuit provided in the performance control unit 130m.

First, in step E100, the sub-CPU 130a saves the information stored in the registers to the stack area of the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c, and in step E200, performs timer update processing. Specifically, it performs processing to update various timer counters required for the execution of the performance.

In step E300, the sub-CPU 130a performs command analysis processing. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs processing to analyze the commands (sent from the main control board 110 or the payout control unit 121) stored in the receive buffer in the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c. Details of the command analysis processing will be described later.

The sub-CPU 130a performs customer waiting control processing in step E400. Specifically, in a customer waiting state where no special symbol variation display or special games (big win game, small win game) are being executed, the sub-CPU 130a judges whether or not the customer waiting time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed, and performs processing to execute a customer waiting demo performance to stimulate the player's desire to play based on the elapse of the customer waiting time.

In step E500, the sub-CPU 130a performs processing for executing the operation-based presentation. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a executes a promotion presentation that prompts the player to operate the presentation button 17 during a valid period that occurs during the variable presentation, and executes a jackpot advance presentation of the operation-based presentation that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot game being played (provides the player with the expectation that a jackpot game will be played) in response to the operation of the presentation button 17 during this valid period.

There are four types of "operation-related jackpot prediction effects": line prediction effects that suggest the likelihood of a jackpot game being played based on the type of line or display mode displayed on the image display device; roulette prediction effects that suggest the likelihood of a jackpot game being played based on the result of a roulette played on the image display device; cut-in prediction effects that suggest the likelihood of a jackpot game being played based on the type of cut-in image or display mode displayed on the image display device; and winning/losing determination effects that suggest whether or not a special game will be played based on a success effect where the likelihood of a jackpot game being played is 100% or a failure effect where the likelihood of a jackpot game being played is 0%.

In step E600, the sub-CPU 130a performs processing for executing a lamp light-emitting effect. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs processing for executing a lamp light-emitting effect that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot game being played by changing the light-emitting state of the start-gate lamp 75 in response to changes in the hold icon displayed on the image display device and the display state of the icon.

In step E700, the sub-CPU 130a performs a presentation mode update process. Specifically, it determines whether or not an update condition (change in game state, winning a mode update lottery, execution of a SP/SPSP reach presentation that results in a loss, etc.) for the presentation mode (presentation stage) that specifies the presentation elements (background image, presentation image, presentation sound, etc.) in the sound output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc., has been met, and if the update condition has been met, it performs a process to update the presentation mode to one of the multiple presentation modes.

The "presentation modes" include presentation modes A to C, which are set in the normal play state (non-time-saving play state), countdown mode, super wild dance mode, which is set in the normal time-saving play state, wild dance mode, which is set in the normal time-saving play state or the first special time-saving play state, infinite mode, and battle mode, which is set in the normal time-saving play state or the second special time-saving play state.

"Presentation modes A to C" are presentation modes that can be set when the normal special chart variation pattern determination table 1 shown in Figure 20 (a) is selected.
The "countdown mode" is a presentation mode that can be set when the normal special chart variation pattern determination table 2 shown in Figure 20 (b) is selected.
In addition, in the presentation modes A to C and the countdown mode, the presentation pattern 70a is displayed in a manner including characters and numbers.

The "entering battle mode" is a presentation mode that can be set when the special chart change pattern determination table 1 or 2 for the normal time-saving and second special time-saving modes shown in FIG. 21 is selected.
The "Ranbu mode" is a presentation mode that can be set when the special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 3 or 4 for normal time-saving shown in Figure 22 is selected, or when the special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 3 for special time-saving shown in Figure 25 (c) is selected.

The "Super Ranbu Mode" is a presentation mode that can be set when the special chart change pattern determination table 5 or 6 for normal time reduction shown in Figure 23 is selected.
The "infinite mode" is a presentation mode that can be set when special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 7 or 8 for normal time reduction shown in Figure 24 is selected, or when special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 1 or 2 for the first special time reduction shown in Figure 25 is selected.
In addition, in the rush battle mode, the wild dance mode, the super wild dance mode and the infinite mode, the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a form in which only numbers are displayed without characters.

The sub-CPU 130a performs special time-saving effect processing in step E750. Specifically, it performs processing such as judging whether or not to execute special time-saving effect processing to suggest information related to the occurrence of a special time-saving game state (such as an RWM clear negation effect indicating that the RWM has not been cleared (is stationary), which will be described later, and an activation counter display indicating the number of times the game will change before transitioning to the first special time-saving game state). Details of the special time-saving effect processing will be described later.

In step E800, the sub-CPU 130a performs output control processing. Specifically, it performs processing to transmit various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the general control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150.

In step E900, the sub-CPU 130a restores the registers that were saved to the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c in step E100 described above, and ends this timer interrupt process.

(Mode flow showing the transition of game modes)
Figure 51 (a) shows the mode flow when a jackpot game is executed in the normal game state, Figure 51 (b) shows the mode flow when a jackpot game is executed in the entering battle mode (normal time-shortened game state, second special time-shortened game state) or the Ranbu mode (normal time-shortened game state, first special time-shortened game state), and Figure 51 (c) shows the mode flow when a jackpot game is executed in the super Ranbu mode (normal time-shortened game state) or the infinite mode (normal time-shortened game state, first special time-shortened game state).

As shown in FIG. 51(a), in the normal game state, when a jackpot determination for the first special symbol determines a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special symbol 01 is stopped and displayed, a first jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play is executed, and then the second time-saving number of times (J2) is set to 55 times and the remaining number of small jackpots (Z) is set to 1 time, transitioning to the Ranbu mode.
In addition, when a jackpot (first result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol and the jackpot special symbol 02 is stopped and displayed, a second jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play is executed, after which the second number of time-saving plays (J2) is set to 95 and the remaining number of small wins is set to 1, transitioning to the Ranbu mode.
In addition, when a jackpot (first result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol and the jackpot special symbol 03 is stopped and displayed, a third jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play is executed, after which the second number of time-saving plays (J2) is set to seven and the remaining number of small wins is set to one, transitioning to an entry battle mode.

In addition, when a jackpot (first result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol and the jackpot special symbol 11 is stopped and displayed, a fourth jackpot game consisting of 10 rounds of play is executed, after which the second time-saving number of times (J2) is set to 496 times and the remaining number of small jackpots is set to 2 times, transitioning to an infinite mode.
In addition, when a jackpot (first result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol and the jackpot special symbol 12 is stopped and displayed, a fifth jackpot game consisting of 10 rounds of play is executed, after which the second number of time-saving plays (J2) is set to 496, and the remaining number of small wins is set to 2, transitioning to an infinite mode.

Furthermore, when a small win (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 13 is stopped and displayed, a first V jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play is executed, after which the second time-saving number of times (J2) is set to 55 times and the remaining number of small wins is set to 1 time, transitioning to the Ranbu mode.
In addition, when a small win (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 14 is stopped and displayed, a second V jackpot game consisting of 10 rounds of play is executed, after which the second time-saving number of times (J2) is set to 95 times and the remaining number of small wins is set to 1 time, transitioning to the Ranbu mode.
In addition, when a small win (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 15 is stopped and displayed, a third V jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play is executed, after which the second time-saving number of times (J2) is set to 55 times and the remaining number of small wins is set to 1 time, transitioning to the Ranbu mode.

As shown in FIG. 51(b), in the entering battle mode or Ranbu mode where the remaining number of small wins is 1, when the jackpot determination for the first special symbol determines a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special symbol 01 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is not subtracted (it remains 1) and a first jackpot game consisting of 3 rounds is executed, after which the second time-saving number (J2) is set to 95 times and the remaining number of small wins (Z) is set to 2 times, transitioning to the Super Ranbu mode.
In addition, when a jackpot (first result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol and the jackpot special symbol 02 is stopped and displayed, the number of remaining small jackpots is not subtracted (it remains at 1), and a first jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play is executed, after which the second number of time-saving rounds (J2) is set to 95, and the number of remaining small jackpots (Z) is set to 2, transitioning to the Chou Ranbu mode.
In addition, when a jackpot (first result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol and the jackpot special symbol 03 is stopped and displayed, the number of remaining small wins is not subtracted (it remains at 1), and a first jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play is executed, after which the second number of time-saving plays (J2) is set to 95, and the number of remaining small wins (Z) is set to 2, transitioning to the Chou Ranbu mode.

In addition, when a jackpot determination for the second special symbol indicates a jackpot (first result) and the special jackpot symbol 11 is stopped and displayed, a fourth jackpot game consisting of 10 rounds of play is executed without subtracting the number of remaining small jackpots (remaining at 1), and then the second number of time-saving plays (J2) is set to 496 and the remaining number of small jackpots is set to 2, transitioning to an infinite mode.
In addition, when a jackpot determination for the second special symbol indicates a jackpot (first result) and the special jackpot symbol 12 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small jackpots is not subtracted (it remains at 1), and a fifth jackpot game consisting of 10 rounds of play is executed, after which the second number of time-saving rounds (J2) is set to 496, and the remaining number of small jackpots is set to 2, transitioning to an infinite mode.

Furthermore, when a small win (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 13 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is reduced to 0 and the game enters a normal game state, where a first V jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play is executed, after which the second number of time-saving plays (J2) is set to 55, and the game transitions to a Ranbu mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to 1.
In addition, when a small win (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 14 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is reduced to 0 and the game enters a normal game state, where a second V jackpot game consisting of 10 rounds of play is executed, after which the second time-saving number of times (J2) is set to 95 times and the game transitions to a Ranbu mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to 1 time.
In addition, when a small win (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 15 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is reduced to 0 and the game enters a normal game state, in which a third V jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play is executed, after which the second number of time-saving plays (J2) is set to 55, and the game transitions to the Ranbu mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to 1.

As shown in FIG. 51(c), in the Chou Ranbu mode or the Infinite mode where the remaining number of small wins is two, when the jackpot determination for the first special symbol determines a jackpot (first result) and the special jackpot symbol 01 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is not subtracted (it remains at two) and a first jackpot game consisting of three rounds is executed, after which the second time-saving number (J2) is set to 95 and the remaining number of small wins (Z) is set to two, transitioning to the Chou Ranbu mode.
In addition, when a jackpot determination for the first special symbol determines that a jackpot (first result) has occurred and the jackpot special symbol 02 is stopped and displayed, a second jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play is executed without subtracting the number of remaining small jackpots (it remains at two), and then the second number of time-saving rounds (J2) is set to 95 and the remaining number of small jackpots (Z) is set to two, transitioning to the Chou Ranbu mode.
In addition, when a jackpot (first result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol and the jackpot special symbol 03 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is not subtracted (it remains at 2), and a third jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play is executed, after which the second number of time-saving plays (J2) is set to 95, and the remaining number of small wins (Z) is set to 2, transitioning to the Super Ranbu mode.

In addition, when a jackpot determination for the second special symbol indicates a jackpot (first result) and the special jackpot symbol 11 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is not subtracted (it remains at 2), and a fourth jackpot game consisting of 10 rounds of play is executed, after which the second number of time-saving plays (J2) is set to 496, and the remaining number of small wins is set to 2, transitioning to an infinite mode.
In addition, when a jackpot determination for the second special symbol indicates a jackpot (first result) and the special jackpot symbol 12 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small jackpots is not subtracted (it remains at 2), and a fifth jackpot game consisting of 10 rounds of play is executed, after which the second number of time-saving rounds (J2) is set to 496, and the remaining number of small jackpots is set to 2, transitioning to an infinite mode.

Furthermore, when a small win (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 13 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is reduced to 1, but the normal time-saving play state is maintained and a first V jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play is executed, after which the second time-saving play count (J2) is set to 95 times and the remaining number of small wins is set to 2 times, transitioning to the Chou Ranbu mode.
In addition, when a small win (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 14 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is reduced to 1, but the normal time-saving play state is maintained and a second V jackpot game consisting of 10 rounds of play is executed, after which the second time-saving play count (J2) is set to 95 times and the remaining number of small wins is set to 2 times, transitioning to the Chou Ranbu mode.
In addition, when a small win (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 15 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is reduced to 1, but the normal time-saving play state is maintained and a third V jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play is executed, after which the second time-saving play count (J2) is set to 95 times and the remaining number of small wins is set to 2 times, transitioning to the Chou Ranbu mode.

In this way, when the third jackpot game (corresponding to the first special game) is executed as a result of the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol in the normal game state, the second time-saving number of times (J2) is set to 7 times, and the normal time-saving game state (corresponding to the first specific game state) is controlled to be in which the second time-saving number of times (J2) is set to 55 times or 95 times, which is more advantageous to the player than the third jackpot game, is controlled to be in which the normal time-saving game state (corresponding to the second specific game state) is controlled to be in which the second time-saving number of times (J2) is set to 55 times or 95 times, which is more advantageous to the player than 7 times, as a result of the jackpot game (the jackpot special symbol stopped and displayed) executed as a result, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the result of the jackpot determination for the first special symbol is a jackpot (first result), a third jackpot game (corresponding to the first special game) can be played, if the result of the jackpot determination for the first special symbol is a minor jackpot (second result), a second V jackpot game (corresponding to the second special game) that is more advantageous to the player than the third jackpot game can be played, and if the result of the jackpot determination for the second special symbol is a jackpot (first result), a fourth or fifth jackpot game (corresponding to the third special game) that is more advantageous to the player than the second V jackpot game can be played. Therefore, the type of jackpot game can be varied depending on the type of special symbol and the type of determination result, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the controlled Ranbu mode or Cho Ranbu mode (specific game state: normal time-saving game state, first special time-saving game state) after the second V jackpot game (corresponding to the second special game), which is more advantageous to the player than the third jackpot game (corresponding to the first special game), is executed, if the result of the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result), the fourth or fifth jackpot game (corresponding to the third special game), which is more advantageous to the player than the second V jackpot game, can be executed, and if the result of the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is determined to be a small jackpot (second result), the second V jackpot game (corresponding to the second special game) can be executed. Therefore, even if a jackpot determination related to the same second special symbol is executed, the type of jackpot game executed can be changed depending on the type of the determination result, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the infinite mode (specific game state: normal time-saving game state, first special time-saving game state) controlled after the fourth or fifth jackpot game (corresponding to the third special game) is executed, which is more advantageous to the player than the second V jackpot game (corresponding to the second special game), which is more advantageous to the player than the third jackpot game (corresponding to the first special game), if the result of the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result), the fourth or fifth jackpot game (corresponding to the third special game) can be executed, and if the result of the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is determined to be a small jackpot (second result), the second V jackpot game (corresponding to the second special game) can be executed. Therefore, even if a jackpot determination related to the same second special symbol is performed, the type of jackpot game executed can be made different depending on the type of the determination result, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the game is in the battle mode (normal time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state) or the wild dance mode (normal time-saving game state, first special time-saving game state), if the special jackpot symbol is displayed as the first special symbol and a jackpot game is executed, the game conditions (number of second time-saving games, number of remaining small jackpots, presentation mode, etc.) are ranked up (improved). This makes it possible to increase the value of the jackpot game in the time-saving game state and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the battle mode (normal time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state), if a small win special symbol is displayed as the second special symbol and a big win game is executed that requires the game ball to pass through the specific area 53 during the small win game, the game conditions (number of second time-saving games, number of remaining small wins, presentation mode, etc.) are ranked up (improved). This makes it possible to increase the value of the small win game in the time-saving game state and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the Chou Ranbu mode (normal time-saving game state), when a big win special symbol is displayed as the first special symbol and a big win game is executed, and when a small win special symbol is displayed as the second special symbol and a big win game is executed on the condition that the game ball passes through a specific area 53 during a winning game, the game conditions (number of second time-saving times, number of remaining small wins, presentation mode, etc.) are maintained without being ranked down. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the player being disappointed by a big win or small win in the time-saving game state, and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, in any game mode (normal game state, normal time-saving game state, first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state), when a jackpot game is executed by stopping and displaying a jackpot special symbol as the second special symbol, the game conditions (number of second time-saving times, number of remaining small jackpots, presentation mode, etc.) are set to the highest rank in the time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the value of a jackpot with the second special symbol, and to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, when a jackpot special pattern is stopped and displayed as the second special pattern and a jackpot game is executed, the game conditions (number of second time-saving times, number of remaining small wins, presentation mode, etc.) are not ranked at the highest level regardless of the type of jackpot game, but rather, for example, when a fourth jackpot special game is executed, the game conditions may be set to Chou Ranbu mode, and when a fifth jackpot special game is executed, the game conditions may be set to Infinite mode. In this case, the rate at which the fifth jackpot special game is executed may be higher than the rate at which the fourth jackpot special game is executed, or vice versa.

(Presentation mode set when transitioning from time-limited play state to normal play state)
FIG. 52 shows the presentation modes that are set when transitioning from a time-saving gaming state to a normal gaming state.

When entering battle mode during normal time-saving play state, if the number of time-saving turns (any of J1 to J3) or the number of remaining small wins (Z) becomes "0" and the game transitions to normal play state, the game transitions to presentation mode A without the result display (result suggestion display) or shutter display (end suggestion display) described above being performed.

In the Ranbu mode during the normal time-saving game state, when the number of time-saving times (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and a transition to the normal game state occurs, the above-mentioned result display (result suggestion display) is performed, and then after the time-saving game state ends, a transition is made to a dedicated post-end mode, and after a predetermined period (for example, 10 variable presentations) has elapsed, a transition is made to one of presentation modes A to C.
On the other hand, when the remaining number of small wins (Z) becomes "0" and the game mode transitions to the normal game mode, the above-mentioned shutter display (end suggestion display) is performed, and then the game mode transitions to the presentation mode A.

In the super wild dance mode or infinite mode during the normal time-saving game state, when the number of time-saving times (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and the game state transitions to the normal game state, the above-mentioned result display (result suggestion display) is performed, and then after the time-saving game state ends, the game state transitions to the dedicated after-ending mode.
On the other hand, when the remaining number of small wins (Z) becomes "1" and a small win game is played but a big win game is not executed, the game shifts to the Ranbu mode.

In the Ranbu mode transitioned from the Super Ranbu mode or the Infinite mode during the normal time-saving game state, when the number of time-saving times (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and a transition is made to the normal game state, the above-mentioned result display (result suggestion display) is made, and then after the time-saving game state ends, a transition is made to the dedicated after-ending mode.
On the other hand, when the remaining number of small wins (Z) becomes "0" and the game mode transitions to the normal game mode, the above-mentioned shutter display (end suggestion display) is performed, and then the game mode transitions to the presentation mode A.

In the infinite mode during the first special time-saving game state, when the number of time-saving times (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and the game state transitions to the normal game state, the above-mentioned shutter display (end suggestion display) is performed, and then the game state transitions to presentation mode A.
On the other hand, when the remaining number of small wins (Z) becomes "1" and a small win game is played but a big win game is not executed, the game shifts to the Ranbu mode.

In the Ranbu mode transitioned from the infinite mode during the first special time-saving game state, when the number of time-saving times (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and transition is made to the normal game state, the above-mentioned shutter display (end suggestion display) is performed and then the game transitions to presentation mode A.
On the other hand, when the remaining number of small wins (Z) becomes "0" and the game mode transitions to the normal game mode, the above-mentioned shutter display (end suggestion display) is performed, and then the game mode transitions to the presentation mode A.

When the number of time-saving rounds (any of J1 to J3) or the number of remaining small wins becomes "0" during the second special time-saving game state in the battle mode, and the game transitions to the normal game state, the above-mentioned shutter display (end indication display) is performed, and then the game transitions to presentation mode A.

In each presentation mode during the time-saving game state, the second number of time-saving times (J2) is notified (e.g., displayed on an image display device), while the first number of time-saving times (J1), the third number of time-saving times (J3), and the remaining number of small wins (Z) are not notified (e.g., displayed on an image display device). However, since the remaining number of small wins (Z) is 1 in Entry Battle Mode and Ranbu Mode, and 2 in Super Ranbu Mode and Infinite Mode, the remaining number of small wins (Z) is indicated by the mode presentation according to the presentation mode (background image according to the presentation mode or image related to the variable presentation).

In this way, the time-saving play state can be ended based on the establishment of one of a number of ending conditions (any of the first through third time-saving counts becoming "0" or the remaining number of small wins becoming "0"), and while in the time-saving play state, information related to the remaining number of small wins is not clearly announced, information related to the remaining number of small wins is suggested by the mode presentation according to the play state (type of time-saving play state, set number of second time-saving counts). Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to guess the remaining number of small wins from the mode presentation during the time-saving play state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The time-saving game state can be ended based on the establishment of one of a number of ending conditions (any of the first to third time-saving counts becoming "0" or the remaining number of small wins becoming "0"), and while in the time-saving game state, information related to the first ending condition (second time-saving count) can be notified (displayed on the image display device, etc.), notification (displayed on the image display device, etc.) of information related to the second ending condition (first time-saving count, third time-saving count, remaining number of small wins, etc.) is restricted (this can be inferred from the mode presentation, but is not directly displayed). Therefore, since the second ending condition cannot be grasped, it is not known when the time-saving game state will end, and this can heighten the player's excitement and impatience about the time-saving game state ending, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when switching from the battle mode during normal time-saving play to the normal play state, the result display (result suggestion display) and shutter display (end suggestion display) are not executed. This reduces the disappointment felt when the battle mode switched to after a big win ends, stimulating the player's desire to try for another big win, and making the game more interesting.

In addition, in the normal time-saving game state in which a presentation mode other than the battle mode is set, if the number of time-saving times (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and the normal time-saving game state ends normally and transitions to the normal game state, a result display (result suggestion display) is performed. Therefore, by giving the player the feeling that the normal time-saving game state transitioned to after a jackpot game has ended, the player's sense of satisfaction or disappointment can be aroused, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal time-saving game state in which a presentation mode other than the battle mode is set, if the remaining number of small wins (Z) becomes "0" and the normal time-saving game state ends with a crash (an abnormality occurs, such as the game ball not passing through a specific area 53 that the game ball would pass through if hit to the right during a small win game) and the game transitions to the normal game state, a shutter display (end indication display) is displayed without a result display (result indication display). This makes the player feel that he or she has done something unnecessary, which makes it possible to have the intention of playing normally, and increases the interest of the game.

In addition, when a result display (result suggestion display) is performed in the normal time-saving play state and a transition to the normal play state occurs, a transition to the dedicated after-time mode occurs after the time-saving play state ends. On the other hand, when a transition to the normal play state occurs without a result display (result suggestion display) being performed in the normal time-saving play state, a transition to presentation mode A occurs without a transition to the dedicated after-time mode occurs after the time-saving play state ends. Therefore, after the result display is performed, the player is left with the impression that they have transitioned to the time-saving play state, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the number of time-saving times (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" in the first special time-saving game state and the first special time-saving game state ends normally and transitions to the normal game state, a shutter display (end suggestion display) is displayed without a result display (result suggestion display). This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable when a result display is displayed even though a jackpot game has not been played, while the shutter display gives the player the feeling that the first special time-saving game state has ended, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the first special time-saving game state, if the remaining number of small wins (Z) becomes "0" and the first special time-saving game state ends with a crash (an abnormality occurs, such as the game ball not passing through a specific area 53 that the game ball would pass through if hit to the right during a small win game) and the game transitions to the normal game state, a shutter display (end indication display) is displayed without a result display (result indication display). This makes the player feel that he or she has done something unnecessary, which makes the player want to play normally, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when a shutter display (end suggestion display) is performed in the first special time-saving game state and a transition to the normal game state occurs, the game is configured to transition to presentation mode A after the time-saving game state ends, without transitioning to a dedicated after-end mode. This makes it less likely that the player will feel disappointed that the first special time-saving game state has ended without a jackpot being played, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when transitioning from the battle mode during the second special time-saving game state to the normal game state, the result display (result suggestion display) is not executed, but a shutter display (end suggestion display) is executed. Therefore, the shutter display can give the player the feeling that the second special time-saving game state has ended, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when a shutter display (end indication display) is performed in the second special time-saving game state and a transition to the normal game state occurs, it is possible to transition to presentation mode A after the time-saving game state ends without transitioning to the dedicated after-end mode. This makes it less likely that the player will feel disappointed that the first special time-saving game state has ended without a jackpot being played, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, if a jackpot game is not executed during the special time-saving game state (first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state) and the special time-saving game state ends, a result display suggesting the results of the game during a predetermined period (a series of advantageous periods) is not executed, but if a jackpot game is executed during the special time-saving game state and the controlled normal time-saving game state ends after the jackpot game ends, a result display can be executed. Therefore, while reducing the player's dissatisfaction when a jackpot game is not executed during the time-saving game state, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction when a jackpot game is executed during the time-saving game state, and to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, it is possible to differentiate between the presentation mode (post-termination dedicated mode or presentation mode A) to which the player transitions after the normal time-saving game state ends and the presentation mode (presentation mode A only) to which the player transitions after the special time-saving game state ends (first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state). Therefore, by increasing the presentation variations after the time-saving game state ends depending on the type of time-saving game state, the presentation effect can be improved, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of switching to Ranbu mode when the remaining number of small wins in Chou Ranbu mode or Infinite mode decreases to "1", it is also possible to indirectly indicate the remaining number of small wins (Z) by continuing Chou Ranbu mode or Infinite mode and displaying the second time-saving number (J2) as "???" or by making the second time-saving number (J2) invisible.

In addition, instead of indicating the remaining number of small wins (Z) through mode presentation or the like, information related to the conditions for ending the time-saving game state (presentation mode image corresponding to the second number of times of time-saving, the number of times of the second time-saving, etc.) may be not displayed, so that the remaining number of small wins (Z) cannot be completely grasped.

In addition, when the number of time-saving times (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" in the normal time-saving game state and the normal time-saving game state is normally ended and transitions to the normal game state, the game may be transitioned to presentation mode A without transitioning to the dedicated mode after the time-saving game state ends, and when the number of time-saving times (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" in the first special time-saving game state or the second special time-saving game state and the first special time-saving game state or the second special time-saving game state is normally ended and transitions to the normal game state, the game may be transitioned to the dedicated mode after the time-saving game state ends. Even in this way, the presentation effect can be improved by increasing the presentation variation after the time-saving game state ends depending on the type of time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, when transitioning from the entering battle mode during the normal time-saving play state to the normal play state, a result display (result suggestion display) or a shutter display (end suggestion display) may be executed. In this case, the result display may be executed when the number of time-saving plays (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and transition to the normal play state occurs, and a shutter display may be executed when the remaining number of small wins (Z) becomes "0" and transition to the normal play state occurs. In this way, the display control at the end of the normal time-saving play state can be standardized regardless of the presentation mode during the normal time-saving play state, thereby improving control efficiency and making the game more interesting.

In addition, instead of controlling to infinite mode or wild dance mode in the first special time-saving game state, it is also possible to control to a presentation mode dedicated to the first special time-saving game state. In this way, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the first special time-saving game state is in progress, and the presentation variation increases, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of controlling to the battle mode in the second special time-saving game state, it is also possible to control to a presentation mode dedicated to the second special time-saving game state. In this way, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the second special time-saving game state is in progress, and the presentation variation increases, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Command analysis process of the production control unit)
The command analysis process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 53. Fig. 53 is a flowchart showing the command analysis process in the performance control unit 130m.

First, in step E301, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the receive buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not a command has been received. If a command has been received, the process proceeds to step E302; if a command has not been received, the current command analysis process is terminated.

In step E302, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting change command. If it is a setting change command, the process proceeds to step E303. If it is not a setting change command, the process proceeds to step E304.

In step E303, the sub-CPU 130a performs a setting change notification process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of setting a notification instruction command for starting the setting change notification described above in a transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the setting change notification.

In step E304, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting confirmation command. If it is a setting confirmation command, the process proceeds to step E305. If it is not a setting confirmation command, the process proceeds to step E306.

In step E305, the sub-CPU 130a performs a setting check notification process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of setting a notification instruction command for starting the above-mentioned setting check notification in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the setting check notification.

In step E306, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a power-on command or a power restoration command. If it is a power-on command or a power restoration command, the process proceeds to step E307. If it is not a power-on command or a power restoration command, the process proceeds to step E308.

In step E307, the sub-CPU 130a performs a power-on notification process. Specifically, if the received command is a power-on command, the sub-CPU 130a sets a notification command for executing the above-mentioned power-on notification in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if the received command is a power restoration command, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of setting a notification command for executing the above-mentioned power restoration notification in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the notification command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the power-on notification or power restoration notification, and processing is performed to execute an initial operation for operating the movable performance device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) in a predetermined manner and an initial light emission for emitting light from the board lighting device 74 in a predetermined manner.

In step E308, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is an error-related command. If it is an error-related command, the process proceeds to step E309. If it is not an error-related command, the process proceeds to step E310.

"Error-related designation commands" include commands for designating unrecoverable errors, commands for designating improper winning errors, commands for designating abnormal winning errors, commands for designating magnetic errors, commands for designating radio wave errors, commands for designating the start of door opening errors, commands for designating the end of door opening errors, and commands for designating operational errors.

The sub-CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E309. Specifically, it performs processing to set a notification instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c in order to execute an error notification (unrecoverable error notification, improper winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door open error notification, operation error notification, etc.) according to the type of error specification command received. As a result, the notification instruction command is sent to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute various types of error notifications.

In step E310, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a game state designation command. If it is a game state designation command, the process proceeds to step E311. If it is not a game state designation command, the process proceeds to step E312.

In step E311, the sub-CPU 130a performs a game state setting process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to update the game state stored in the sub-RAM 130c to a game state corresponding to the game state designation command.

In step E312, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol storage command. If it is a special symbol storage command, the process proceeds to step E313. If it is not a special symbol storage command, the process proceeds to step E314.

In step E313, the sub-CPU 130a performs a reserved number update process. Specifically, it performs a process of setting a performance instruction command to update the reserved number of special drawings stored in the sub-RAM 130c and increase or decrease the reserved icons displayed on the image display device in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the performance instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a process is performed to increase or decrease the reserved icons displayed on the image display device.

In step E314, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a look-ahead command. If it is, the sub-CPU 130a sets the received look-ahead command (special chart planned variation pattern) in a look-ahead memory area of the sub-RAM 130c (described later) and then proceeds to step E315. If it is not, the sub-CPU 130a proceeds to step E318.

The "look-ahead memory area" is divided into a first look-ahead memory section for sequentially storing look-ahead information (such as a planned special chart change pattern) based on a first look-ahead designation command, a second look-ahead memory section for sequentially storing pending information based on a second look-ahead designation command, and a memory section (the 0th memory section) for storing look-ahead information corresponding to the change display (change performance) currently being executed, and the first look-ahead memory section and the second look-ahead memory section are each divided into the 1st to 4th memory sections.

The first to fourth memory sections of the first look-ahead memory section correspond to the first to fourth memory sections of the first special symbol determination information reservation memory area described above, respectively, and when the first look-ahead designation command is received, the look-ahead information is stored in the memory section corresponding to the first reservation number. The look-ahead information stored in each memory section is moved (shifted) to the memory section with the next lower number each time a variable display (variable performance) of the first special symbol is executed.

The first to fourth memory sections of the second look-ahead memory section correspond to the first to fourth memory sections of the second special symbol determination information reservation memory area described above, respectively, and when a second look-ahead designation command is received, the look-ahead information is stored in the memory section corresponding to the second reservation number. The look-ahead information stored in each memory section is moved (shifted) to the memory section with the next lower number each time a variable display (variable performance) of the second special symbol is executed.

This memory unit (the 0th memory unit) corresponds to the special pattern determination information execution memory area described above, and when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed, the pre-reading information moved (shifted) from the first memory unit of the first pre-reading memory unit is stored, and when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, the pre-reading information moved (shifted) from the first memory unit of the second pre-reading unit is stored.

In step E315, the sub-CPU 130a performs an icon change effect determination process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to determine whether or not to execute an icon change effect that suggests the expectation (possibility) of a special game being executed by displaying the pending icon or the icon displayed on the image display device in a special display mode (special icon, specific icon) that is different from the normal display mode (normal icon), and the effect mode of the icon change effect to be executed. Details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

In step E316, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process for determining the light-emitting effect to be used when a winning ball enters the starting hole. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process for determining whether or not to perform a light-emitting effect when a winning ball enters the starting hole, the light-emitting effect indicating the likelihood of a special game being played by illuminating the top lamp 10b located at the top center of the glass frame 4 of the frame lighting device 10 in a special light-emitting mode different from the normal light-emitting mode, and the mode of the light-emitting effect to be performed when a winning ball enters the starting hole.

In step E317, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of determining the look-ahead continuous performance. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute a look-ahead continuous performance that creates the expectation that a jackpot game will be played (indicates the possibility that a jackpot game will be played) by executing a predetermined performance over the variable display (variable performance) of one or more special symbols, and determines the type of look-ahead continuous performance to be executed, and performs a process of setting a performance instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to execute the look-ahead continuous performance. As a result, the performance instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a process is performed to execute the look-ahead continuous performance. The details of the look-ahead continuous performance determination process will be described later.

In step E318, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol designation command. If it is a special symbol designation command, the process proceeds to step E319. If it is not a special symbol designation command, the process proceeds to step E320.

In step E319, the sub-CPU 130a performs a pattern data determination process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to determine the effect patterns to be displayed on the image display device as a result of the variable effect, i.e., the arrangement (combination) of the effect patterns to be displayed on a predetermined pay line.

In step E320, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special chart variation pattern designation command. If it is a special chart variation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step E321. If it is not a special chart variation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step E325.

In step E321, the sub-CPU 130a performs a variable performance pattern determination process. Specifically, based on the contents of the received special chart variable pattern designation command, the variable performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the variable performance executed by the performance device including the image display device, is determined, and a performance instruction command indicating the variable performance pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the performance instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the variable performance. The variable performance pattern determination process will be described in detail later.

In step E322, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process for determining a jackpot advance notice effect. Specifically, based on the variable effect pattern determined in step E321, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute a jackpot advance notice effect that suggests the likelihood of a special game being played (to generate anticipation that a jackpot game will be played), determines the presentation mode (pattern) of the jackpot advance notice effect to be executed, and sets execution information for the jackpot advance notice effect in a specified area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E323, the sub-CPU 130a performs an icon display mode update process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to start the icon change effect determined in the icon change effect determination process in step E315, and to change the display mode of the pending icon or the icon that is already displayed.

In step E324, the sub-CPU 130a performs a look-ahead continuous performance execution process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of setting a performance instruction command for starting the look-ahead continuous performance determined in the look-ahead continuous performance determination process in step E317 or for changing the performance mode in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the performance instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the look-ahead continuous performance.

In step E325, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a pattern determination command. If it is a pattern determination command, the process proceeds to step E326. If it is not a pattern determination command, the process proceeds to step E327.

In step E326, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of stopping the effect symbols. Specifically, the process performs a process of setting an effect instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to stop the display of the effect symbols that are in a temporarily stopped state and end the variable effect. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a process of ending the variable effect is performed.

In step E327, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special game command. If it is a special game command, the process proceeds to step E328. If it is not a special game command, the sub-CPU 130a ends the current command analysis process.

"Special game designation commands" include a big win opening designation command, a big win round designation command, a big win ending designation command, a small win opening designation command, a small win ending designation command, etc.

In step E328, the sub-CPU 130a performs a special game performance determination process. Specifically, in the case of an opening designation command, a process is performed in which a performance instruction command for determining an opening performance for a big win game or a small win game and executing the opening performance is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. In the case of a round designation command, a process is performed in which a performance instruction command for determining a round performance for a round game and executing the round performance is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. In the case of an ending designation command, a process is performed in which a performance instruction command for determining an ending performance for a big win game or a small win game and executing the ending performance is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current command analysis process is terminated. As a result, the performance instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the opening performance, round performance, or ending performance.

(Icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 54. Fig. 54 is a flowchart showing the icon change performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E315-1, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the look-ahead command received from the main control board 110, and in step E315-2, determines whether or not the current time is a period during which an icon change performance can be performed. If the current time is a period during which an icon change performance can be performed, the process proceeds to step E315-3. If the current time is not a period during which an icon change performance can be performed, the process proceeds to step E315-7, assuming that the icon change performance based on the currently received look-ahead command will not be performed.

The "period during which the icon change effect can be executed" refers to a period during which a jackpot game is not being played, a normal game state is being played when a look-ahead command based on a win at the first start port 45 is received, and a time-saving game state (specific game state) is being played when a look-ahead command based on a win at the second start port 47 is received, etc.

In step E315-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a change scenario in the advance pending (pending memory corresponding to the previously received look-ahead specification command), that is, whether or not a change scenario has been set in the look-ahead information storage area. If there is a change scenario, the process proceeds to step E315-7 assuming that the icon change performance based on the currently received look-ahead specification command will not be executed, and if there is no change scenario, the process proceeds to step E315-4.

In step E315-4, the sub-CPU 130a acquires a random number value for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), and in step E315-5, selects an icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 55) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

In step E315-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 40, and determines one of the multiple final icon display modes based on the type of start gate winning designation command and the selection rate (%) of each final icon display mode.

In step E315-7, the sub-CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E315-8, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the determined final icon display mode is a special icon (either a blue icon, a red icon, or a rainbow icon) that executes an icon change performance. If it is a special icon that executes an icon change performance, the process proceeds to step E315-9, and if it is not a display mode that executes an icon change performance, the process proceeds to step E315-12.

In step E315-9, the sub-CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 56) for determining the change scenario of the icon change presentation. Details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from when the reserved icon appears to when it disappears.

In step E315-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the read-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c corresponding to the reserved memory number counter. Specifically, the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 41 is referenced, and one change scenario is determined from among multiple change scenarios based on the final icon display state, the reserved memory number of special symbols corresponding to the start-gate winning designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario.

In step E315-11, the sub-CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the display mode of the icon that is first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD), from the determined change scenario, sets the icon display command for that winning icon in the transmission buffer, and ends this icon change presentation determination process.

As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a pending icon in a display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD), and a predetermined sound effect (a first winning sound when displayed as a normal icon, and a second winning sound when displayed as a special icon or a specific icon) is output.

In step E315-12, the sub-CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which no icon change performance is performed, and sets this in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c corresponding to the pending memory number counter.

In step E315-13, the sub-CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer and ends the icon change presentation determination process. This causes the icon display command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a reserved icon with a display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) and a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

In the icon change effect determination process of this embodiment, an icon change effect (pending icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when there is no change scenario in the advance hold, but an icon change effect may be executed when the advance hold does not perform a reach effect, and an icon change effect may not be executed when the advance hold performs a reach effect. In this way, no change in the display mode of the pending icon occurs during the change effect corresponding to the advance hold in which a reach effect is executed, and a change in the display mode of the pending icon occurs during the change effect corresponding to the advance hold in which a reach effect is not executed, so that the icon change effect will not hinder the reach effect, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, even if the advance holds include one that performs a reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but the icon change effect may be executed more easily (executed at a higher rate) when the advance holds do not include one that performs a reach effect than when the advance holds include one that performs a reach effect.

In addition, when a look-ahead command for the second special symbol is received during the time-saving play state, an icon change effect is executed, but it is also possible not to execute the icon change effect even when a look-ahead command for the second special symbol is received during the time-saving play state. In this case, the icon may be displayed but the icon change effect may not be executed, or the icon itself may not be displayed and the icon change effect may not be executed.

(Icon Final Display Mode Determination Table)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table which is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table associates the type of look-ahead command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the selected icon final display mode, and for reference, the performance content of the planned change pattern corresponding to the look-ahead command is also listed.

The final icon display modes are set to normal icons (white icons) that do not indicate the likelihood of a big or small win, and special icons (blue icons, red icons, rainbow icons) that indicate the likelihood of a big or small win. The likelihood of a big or small win associated with the special icons increases in the following order: (white icon <) blue icon < red icon < rainbow icon (guaranteed big win).

The first feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 55 is that when the look-ahead designation command indicates a big win, a rainbow icon may be determined as the icon final display mode, whereas when the look-ahead designation command indicates a small win, a rainbow icon is not determined as the icon final display mode. By doing this, players will not be given false joy when they receive a small win when it is not yet certain that a big win game will be played, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

The second feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 55 is that the percentage of times a red icon is determined when the pre-read designation command for the second special symbol, which is sent only during the time-saving game mode, indicates a big win, compared to the percentage of times a red icon is determined when the pre-read designation command indicates a small win. By doing this, it is possible to differentiate between a big win and a small win, which is not confirmed to result in a big win game, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

When the look-ahead command indicates a small win, the rainbow icon is not determined as the final icon display mode. However, in this embodiment, as long as the game ball is hit to the right, there is a nearly 100% chance that the game ball will pass through the specific area 53 and a big win game will be executed, so the rainbow icon may be determined as the final icon display mode. This can increase the player's awareness of the small win game and make the game more interesting.

In addition, if the rainbow icon is determined when the pre-read designation command for the second special symbol, which is sent only during the time-saving play state, indicates a small win, it is preferable to make the rate at which the rainbow icon is determined to indicate a big win higher than the rate at which the rainbow icon is determined to indicate a small win.

(Change Scenario Decision Table)
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a variation scenario determination table which is referred to when determining a variation scenario.

The change scenario determination table associates the final display mode of the icon, the reserved number of special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the change scenario to be selected, and for reference, the prior changes in each change scenario and the update mode of the icon in that change are listed.

"Pre-change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that was stored before the special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command, and "the change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command.

The change scenarios include scenarios (e.g., scenario 01, etc.) in which the display mode of the icon does not change while the pre-change is being performed (the pending icon change performance is not executed) but changes while the change is being performed (the relevant icon change performance is executed), scenarios (e.g., scenario 04, etc.) in which the display mode of the icon changes while the pre-change is being performed (the pending icon change performance is executed) but does not change while the change is being performed (the relevant icon change performance is not executed), and scenarios (e.g., scenario 15, etc.) in which the display mode of the icon changes while the pre-change is being performed and while the change is being performed (the pending icon change performance and the relevant icon change performance are executed).

The first feature of the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 56 is that when a jackpot game is executed, an icon change effect (display of a rainbow icon) can be executed to suggest in advance that a jackpot game will be executed even before a specified period of time (e.g., one change before) of the change effect in which the jackpot game is executed, whereas when a first special time-saving game state occurs, an icon change effect that suggests in advance that the first special time-saving game state will occur is not executed. By doing this, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation of a jackpot while avoiding the inconvenience of the first special time-saving game state occurring in vain, making the game more interesting.

The change scenario is determined regardless of whether the game is in a normal game state (icon with a first special symbol) or a specific game state (icon with a second special symbol). For example, in a specific game state (icon with a second special symbol), the rate at which the icon changes due to the change may be higher than the rate at which the icon changes due to a prior change (e.g., 20:80 or 0:100). Also, the rate at which the icon changes due to the change may be higher in a specific game state (icon with a second special symbol) than in a normal game state (icon with a first special symbol).

In addition, when the first special time-saving game state occurs, an icon change effect that suggests in advance that the first special time-saving game state will occur is not executed, but an icon change effect (e.g., displaying a yellow flashing icon, outputting a change sound, etc.) that suggests that the first special time-saving game state will occur may be executed. In this case, before a specified period of the change effect in which the jackpot game is executed (e.g., one change before), execution of the icon change effect that suggests that the first special time-saving game state will occur may be restricted (e.g., not executed, or even if executed, no change sound is output, etc.).

(Winning light-emitting effect determination process of the effect control unit)
The process of determining the light-emitting effect to be used when a prize is won by the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 57. Fig. 57 is a flow chart showing the process of determining the light-emitting effect to be used when a prize is won by the performance control unit 130m.

In step E316-1, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the look-ahead command received from the main control board 110, and in step E316-2, determines whether or not the current time is a time when the light-emitting effect at the time of winning can be executed. If the current time is a time when the light-emitting effect at the time of winning can be executed, the process proceeds to step E316-3. If the current time is not a time when the light-emitting effect at the time of winning can be executed, the process ends, assuming that the light-emitting effect at the time of winning based on the look-ahead command received this time will not be executed.

The "period during which the light-emitting effect can be executed when a winning jackpot is not in progress, the normal game state is in effect when a look-ahead command based on a winning jackpot is received at the first starting port 45, and the time-saving game state is in effect when a look-ahead command based on a winning jackpot is received at the second starting port 47.

In step E316-3, the sub-CPU 130a acquires a random number value for determining the winning light-emitting performance pattern to be executed by the top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10, and in step E316-4, selects a winning light-emitting performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 58) for determining the winning light-emitting performance pattern. Details of the winning light-emitting performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E316-5, the sub-CPU 130a determines the winning light-emitting performance pattern. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the winning light-emitting performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58, and determines one winning light-emitting performance pattern from among multiple winning light-emitting performance patterns based on the type of special symbol, the type of pre-read command, and the selection rate (%) of each winning light-emitting performance pattern.

In step E316-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the determined winning light-emitting effect pattern is a pattern that executes a winning light-emitting effect. If it is a pattern that executes a winning light-emitting effect, the process proceeds to step E316-7. If it is a pattern that does not execute a winning light-emitting effect, the process ends.

In step E316-7, the sub-CPU 130a sets the winning light-emitting effect execution command corresponding to the determined winning light-emitting effect pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends this winning light-emitting effect determination process. This causes the winning light-emitting effect execution command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the winning light-emitting effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the winning light-emitting effect execution command.

(Winning Light Emitting Pattern Determination Table)
FIG. 58 shows a winning light-emitting effect pattern determination table that is referenced when determining a winning light-emitting effect pattern.

The winning light-emitting performance pattern determination table associates the type of special symbol, the type of pre-reading command (planned change pattern), the selection rate (%) of each winning light-emitting performance pattern, and the winning light-emitting performance pattern to be selected, and for reference, the performance format for each winning light-emitting performance pattern is also listed.

The winning light-emitting performance patterns include winning light-emitting performance pattern 00, which does not execute the winning light-emitting performance, and winning light-emitting performance patterns 01 and 02, which execute the winning light-emitting performance. In winning light-emitting performance patterns 01 and 02, the top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10 emits white or yellow light and a specified sound effect is output from the audio output device 9.

The first feature of the winning light-emitting effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that a winning light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed with a look-ahead command (planned fluctuation pattern) with a high probability of winning a jackpot than with a look-ahead command (planned fluctuation pattern) with a low probability of winning a jackpot. This makes it easier to heighten the player's expectations for the execution of a fluctuation effect with a high probability of winning a jackpot, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The second feature of the winning light effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that the winning light effect is more likely to be executed in the event of a big win than in the event of a miss. This can heighten the player's anticipation of a big win, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

The third feature of the winning light pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that when a jackpot game is executed, a winning light effect (rainbow light emission and sound effect output) that suggests in advance that a jackpot game will be executed can be executed even before a specified period of the variable effect in which the jackpot game is executed (for example, one variable before), whereas when the first special time-saving game state occurs, a winning light effect that suggests in advance that the first special time-saving game state will occur is not executed. By doing this, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation of a jackpot while avoiding the inconvenience of the first special time-saving game state not occurring, thereby making the game more interesting.

It is also possible to provide a winning illumination pattern that guarantees a jackpot (for example, the top lamp 10b illuminates in rainbow colors and the audio output device 9 outputs a confirmation sound). In this case, it is advisable to determine the winning illumination pattern that guarantees a jackpot with the lowest probability when a full rotation reach is executed.

In addition, when the first special time-saving game state occurs, a winning light-emitting effect that suggests in advance that the first special time-saving game state will occur is not executed, but a winning light-emitting effect that suggests that the first special time-saving game state will occur (e.g., flashing blue, output of sound effects, etc.) may be executed. In this case, the execution of a winning light-emitting effect that suggests that the first special time-saving game state will occur may be restricted (e.g., not executed, or even if executed, sound effects may not be output, etc.) before a specified period of the variable effect in which the jackpot game is executed (e.g., one variable before).

(Preview read-ahead continuous performance decision processing of the performance control unit)
The look-ahead continuous performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 59. Fig. 59 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead continuous performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E317-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a look-ahead designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If a look-ahead designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E530-2, and if a look-ahead designation command has not been received, the process for determining the look-ahead continuous performance is terminated.

In step E317-2, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the received look-ahead command and determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, the type of jackpot game, and the presentation content (planned variation pattern).

In step E317-3, it is determined whether or not the current period is one in which the look-ahead zone performance can be executed. If the current period is one in which the look-ahead zone performance can be executed, processing proceeds to step E317-4. If the current period is not one in which the look-ahead zone performance can be executed, processing proceeds to step E317-6, assuming that the look-ahead zone performance based on the currently received look-ahead designation command will not be executed.

The "look-ahead zone effect" is an effect that continuously suggests the expectation of a special game being executed by using background images, text information, and color information (expectation value information) by performing in-zone effects (displaying a look-ahead zone background image, displaying a blue zone image or a red heat zone image, and outputting zone BGM or heat zone BGM) across one or more variable effects, and is a type of look-ahead continuous effect.

The "period during which the look-ahead zone effect can be executed" includes a period when there is no pre-emption that executes the look-ahead zone effect, when a jackpot is not being played, when the normal game mode is in effect, etc. Therefore, while the look-ahead zone effect can be executed in the normal game mode, the look-ahead zone effect cannot be executed in the time-saving game mode.

In step E317-4, the sub-CPU 130a selects a look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table (see FIG. 60) for determining the scenario of the look-ahead zone performance. Details of the look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E317-5, the sub-CPU 130a determines the look-ahead zone performance scenario. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 60, and determines one look-ahead zone performance scenario from among multiple look-ahead zone performance scenarios based on the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of expected fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each preview scenario.

In step E317-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario for the look-ahead zone presentation as a presentation scenario in which the look-ahead zone presentation is not executed.

In step E317-7, the sub-CPU 130a sets the determined look-ahead zone performance scenario in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, which corresponds to the reserved number counter. As a result, the look-ahead zone performance scenario is referenced in the look-ahead continuous performance execution process of step E324 described above, and processing is performed to execute the look-ahead zone performance.

In step E317-8, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is one in which the look-ahead countdown performance can be executed. If the current period is one in which the look-ahead countdown performance can be executed, the process proceeds to step E317-9. If the current period is not one in which the look-ahead countdown performance can be executed, the process proceeds to step E317-11, assuming that the look-ahead countdown performance based on the currently received look-ahead designation command will not be executed.

The "pre-reading countdown effect" is an effect that uses text and sound information to intermittently indicate the likelihood of a special game being played by performing a countdown effect (displaying a counting image and outputting a counting sound) over one or more variable effects, and is a type of pre-reading continuous effect.

The "period during which the look-ahead countdown effect can be executed" includes periods when there are no reserved balls that execute the look-ahead countdown effect, when a jackpot game is not in progress, when the game is in a time-saving game mode, etc. Therefore, the look-ahead countdown effect is not executed in the normal game mode, but the look-ahead countdown effect can be executed in the time-saving game mode.

In step E317-9, the sub-CPU 130a selects a look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table (see FIG. 61) for determining the scenario for the look-ahead countdown performance. Details of the look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E317-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines a look-ahead countdown performance scenario. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 61, and determines one look-ahead countdown performance scenario from among multiple look-ahead countdown performance scenarios based on the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of expected variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each performance scenario.

In step E317-11, the sub-CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario for the look-ahead countdown performance as a performance scenario in which the look-ahead countdown performance is not executed.

In step E317-12, the sub-CPU 130a sets the determined look-ahead countdown performance scenario in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, which corresponds to the reserved number counter. This causes the look-ahead countdown performance scenario to be referenced in the look-ahead continuous performance execution process of step E324 described above, and processing is performed to execute the look-ahead countdown performance. When this process ends, the current look-ahead continuous performance determination process ends.

In this way, the types of pre-reading continuous effects executed in the normal game mode and the time-saving game mode are different. This makes it possible to differentiate between the normal game mode and the time-saving game mode, and to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, where the number of reserved balls is more likely to increase than in the normal game state and a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be determined, the look-ahead zone effect, which is executed continuously across one or more fluctuation effects, is not executed. This prevents inconveniences such as a decrease in the effect of the look-ahead zone effect, which aims to ensure a long presentation time for one fluctuation effect, and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, where the number of reserved balls is more likely to increase than in the normal game state and a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be determined, a look-ahead countdown effect is executed intermittently across one or more fluctuation effects. Therefore, the look-ahead countdown effect, which requires a short performance time for each fluctuation effect, makes it easier to heighten the player's expectations and increases the enjoyment of the game.

The look-ahead zone effect may be performed even in the time-saving game mode, and the look-ahead countdown effect may be performed even in the normal game mode.

(Look-ahead zone performance scenario decision table)
FIG. 60 shows a look-ahead zone presentation scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a look-ahead zone presentation scenario.

The look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table associates the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead specification command, the expected change pattern indicated by the look-ahead specification command, the selection rate (%) of the performance scenario for each look-ahead zone performance, and the performance scenario of the selected look-ahead zone performance, and for reference, the advance changes in each performance scenario and the performance mode of the look-ahead zone performance in that change are listed.

"Pre-change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that was stored before the special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command, and "the change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command.

"Zone" refers to the execution of normal zone effects (display of a look-ahead zone background image, display of a blue zone image, output of zone background music), while "hot zone" refers to the execution of heat zone effects (display of a look-ahead zone background image, display of a red heat zone image, output of heat zone background music) which have a higher chance of winning than normal zone effects.

The look-ahead zone performance scenarios include a non-execution scenario in which the look-ahead zone performance is not executed (e.g., scenario 00), a scenario in which the zone performance is not executed during pre-change but is executed during the change (e.g., scenario 01), and a scenario in which the zone performance is executed during both pre-change and the change (e.g., scenario 02).

The first feature of the look-ahead zone presentation scenario determination table shown in FIG. 60 is that it sets presentation scenarios in which the presentation mode of the presentation during the zone does not progress (change) to a presentation mode with a high expectation of special play, and presentation scenarios in which the presentation mode of the presentation during the zone progresses (changes) to a presentation mode with a high expectation of special play. By doing so, it is possible to make the player anticipate whether or not the presentation mode of the presentation during the zone will progress (change), making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the look-ahead zone presentation scenario determination table shown in FIG. 60 is that the presentation mode of the look-ahead zone presentation is more likely to progress (change) with the current change than with prior change. This makes it easier to maintain the player's sense of expectation for a long period of time, and can bring the player's sense of expectation to a climax with the current change, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The third feature of the look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 60 is that it does not execute look-ahead zone performances that suggest that a jackpot game will be executed, nor look-ahead zone performances that suggest that a first special time-saving game state will occur. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the results of the look-ahead zone performances, heightening the player's anticipation of a jackpot while also improving the enjoyment of the game.

Note that a look-ahead zone presentation may be executed to suggest that a jackpot game will be played, but a look-ahead zone presentation to suggest that the first special time-saving game state will occur may not be executed.

(Preview countdown performance scenario decision table)
FIG. 61 shows a look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table that is referenced when determining a look-ahead countdown performance scenario.

The look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table associates the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead specification command, the expected change pattern indicated by the look-ahead specification command, the selection rate (%) of the performance scenario for each look-ahead countdown performance, and the performance scenario for the look-ahead countdown performance that will be selected, and for reference, the advance changes in each performance scenario and the performance mode of the look-ahead countdown performance in that change are also listed.

"Pre-change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that was stored before the special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command, and "the change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command.

"Count 3" means that a count image showing "3" is displayed and a count sound is output, "Count 2" means that a count image showing "2" is displayed and a count sound is output, "Count 1" means that a count image showing "1" is displayed and a count sound is output, and "Count 0" means that a count image showing "0" is displayed and a count sound is output.

The first feature of the look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 61 is that it is possible to execute the look-ahead countdown performance not only in the case of a big win, but also in the case of a small win (a predicted fluctuation pattern that leads to the expectation of a small win). In this way, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation as to whether or not a small win game will be executed, in which a big win game is executed when the game ball enters the specific area 53, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The second feature of the look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 61 is that the maximum count is "3" regardless of whether it is a big win or a small win. This allows the player to feel a sense of anticipation without being aware of whether it is a big win or a small win, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

The third feature of the look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 61 is that the look-ahead countdown performance is performed in the same manner regardless of whether the winning combination is a big win or a small win. This allows the player to feel a sense of anticipation without being aware of whether the winning combination is a big win or a small win, making the game more interesting.

The fourth feature of the look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 61 is that it does not execute look-ahead countdown performances that suggest that a jackpot game will be executed, nor look-ahead countdown performances that suggest that a first special time-saving game state will occur. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the results of the look-ahead countdown performance, heightening the player's anticipation of a jackpot while also improving the enjoyment of the game.

When the expected variation pattern is a small win, the countdown effect is executed in a specific or unpredictable manner for the number of rounds or the number of time-saving times of the jackpot game to which the game transitions when the game ball enters the specific area 53 during a small win game. However, the countdown effect may be executed in a specific or predictable manner for the number of rounds or the number of time-saving times of the jackpot game to which the game transitions when the game ball enters the specific area 53 during a small win game. For example, the font or size of the count image may be different between a case where the number of rounds or the number of time-saving times is relatively small and a case where the number of rounds or the number of time-saving times is relatively large, and the type or volume of the count sound may be different.

It is also possible to execute a look-ahead countdown effect that suggests that a big win will occur, but it is also possible not to execute a look-ahead countdown effect that suggests that the first special time-saving game state will occur.

(Variable performance pattern determination process of the performance control unit)
The variable performance pattern determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 62. Fig. 62 is a flowchart of the variable performance pattern determination process in the performance control unit 130m.

First, in step E321-1, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the received variation pattern designation command, and in step E321-2, determines whether or not the current state is normal gameplay. If it is normal gameplay, the process proceeds to step E321-3. If it is not normal gameplay (time-saving gameplay), the process proceeds to step E321-7.

In step E321-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation is the remaining reserved portion of the second special pattern at the time of transition to the normal game state. If it is the remaining reserved portion of the second special pattern, the process proceeds to step E321-4, and if it is not the remaining reserved portion of the second special pattern (variable display of the first special pattern), the process proceeds to step E321-6.

In step E321-4, the sub-CPU 130a judges whether the remaining reserved second special symbol is from the normal end of the normal time-saving game state in which the second time-saving number (J2) is set to 7 times. If it is not from the normal end of the normal time-saving game state in which the second time-saving number (J2) is set to 7 times (if it is from the end of a break, or from the normal time-saving game state in which the second time-saving number (J2) is set to 55 times or more, or from the special time-saving game state), the process proceeds to step E321-6. If it is from the normal time-saving game state in which the second time-saving number (J2) is set to 7 times, the sub-CPU 130a selects a variable presentation pattern determination table for the remaining reserved symbol (see FIG. 63(c)) in step E321-5 and proceeds to step E321-14. The details of the variable presentation pattern determination table for the remaining reserved symbol will be described later.

In step E321-6, the sub-CPU 130a selects the normal variable performance pattern determination table (not shown) and proceeds to step E321-14.

In step E321-7, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the current state is the normal time-saving game state. If the current state is not the normal time-saving game state (if the current state is the special time-saving game state), the sub-CPU 130a proceeds to step E321-13. If the current state is the normal time-saving game state, the sub-CPU 130a proceeds to step E321-8, where it determines whether or not the current variation effect is the pre-final variation effect in the normal time-saving game state (the number of remaining time-saving times is 1 or more). If the current variation effect is not the pre-final variation effect (it is the final variation effect), the sub-CPU 130a proceeds to step E321-10. If the current variation effect is the pre-final variation effect, the sub-CPU 130a proceeds to step E321-9, where it selects a variation effect pattern determination table (not shown) for the variation effect before the final of the normal time-saving game state, and proceeds to step E321-14.

In step E321-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the current mode is the entry battle mode. If the current mode is the entry battle mode, in step E321-11, the variable presentation pattern determination table 1 for the final variation of the normal time-saving mode (see FIG. 63(a)) is selected and the process proceeds to step E321-14. If the current mode is not the entry battle mode, in step E321-12, the variable presentation pattern determination table 2 for the final variation of the normal time-saving mode (see FIG. 63(b)) is selected and the process proceeds to step E321-14. Details of the variable presentation pattern determination table for the final variation of the normal time-saving mode will be described later.

In step E321-13, the sub-CPU 130a selects a variable presentation pattern determination table for special time-saving (not shown in the figure) and proceeds to step E321-14.

In step E321-14, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the selected variable presentation pattern determination table to determine one variable presentation pattern from among the multiple variable presentation patterns, and sets it in a specified area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E321-15, the sub-CPU 130a sets the variable performance pattern instruction command corresponding to the determined variable performance pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and ends this variable performance pattern determination process. This causes the variable performance pattern instruction command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the variable performance.

(Fluctuation performance pattern determination table for time-saving final fluctuation)
Figure 63(a) is a diagram showing a variation presentation pattern determination table 1 for final variation in time-saving mode, which is referred to when determining the variation presentation pattern in the final variation presentation in the normal time-saving game state (entering battle mode), and Figure 63(b) is a diagram showing a variation presentation pattern determination table 2 for final variation in time-saving mode, which is referred to when determining the variation presentation pattern in the final variation presentation in the normal time-saving game state (other than entering battle mode).

As shown in Figures 63(a) and 63(b), the variation presentation pattern determination table for the final variation of the time-saving function associates the type of special pattern variation corresponding to the special pattern variation pattern designation command, the results of the preview of the remaining reserved second special pattern, the selection rate (%) of each variation presentation pattern, and the variation presentation pattern to be selected, and for reference, the presentation configuration for each variation presentation pattern is listed.

The "final battle introduction effect" is an introduction effect to the final battle effect in which the player faces off against an enemy character for a chance to win a big or small prize during the variable effect at the end of the time-saving game state (entering battle mode).
The "Final Battle SP Reach" is a special SP reach presentation that produces the above-mentioned final battle presentation, in which the two presentation patterns 70a that form the reach state shrink and move to both upper corners of the image display device, producing a battle presentation in which the player confronts an enemy character.
The "final battle SP reach with guaranteed victory" is a special SP reach presentation that produces the final battle presentation described above, in which the two performance patterns 70a that form the reach state shrink and move to both upper corners of the image display device, producing a battle presentation in which victory over the enemy character is guaranteed.

The "defeat effect" is an effect that suggests that the character has been defeated by the enemy character in the final battle effect.
The "victory performance" is a performance that suggests victory over the enemy character in the final battle performance.

The "result display" is a presentation that displays the results of play during a series of advantageous periods during which the time-saving play state continues, triggered by a jackpot play from a normal play state, known as the first hit, or a special time-saving play state.
The "special result display" is basically the same as the result display described above, but it is a result display that acts as a kind of pre-reading effect that suggests that a big win or a small win will occur in the variable effect related to the remaining reserve of the second special pattern when the normal game state is transitioned to.

"Shutter closed (end suggestion display)" is an effect that suggests the end of the time-saving game mode by displaying the shutter image closing. Specifically, the shutter image covers the effect images such as the effect pattern 70a and background image, making it appear to the player that they have lost.
A "revival effect" is an effect that first appears to be a miss and then announces (suggests) that it is a big win or a small win. Specifically, the shutter image is broken to reveal a combination of big win effect symbols.

The first feature of the variation presentation pattern determination table 1 for the time-saving final variation shown in FIG. 63(a) is that a variation presentation pattern that always results in a final battle presentation being executed in the final variation of the time-saving play state (entering battle mode) is selected. By doing this, it is possible to efficiently increase the player's expectations in the final variation presentation in the time-saving play state (entering battle mode), and to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the variation presentation pattern determination table 1 for the time-saving final variation shown in FIG. 63(a) is that a battle presentation that guarantees victory may be executed when the final variation of the time-saving game state (entering battle mode) is a small win or a big win. By doing this, it is possible to give the player a sense of security from the start of the battle presentation (final battle SP reach), and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The third feature of the variation presentation pattern determination table 1 for the final variation of the time-saving mode shown in FIG. 63(a) is that when the variation presentation related to the remaining reserved second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game mode is a small win or a big win, even if the final variation of the time-saving game mode (entering battle mode) is a miss, a battle presentation that confirms victory may be executed as a type of pre-reading presentation. By doing so, it is possible to execute a variation presentation that is unexpected, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The first feature of the variation presentation pattern determination table 2 for the final variation of the time-saving mode shown in FIG. 63(b) is that a variation presentation pattern is selected in which a result display is always executed from an end suggestion presentation in the final variation of the time-saving game state (other than the entered battle mode). By doing so, the player can be informed of the results of the game during a series of advantageous periods, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the variation effect pattern determination table 2 for the time-saving final variation shown in FIG. 63(b) is that a revival effect is executed when the final variation of the time-saving game state (other than the entered battle mode) is a small win or a big win. By doing this, it is possible to surprise the player by making him or her think that the normal time-saving game state has ended, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the variation presentation pattern determination table 2 for the final variation of the time-saving mode shown in FIG. 63(b) is that a special result display may be executed as a kind of pre-reading presentation that suggests that the variation presentation related to the remaining reserved second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game mode will result in a big win or a small win. By doing so, it is possible to stir up the joy of the player by making it appear as if the time-saving game mode has ended, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Variable performance pattern determination table for remaining reservations)
Figure 63 (c) is a diagram showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for remaining reservations which is referenced when determining the variable presentation pattern in the variable presentation related to the remaining reservations of the second special pattern when transitioning to the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 63(c), the variable presentation pattern determination table for remaining reserved balls associates the type of special chart variable presentation pattern corresponding to the special chart variable presentation pattern designation command, the selection rate (%) of each variable presentation pattern, and the variable presentation pattern to be selected, and lists the presentation configuration for each variable presentation pattern for reference.

"Result continuation" is a feature that continues to display the result at the final change in the time-limited play state (other than entering battle mode).
The "revival effect" is an effect that suggests that the player will revive from the result display at the final change in the time-saving game state (other than the entering battle mode) and win a big or small prize.
The "long revival effect" is an effect that suggests a revival from the result display at the final change in the time-saving game state (other than the entering battle mode) and a big or small win, and is carried out for a longer period of time than the revival effect described above.

The first feature of the remaining reserve variation presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63(b) is that the result display may continue by inheriting the result display from the final variation of the time-saving play state (other than entering battle mode). By doing so, a series of presentations can be performed from the final variation of the time-saving play state (other than entering battle mode), making it possible to improve the presentation effect before and after the end of the time-saving play state.

The second feature of the remaining reserve change presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63(b) is that it executes a revival presentation or long revival presentation by inheriting the presentation content (result display) from the final change of the time-saving play state (other than entering battle mode). By doing this, a series of presentations can be performed from the final change of the time-saving play state (other than entering battle mode), making it possible to improve the presentation effect before and after the end of the time-saving play state.

(Special time-saving production processing of the production control unit)
The special time-saving effect processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 64. Fig. 64 is a flowchart of the special time-saving effect processing in the effect control unit 130m.

First, in step E750-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the game is currently in a time-saving game state. If the game is not in a time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step E750-2. If the game is in a time-saving game state, the process ends with the special time-saving game effect processing not being executed (the RWM clear negation effect, which indicates that the RWM has not been cleared (is fixed), as described below, and the activation counter display, which indicates by counting down the number of changes until the game transitions to the special time-saving game state).

In step E750-2, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a variable performance has started. If a variable performance has not started, processing proceeds to step E750-16. If a variable performance has started, processing proceeds to step E750-3, where it is determined whether or not an RWM clear was performed when the power was turned on (whether a power-on command was received). If an RWM clear was performed, processing proceeds to step E750-13 as if an RWM clear negation performance was not to be executed, and if an RWM clear was performed, processing proceeds to step E750-4.

In step E750-4, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a history of a jackpot game being played from when the power was turned on until the present (whether or not a jackpot game was played on the same day). If there is a jackpot history, the process proceeds to step E750-13 assuming that the RWM clear negation effect will not be executed, and if there is no jackpot history, the process proceeds to step E750-5.

In step E750-5, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the number of changes before transitioning to the first special time-saving game state is within a predetermined number (here, 100 times). If it is not within the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step E750-16 assuming that the special time-saving effects (RWM clear negation effect, activation counter display) will not be executed, and if it is within the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step E750-6.

In step E750-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the number of changes since power restoration (reception of the power restoration designation command) is the first number (here, 50). If the number of changes is not the first number, the process proceeds to step E750-10. If the number of changes is the first number, in step E750-7, it determines by lottery (for example, at a rate of 1/2) whether to execute the RWM clear negation effect and whether to display the activation counter.

The sub-CPU 130a determines in step E750-8 whether it has been decided to execute an RWM clear negation effect or an activated counter display. If it has been decided not to execute an RWM clear negation effect or an activated counter display, processing proceeds to step E750-16. If it has been decided to execute an RWM clear negation effect or an activated counter display, in step E750-9, a performance execution command according to the decision result is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. This causes the performance execution command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the special time-saving performance (RWM clear negation effect and/or activated counter display).

In step E750-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the number of changes since power restoration (reception of the power restoration designation command) is the second number (here, 100 times). If the number of changes is not the second number, the process proceeds to step E750-16, and if the number of changes is the second number, it determines whether or not to execute the RWM clear negation performance and whether or not to display the activation counter. Specifically, if the RWM clear negation performance has not been executed, it determines to execute the RWM clear negation performance, and if the display of the activation counter has not been executed, it determines to display the activation counter.

The sub-CPU 130a sets an effect execution command corresponding to the result of the determination in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. This causes the effect execution command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the special time-saving effect (the RWM clear negation effect and/or the display of the activation counter).

In step E750-13, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the number of changes since power ON is the second number (here, 100 times). If the number of changes is the second number, the process proceeds to step E750-15. If the number of changes is not the second number, the process proceeds to step E750-14, determining whether a transition has occurred from the normal time-saving play state to presentation mode A (whether all the variable presentations corresponding to the remaining reserved second special symbols have ended). If a transition has occurred from the normal time-saving play state to presentation mode A, the process proceeds to step E750-15. If a transition has not occurred from the normal time-saving play state to presentation mode A, the process proceeds to step E750-16.

In step E750-15, the sub-CPU 130a sets the activation counter display command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. This causes the effect execution command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the special time-saving effect (here, displaying the activation counter).

In step E750-16, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the effect symbol is displayed as stopped (whether the symbol determination command has been received). If the effect symbol is displayed as stopped, the process proceeds to step E750-17, and if the effect symbol is not displayed as stopped, the process for this special time-saving effect ends.

In step E750-17, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the activation counter is currently being displayed. If the activation counter is not being displayed, the current special time-saving performance processing is terminated. If the activation counter is being displayed, in step E750-18, an activation counter subtraction command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. This causes the activation counter subtraction command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to subtract the value of the activation counter. When this processing is completed, the current special time-saving performance processing is terminated.

In this way, during the execution of the variable effect a predetermined number of times from when the power is turned on (a certain number of times before the first special time-saving game state is activated), it is possible to execute an RWM clear negation effect that suggests that the RWM clear (clearing the number of variables) was not executed (left as it is) when the power was turned on. Therefore, it is possible to predict the period until the first special time-saving game state is generated by referring to the number of variables on the previous day, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, multiple execution timings for the RWM clear denial effect are set, and once it is executed at one of the timings, it will not be executed again at any other timing. This increases the player's anticipation as to when the RWM clear denial effect will be executed, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, it is possible to display an activation counter (an activation countdown effect can be executed) that indicates the number of changes until the transition to the first special time-saving game state is made. This allows the player to know when the first special time-saving game state will occur, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game. It is also possible to motivate the player to continue playing, making it possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, the activation counter is not displayed from the time the power is turned on (regardless of whether the RWM is cleared or not) until a predetermined number of variable effects (minimum 50 times, maximum 100 times) have been executed. As a result, it is not possible to determine whether the machine is a fixed machine (without RWM clearing) for a predetermined period of time from the time the power is turned on when the gaming establishment starts its business hours, which makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as a decrease in operation after the gaming establishment starts its business hours. Furthermore, players can play with anticipation as to whether the machine is a fixed machine or not, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the activation counter is not displayed during the time-saving game state. This prevents the player from being distracted by the first special time-saving game state even when the player is in the normal time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, even if the game changes from the time-saving game mode to the normal game mode, the activation counter is not displayed until the game changes to presentation mode A (while the results are being displayed or the shutter is being displayed). This leaves the player with the impression that they have changed from the time-saving game mode to the normal game mode, making it possible to increase the interest in the game. In addition, by displaying the activation counter after the game changes to presentation mode A, the player can start playing with a fresh mind, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the decrement (countdown) of the activation counter is performed when the performance pattern stops, when it is less likely that a jackpot preview or pre-reading effect will be executed (started) than when the fluctuation effect starts, rather than when the fluctuation effect starts, making it easier for the player to recognize the decrement of the activation counter, which makes the game more interesting.

In addition, if the power supply that was stopped during the normal game state after the normal time-saving game state has ended is resumed and the game control state is restored to the state before the power outage occurred, it is possible to execute an RWM clear negation effect (specific effect) related to whether or not the RWM has been cleared thereafter. On the other hand, if the power supply that was stopped during the normal game state after the first special time-saving game state has ended is resumed and the game control state is restored to the state before the power outage occurred, execution of an RWM clear negation effect (specific effect) related to whether or not the RWM has been cleared thereafter is restricted. Therefore, depending on the presence or absence of an RWM clear negation effect, useful information such as the end of the first special time-saving game state and whether or not the RWM has been cleared can be notified to the player, making the game more interesting.

In addition, when the power supply that occurred while the game was controlled to one of the presentation modes (presentation modes A to C, countdown mode, end-only mode) in the normal game state is resumed and the game control state is restored to the state before the power outage occurred, the game is controlled to presentation mode A, which is the initial presentation mode. However, when the game is controlled to a presentation mode other than presentation mode A after the normal time-saving game state has ended (normal game state), if the power supply that was stopped is resumed and the game control state is restored to the state before the power outage occurred and the game is controlled to presentation mode A, it is possible to execute an RWM clear negation presentation (specific presentation) related to whether or not the RWM has been cleared. On the other hand, when the game is controlled to a presentation mode other than presentation mode A after the first special time-saving game state has ended (normal game state), if the power supply that was stopped is resumed and the game control state is restored to the state before the power outage occurred and the game is controlled to presentation mode A, the execution of an RWM clear negation presentation (specific presentation) related to whether or not the RWM has been cleared is restricted. Therefore, depending on whether or not there is an RWM clear negation effect, it is possible to inform the player of useful information such as the end of the first special time-saving game state and whether or not the RWM has been cleared, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, instead of decrementing (counting down) the activation counter when the performance pattern stops, the activation counter may be decremented (counted down) when the variable performance begins. In this case, the activation counter may be decremented by the time the performance pattern 70a starts to vary and completely transitions to high-speed variation (becomes constant speed), or the performance pattern may be made to perform a pre-variation action such as floating up before scrolling (varies) during the variable performance, and the activation counter may be decremented by the time the pre-variation action ends.

In addition, instead of executing an RWM clear negation effect that suggests that an RWM clear (clearing the number of fluctuations) has not been performed (it remains unchanged), a setting change suggestion effect may be executed that suggests that the setting value has been changed (a setting change involving an RWM clear has been performed), or both an RWM clear negation effect and a setting change suggestion effect may be executed by lottery. However, it is advisable to restrict both an RWM clear negation effect and a setting change suggestion effect from being executed in the same fluctuation effect.

(Execution period of time-saving suggestion effect suggesting possibility of being controlled to the first special time-saving game state)
Figure 65 is a diagram showing the execution period of the time-saving suggestion effect, which indicates the possibility (occurrence time) of being controlled into the first special time-saving game state for each variable effect pattern.

The "time-saving suggestion effects" include a game count display showing the number of variations stored in the main RAM 110c, an activation counter display showing a countdown of the number of variations until the transition to the first special time-saving game state, a countdown mode effect, etc.

As shown in Figure 65 (a), when a shortened variation effect is executed in the normal game state, the period during which the shortened variation and the result are displayed (temporary and actual stops of the performance patterns) are the execution period of the time-saving suggestion effect.
As shown in FIG. 65(b), when a normal fluctuation effect is executed in a normal game state, the execution period of the time-saving suggestion effect is during the normal fluctuation (including pseudo fluctuation) and while the result is being displayed.
As shown in Figure 65 (c), when a normal reach fluctuation effect is executed in the normal game state, the execution period of the time-saving suggestion effect is during the normal fluctuation, during the normal reach effect, and while the result is displayed.

As shown in Figure 65 (d), when the first SP reach fluctuation effect is executed in the normal game state, the execution period of the time-saving suggestion effect is during the normal fluctuation, the normal reach effect, the development effect, the first SP reach effect, the eye-catching effect (return effect) and the result display.
As shown in Figure 65 (e), when the second SP reach variation effect is executed in the normal game state, the execution periods of the time-saving suggestion effect are during the normal variation, the normal reach effect, the development effect and the result display, and the non-execution periods of the time-saving suggestion effect are during the second SP reach effect and the eye-catch effect.

As shown in Figure 65 (f), when a normal → SPSP reach change effect is executed in the normal game state, the execution periods of the time-saving suggestion effect are during the normal change, during the normal reach effect, during the development effect and while the result is displayed, and the non-execution periods of the time-saving suggestion effect are during the SPSP reach effect and the eye-catch effect.
As shown in Figure 65 (g), when an SP → SPSP reach change effect is executed in the normal game state, the execution periods of the time-saving suggestion effect are during the normal change, during the normal reach effect, during the development effect and while the result is displayed, and the non-execution periods of the time-saving suggestion effect are during the SP reach effect, during the development effect, during the SPSP reach effect and during the eye-catch effect.

As shown in FIG. 65 (h), when a full rotation reach variation effect is executed in the normal game state, the execution periods of the time-saving suggestion effect are during the normal variation, the normal reach effect, the development effect, and the result display, and the non-execution periods of the time-saving suggestion effect are during the full rotation reach effect and the eye-catching effect (return effect).

As shown in FIG. 65(i), when a variable effect is executed in a time-saving play state (normal time-saving play state, first special time-saving play state, second special time-saving play state), regardless of the type of variable effect executed, the non-execution period of the time-saving suggestion effect is during the effect before the result is displayed and during the result is displayed.

The probability of winning in each variation pattern is set to increase in the following order: Shortened variation = Normal variation < Normal reach variation < 1st SP reach variation < 2nd SP reach variation < Normal → SPSP reach variation < SP → SPSP reach variation < Full rotation reach variation (guaranteed jackpot).

In addition, the hold icon is hidden during the SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, and full rotation reach performance, and the icon is hidden during the SPSP reach performance and full rotation reach performance.

In this way, it is possible to execute a time-saving suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the first special time-saving game state while the variable effect is being executed. This allows the player to play while expecting that the first special time-saving game state may occur, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game and also to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, for certain fluctuation effects that result in losses (shortened fluctuation effects, normal fluctuation effects, normal reach fluctuation effects, first SP reach fluctuation effects, etc.), there are periods during which the time-saving suggestion effects are executed, but there are no periods during which the time-saving suggestion effects are not executed, whereas for certain fluctuation effects that result in jackpots (second SP reach fluctuation effects, normal → SPSP reach fluctuation effects, SP → SPSP reach fluctuation effects, full rotation reach fluctuation effects, etc.), there are periods during which the time-saving suggestion effects are executed and periods during which the time-saving suggestion effects are not executed. Therefore, depending on the type of fluctuation effect, it is possible to make the player more aware of the occurrence of the first special time-saving game state than of a jackpot game, or to make the player more aware of the execution of a jackpot game than of the first special time-saving game state, which makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in a variable performance in which a normal reach performance is executed, there is a period during which the time-saving suggestion performance is executed, but there is no period during which the time-saving suggestion performance is not executed, whereas in a variable performance in which an SP reach performance or higher, which has a higher chance of winning than a normal reach performance, is executed, there is a period during which the time-saving suggestion performance is executed and a period during which the time-saving suggestion performance is not executed. Therefore, depending on the type of variable performance in which a reach performance is executed, it is possible to make the player more aware of the occurrence of the first special time-saving game state than of a jackpot game, or to make the player more aware of the execution of a jackpot game than of the first special time-saving game state, thereby making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, during the execution of a specific effect (such as the first SP reach effect) that anticipates the execution of a jackpot game in the variable effect, the reserved icon is hidden, but the time-saving suggestion effect can continue to be executed. This makes it easier for the player to concentrate on the specific effect, while at the same time making it possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction even if the execution of the specific effect results in a miss, by making the player think that they are getting closer to the occurrence of the first special time-saving game state, and thus making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the variable presentation in which a specific presentation (second SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation, full rotation reach presentation, etc.) that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be played during the normal game state is executed, there is a period during which the time-saving suggestion presentation is executed and a period during which the time-saving suggestion presentation is not executed, while in the variable presentation in which a specific presentation (second SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation, full rotation reach presentation, etc.) that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be played during the normal game state is executed, there is no period during which the time-saving suggestion presentation is executed, but there is a period during which the time-saving suggestion presentation is not executed. Therefore, in the normal game state in which the first special time-saving game state may occur, the player can be made aware that the first special time-saving game state may occur, and in the normal time-saving game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, the player can be made aware of the advantageous state of the normal time-saving game state and not be made aware of the first special time-saving game state, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the period during which a specific effect (such as a second SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, or full rotation reach effect) that gives the player hope of hitting a jackpot during the variable effect is a non-execution period for the time-saving suggestion effect, and the period during which the result is displayed thereafter is the execution period for the time-saving suggestion effect. Therefore, even if the execution of a specific effect results in a miss, the player can be made to think that they are getting closer to hitting the first special time-saving game state, reducing the player's dissatisfaction and making the game more enjoyable.

Note that the reserve icon remains displayed during the development effect (the development effect before the SP reach effect) that anticipates the execution of a jackpot game, but it may be possible to hide the reserve icon during the execution period of the time-saving suggestion effect.

The period during which the second SP reach effect, which gives the expectation of a jackpot game, is executed is the non-execution period of the time-saving suggestion effect, but the period during which the second SP reach effect is executed may be the execution period of the time-saving suggestion effect in which the reserved icon is not displayed, or the period during which the SPSP reach effect, which gives the expectation of a jackpot game, is executed may be the execution period of the time-saving suggestion effect in which the reserved icon and the icon are not displayed.

In addition, the result display period following the non-execution period of the time-saving suggestion effect in the variable effect is the execution period of the time-saving suggestion effect, but it may be set to be the execution period of the time-saving suggestion effect in the case of a miss, and the non-execution period of the time-saving suggestion effect in the case of a jackpot.

(Example of a performance when a pre-reading performance is executed during normal game play)
An example of a performance when a look-ahead performance is executed during a normal game state will be described with reference to Fig. 66. In this example, it is assumed that an icon change performance and a look-ahead zone performance are executed.

As shown in FIG. 66(a), when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during the variable display (execution of the variable performance) of the first special symbol, which is a losing symbol, and the first reserved number increases from "1" to "2", the number in the first reserved number display area 70E increases from "1" to "2", and a white icon (reserved icon HI) that is the subject of a foresight performance (icon change performance, pre-reading zone performance) is additionally displayed in the second display section 70B2 of the first reserved icon display area 70B. In addition, the game count GK, which is the number of variable displays (variable performance) executed after the power is turned on or after the end of a jackpot game and is one type of time-saving suggestion performance described above, is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the first image display device 70.

Next, when the change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 66(b), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed stopped at a losing number ("814"), and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. In addition, the number of games GK is incremented by 1.

After that, when the stop time has elapsed and the changing display (changing performance) of the first special pattern, which is a losing combination, begins, the changing display of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ begins, the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI, as shown in FIG. 66(c).

At this time, the icon change effect starts, and the pending icon shifted and displayed on the first display unit 70B1 changes to a blue icon (special icon). In addition, the look-ahead zone effect starts, and the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, and the blue zone image ZG is displayed.

Next, after the change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 66(d), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol are stopped and displayed with a losing result ("531"), and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. In addition, the number of games GK is incremented by 1.

After that, when the stop time has elapsed and the variable display (variable performance) of the first special pattern, which indicates a jackpot, begins, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ begins, the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one reserved icon HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts toward the icon display area 70C and is displayed as the icon TI, changing into a red icon (special icon), as shown in FIG. 66(e).

After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the left and right performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in a reach-forming state as shown in FIG. 66(f), and a normal reach performance is executed. Furthermore, when a predetermined time has passed, an advanced performance is executed, and as shown in FIG. 66(g), a second SP reach performance is started in which friendly character C2 and enemy character C3 battle, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are hidden (erased), and the look-ahead zone performance is interrupted.

Then, when the final stage of the second SP reach performance (the timing for executing the decisive performance to determine whether it is a miss or not) is reached, the decisive success performance starts and the ally character C2 launches a final attack on the enemy character C3. After that, as shown in FIG. 66(h), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the performance position, and the audio output device 9 outputs a "cuincuin" notification sound (in this case, announcing a jackpot).

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the presentation position to the standby position and the successful decision presentation ends, as shown in FIG. 66(i), the presentation pattern 70a temporarily stops at the special result ("555") that is common to the small win and the big win, the look-ahead zone presentation resumes, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed. The number of games GK is also redisplayed.

After that, when the temporary stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 66(j), the performance pattern 70a stops and displays a special number ("555") that is common to both small wins and big wins, and the special pattern TZ stops and displays a big win number ("555") that does not include the "V" that indicates a small win. In addition, as the look-ahead zone performance ends, the icon TI is erased and the icon change performance ends. In addition, the number of games GK is incremented by 1.

On the other hand, in the case of a changing display of the first special symbol, which is a miss, when the final stage of the second SP reach effect (the timing for executing the deciding effect to see if it is a miss or not) is reached, a decision failure effect is started and an effect is performed in which the ally character C2 loses to the enemy character C3. After that, a screen with the text "Defeat" is displayed to notify the player of a miss and the decision failure effect ends, at which point the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed stopped at the reach miss result (for example, "565"). Also, the number of games GK is incremented by 1.

In this way, when a jackpot occurs during normal gameplay, it is possible to execute look-ahead effects (icon change effects, look-ahead zone effects, etc.). This effectively heightens the player's sense of anticipation when a jackpot game is executed, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

(Example of when the pre-reading effect ends midway during normal play)
67 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when the look-ahead performance ends midway during a normal game state. Here, it is assumed that the icon change performance and the look-ahead zone performance are executed as a result of the look-ahead determination based on the winning of the first starting hole 45.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), when the variable display (variable performance) of the first special pattern starts, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ starts, the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI.

At this time, the icon change effect starts, and the pending icon shifted and displayed on the first display unit 70B1 changes to a blue icon (special icon). In addition, the look-ahead zone effect starts, and the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, and the blue zone image ZG is displayed.

Next, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 47, the number in the second reserved number display area 70F increases from "0" to "1", and after the change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 67(b), the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern stop and display a losing number ("531"), and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. Also, the number of games GK is incremented by 1.

After that, when the stop time has elapsed and the variable display (variation performance) of the second special symbol, which is a losing combination, begins, as shown in FIG. 67(c), the look-ahead zone performance ends midway and the background image reverts to the normal background image, and the icon change performance ends midway and the blue icon reverts to the normal icon. Also, the variable display of performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ begins, and the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "1" to "0". Note that since the variable display (variation performance) of the second special symbol has begun during normal play, the icon is not displayed.

Next, after the change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 67(d), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol stop displaying the losing number ("632"), and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. Also, in this case, the change display of the second special symbol has ended, not the change display of the first special symbol, but the number of games GK is incremented by one.

Then, when the stop time has elapsed and the variable display (variable performance) of the first special pattern, which is the jackpot, begins, as shown in FIG. 67(e), the variable display of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ begins, the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one reserved icon HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts toward the icon display area 70C and is displayed as the icon TI.

After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the left and right performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in a reach-forming state, as shown in FIG. 67(f), and a normal reach performance is executed. Furthermore, when a predetermined time has passed, an advanced performance is executed, and as shown in FIG. 66(g), a second SP reach performance is started in which friendly character C2 and enemy character C3 battle, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are hidden (erased).

Furthermore, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the left and right performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in a reach-forming state, as shown in FIG. 67(f), and a normal reach performance is executed. Furthermore, after a predetermined time has elapsed, an advanced performance is executed, and as shown in FIG. 67(g), a second SP reach performance is started in which friendly character C2 and enemy character C3 battle, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are hidden (erased).

Then, when the final stage of the second SP reach effect (the timing for executing the decisive effect to determine whether it is a miss or not) is reached, the decisive success effect starts and an effect is performed in which the ally character C2 launches a final attack on the enemy character C3. After that, as shown in FIG. 67(h), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the effect position, and the audio output device 9 outputs a "queen, queen" notification sound (in this case, announcing that a jackpot has been reached).

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the presentation position to the standby position and the successful decision presentation ends, as shown in FIG. 67(i), the presentation pattern 70a temporarily stops at the special result ("555") common to the small win and big win, the look-ahead zone presentation resumes, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed. The number of games GK is also redisplayed.

After that, when the temporary stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 67(j), the performance pattern 70a stops at a special number ("555") that is common to both small wins and big wins, and the special pattern TZ stops at a big win number ("555") that does not include the "V" that indicates a small win. In addition, as the look-ahead zone performance ends, the icon TI is erased and the icon change performance ends. In addition, the number of games GK is incremented by 1.

On the other hand, in the case of a changing display of the first special symbol, which is a miss, when the final stage of the second SP reach effect (the timing for executing the deciding effect to see if it is a miss or not) is reached, a decision failure effect is started and an effect is performed in which the ally character C2 loses to the enemy character C3. After that, a screen with the text "Defeat" is displayed to notify the player of a miss and the decision failure effect ends, at which point the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed stopped at the reach miss result (for example, "565"). Also, the number of games GK is incremented by 1.

In this way, when a game ball enters the second start hole 47 during normal game play while a look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect, etc.) that anticipates the execution of a jackpot game across one or more variable effects that began based on a winning entry into the first start hole 45 is being executed and the variable display of the second special symbol begins, the look-ahead effect is terminated midway. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of not knowing which variable display the look-ahead effect is predicting, making the game more interesting.

In addition, when the variable display of the second special pattern starts during the execution of the look-ahead performance that started based on winning at the first starting port 45, the look-ahead performance may be terminated midway when a winning is made at the second starting port 47, or the look-ahead performance may be terminated midway when the variable display of the first special pattern that was being executed at the time of the winning at the second starting port 47 has elapsed and the first special pattern has stopped being displayed, or the look-ahead performance may be terminated when the stop time of the first special pattern has elapsed.

(Example of a change effect that occurs after switching to battle mode)
Using Figure 68, we will explain an example of a presentation when a variable presentation is executed after transitioning to the battle mode.

When the ending of the third jackpot game starts, as shown in FIG. 68(a), a normal time-saving entry effect is executed to indicate that the game will enter the normal time-saving game state, and a warning notification is issued to draw the player's attention. Specifically, a forget-to-remove warning image TG is displayed from the lending device that communicates with the gaming machine 1 to lend game balls, warning the player not to forget to remove the card (storage medium) that can identify the remaining value.

After that, when the display period of the forget-to-recover image has elapsed, an addiction warning image NG is displayed to warn against excessive addiction to the game, as shown in FIG. 68(b). Then, when the ending time of the third jackpot game has elapsed, the second time-saving number of times (J2) is set to 7 times, the first reserved number (U1) is "2" and the second reserved number (U2) is "0", and the normal time-saving game state begins, and the entry battle mode background image, the first right-hit image MG1 that prompts the player to shoot the game ball to the right of the game area 5a, and the time-saving remaining number image KG that indicates the remaining number of times of the second time-saving number (J2) are displayed as "7 times remaining."

In addition, during the time-saving game mode, the game count GK, which is the number of variable displays (variable effects) that have been executed since the power was turned on or the end of the big win game, the first time-saving number of times (J1), the third time-saving number of times (J3), and the remaining number of small wins (Z) are not displayed, but the presentation image according to the presentation mode (here, the background image according to the battle mode and the image related to the variable effects) indicates that the remaining number of small wins (Z) is "1".

When the first special symbol starts to change (changing performance), as shown in FIG. 68(c), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start to change, the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the icon is instantly displayed in the icon display area 70C. However, because the first special symbol is changing (changing performance), the remaining time-saving number image KG, which indicates the remaining number of times of the second time-saving number (J2), maintains the "7 times remaining" state, and the battle reach performance is not executed.

At this time, when three game balls enter the second starting hole 47 and the second reserved number increases from "0" to "3", the number in the second reserved number display area 70F increases from "0" to "3", and three white icons (reserved icons HI) are additionally displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D, as shown in FIG. 68(d).

When the variation time has elapsed and the first special symbol stops and displays as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. 68(e), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop and display as a losing number ("513"). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the variable display (variable performance) of the second special symbol starts, as shown in FIG. 68(f), the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ start, the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "3" to "2", and the three reserved icons HI displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D shift toward the icon display area 70C, with one being displayed as the icon TI. Also, the time-saving remaining number image KG changes from "7 times remaining" to "6 times".

After a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 68(g), the left and right performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in a reach-forming state, and a normal reach performance is executed. After a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 68(h), an entry battle reach performance begins in which friendly character C2 and enemy character C3 battle, and the second pending icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are hidden (erased). At this time, a text image saying "First Battle" is displayed, indicating the number of times the entry battle reach performance has been executed.

At this time, two game balls enter the second starting hole 47, and the second reserved number increases from "2" to "4", but because the second reserved icon display area 70D is not displayed (erased), no additional reserved icons are displayed.

After that, when the final stage of the battle reach performance (the execution timing of the deciding performance to determine whether it is a miss or not) is reached, a failure to decide performance starts and an performance is performed in which friendly character C2 loses to enemy character C3, and then, as shown in FIG. 68(i), a screen with the text "Defeat" is displayed to inform the user that it has been a miss.

After that, when the variation time has passed and the second special symbol stops and displays as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. 68(j), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop and display as a losing number ("565"). In addition, the second reserved icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, each time the display of the second special symbol changes (changing effect) begins, the effects shown in Figures 68(f) to 68(j) are repeated, and with each repetition, the remaining time-saving count image KG is decremented, and the numbers in the text image indicating the number of times the battle reach effect has been executed are updated (2nd battle → 3rd battle → 4th battle, etc.).

In this way, when the normal time-saving game state is triggered, the normal time-saving entry effect is executed during the ending of the big win game. This makes it possible to inform the player that the normal time-saving game state is occurring, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state is triggered, a right-hit notification is made before the normal time-saving game state is triggered (during a jackpot). This prevents the player from suffering a disadvantage by hitting left when the normal time-saving game state is triggered, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, when a normal time-saving game state is generated, a presentation mode (here, a battle mode) corresponding to the time-saving state is set when the ending of the big win game ends, regardless of whether there is a reserved memory or not, and a background image corresponding to that presentation mode is displayed. This makes it possible to inform the player that a normal time-saving game state has occurred, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state is generated, the normal time-saving entry effect is executed with the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ hidden. This allows the player to play through the time-saving state with a fresh feeling without worrying about the results of the previous variable effect, making the game more interesting.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state is triggered, warning effects are displayed to alert the player (display of a forget-to-recover warning image TG, display of an addiction warning image NG) before effects corresponding to the time-saving state are performed (change of background image, display of remaining time-saving number image KG, right-hit notification, variable effects corresponding to the time-saving state, output of background music corresponding to entering battle mode, etc.). This makes it possible to effectively alert the player.

In addition, at the start of the normal time-saving game mode, even if there is no reserved memory and the game is waiting for customers, background music corresponding to the time-saving game mode is audibly output, but is muted (audible output is stopped) after a specified period of time has passed. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of an immediate and drastic decrease in the presentation effect even when there is no reserved memory and the game is waiting for customers, making the game more interesting.

If the machine is in a customer waiting state at the start of the normal time-saving game state transitioned from the jackpot game, the background music corresponding to the presentation mode of the normal time-saving game state may be muted without being audibly output. In this case, when a game ball enters the start hole from the customer waiting state, a reserved memory is generated and a variable presentation is started, and the background music corresponding to the presentation mode of the normal time-saving game state may be audibly output.

In addition, the warning effect is performed during the ending of the jackpot game, but it may be performed from the ending of the jackpot game until the normal time-saving game state, or it may be performed immediately after the start of the normal time-saving state (during the first variable effect), or the warning effect may be displayed in sequence, with the forgotten item warning image TG and the getting-sunk warning image NG displayed (either may be displayed first).

In addition, in the first special symbol variation display that is executed when there is no second reserved memory but there is a first reserved memory at the start of the normal time-saving game state, the variation display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is performed, but it is also possible to only display the variation display of the special symbol TZ without displaying the variation display of the performance symbol 70a. In this way, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort caused by the second time-saving count (J2) not being subtracted, and to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the first special pattern variation display that is executed when there is no second reserved memory but there is a first reserved memory at the start of the normal time-saving game state, if the variation display of the performance pattern 70a is not executed and only the variation display of the special pattern TZ is executed, the variation display may be executed with a relatively short variation time (for example, shortened variation or ultra-shortened variation) if it is a miss, and a special presentation may be executed with a longer variation time than in the case of a miss.

In addition, while a right-hit notification is not given during the time-saving entry performance, the first right-hit image MG1 may be displayed so that a right-hit notification is always given from the jackpot play to the normal time-saving play state.

(Example of the final variation in the battle mode that results in a jackpot)
Using Figure 69, an example of a presentation in which a big win occurs in the final variable presentation of the battle mode will be described.

As shown in FIG. 69(a), when the time for changing the display (changing effect) of the second special symbol before the final one in the entering battle mode has elapsed and the second special symbol stops and displays as a losing special symbol, the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ stop and display as a losing number ("676") as shown in FIG. 69(a). In addition, the second reserved icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and the icon TI that was displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the changing display (changing performance) of the second special pattern, which is the final round of the entry battle mode, begins, the changing display of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ begins, the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "2" to "1", and the two reserved icons HI displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D shift toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI, as shown in FIG. 69(b).

Also, as this is the final change in the time-saving feature, the remaining time-saving number image KG changes from "1 remaining" to "Last," and a storage promotion image SG is displayed to encourage the player to save the second reserved memory (increase the second reserved number) by hitting the right button. This storage promotion image SG is displayed so as not to interfere with the visibility of the changing display of the performance pattern 70a as much as possible, and a count image (here, "09:99") that is shorter than the time until the reach performance begins is displayed, and a countdown is displayed as time passes.

After that, when one game ball enters the second starting hole 47, as shown in FIG. 69(c), the number in the second reserved number display area 70F increases from "1" to "2", and a white icon (reserved icon HI) is additionally displayed in the second display section 70D2 of the second reserved icon display area 70D. At this time, the pre-read result of the stored second reserved memory (special chart determination information) is a jackpot, so the winning time light-up effect is started, the top lamp 10b lights up yellow, and the sound output device 9 outputs the sound effect "beep♪".

When two game balls enter the second starting hole 47, as shown in FIG. 69(d), the number in the second reserved number display area 70F increases from "2" to "4", and a white icon (reserved icon HI) is additionally displayed in the third display section 70D3 and the fourth display section 70D4 of the second reserved icon display area 70D. In addition, the text "Save by hitting to the right" in the second reserve promotion image SG2 changes to "MAX!!", indicating that the upper limit ("4") of the second reserved number (U2) has been reached. After that, when a predetermined time has passed, as shown in FIG. 69(e), the count image in the reserve promotion image SG becomes "00:00", the countdown ends, and then the reserve promotion image SG is erased.

After a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 69(f), the left and right performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in a reach-forming state, and a normal reach performance is executed. After a predetermined time has elapsed, an advanced performance is executed, and as shown in FIG. 69(g), a final battle reach performance is started in which friendly character C2 and enemy character C3 engage in a final battle, and the second reserved icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are hidden (erased). At this time, a text image saying "Final Battle" is displayed, indicating the number of times the battle reach performance has been executed.

After that, when the final stage of the special SP reach performance (the timing for executing the decisive performance to see if it is a miss or not) is reached, the decisive success performance starts and the ally character C2 launches a final attack on the enemy character C3. Then, as shown in FIG. 69(h), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the performance position, and a "cuuuuuuu" notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 to notify the player that the final attack has hit the enemy character.

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the presentation position to the standby position and the successful decision presentation ends, as shown in FIG. 69(i), the word "WIN" is displayed to notify a jackpot (or a small jackpot). Then, when the variable time has elapsed and the second special symbol stops to display the jackpot special symbol, as shown in FIG. 69(j), the presentation symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop to display the jackpot result ("555"). Additionally, the second pending icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, in the final variable presentation during the normal time-saving play state, a storage promotion presentation (display of a storage promotion image SG, countdown display) is executed to encourage the player to store the second reserved memory (increase the second reserved number) by hitting the right. This makes it possible to ensure that the second reserved memory is stored before the time-saving play state ends, making it possible to prevent the player from suffering losses.

In addition, in the accumulation promotion performance, a countdown display is performed, which strongly reminds the player to accumulate second reserved memory by hitting to the right (increasing the second reserved number), making it possible to prevent the player from suffering losses.

In addition, when the second reserved number (U2) reaches the upper limit in the storage promotion performance, the text "Save by hitting to the right" changes to a display mode ("MAX!!") indicating that the second reserved number (U2) has reached the upper limit. This makes it possible to prevent the player from firing game balls unnecessarily, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the battle mode, which is the normal time-saving play state, when the final second special symbol that ends the normal time-saving play state is displayed, the final battle reach effect is always executed. Therefore, even if the normal time-saving play state ends with a miss, the player can be sufficiently entertained, and the excitement of the game can be increased.

In addition, during a time-saving game state in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 47, if the pre-read result of the second reserved memory (special chart determination information) based on the entry into the second starting hole 47 is a small win, it is possible to execute a winning light-up effect (pre-read effect) targeting the reserved memory that will be a small win. Therefore, it is possible to build up the player's anticipation as to whether or not a small win game that has the potential to lead to a big win game will be executed in a specific game state, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, while a countdown display is executed in the accumulation promotion performance, a display performance may be executed in which a gauge image is displayed for a period shorter than the time until the reach performance starts, and the length of the gauge is shortened as time passes. Also, a light-emitting performance may be executed in which a specific light-emitting means is turned on for a period shorter than the time until the reach performance starts, and the light-emitting color is changed as time passes (for example, blue light → yellow light → red light).

(Example of a performance when the normal time-limited play state in which the battle mode is activated ends)
Using Figure 70, we will explain an example of the presentation when the number of time-saving times (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and the normal time-saving game state in which the battle mode has been entered ends.

Here, a losing variation display of the second special symbol, which is the final variation of the time-saving feature, is started, and a continuous battle performance is executed in which a battle takes place over multiple variation displays, and as shown in Figure 70 (a), a losing final battle reach performance, which is the last of the continuous battle performances, is executed.

After that, when the final battle reach performance reaches its final stage (the timing for executing the performance to determine whether it is a miss or not), a performance of failure to make a miss starts and an performance is performed in which friendly character C2 loses to enemy character C3, and then, as shown in FIG. 70(b), a screen with the text "Defeat" is displayed to inform the user that it has been a miss.

Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the failure decision effect ends, the icon and the reserved icon are redisplayed, and the effect pattern 70a and special pattern TZ are displayed in a state where they are temporarily stopped at the reach miss result ("565"). After that, as shown in FIG. 70(c), the effect pattern 70a and special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state at the reach miss result ("565"), and the time-saving game state ends with four second reserved memories remaining, and the game transitions to the normal game state. The icon is also erased, and the first right-hit image MG1 is erased.

After that, when the pause time has elapsed and the first display of the second special symbol (miss display) based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state begins, the display of the special symbol TZ starts to change, and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3", as shown in FIG. 70(d). At this time, a display of a blocking image SYG that blocks the display pattern 70a, reserved icon, background image, etc., frames in and then out, and a left hit notification (display of a left hit image HG and audio output of "left hit") is made in the upper left of the screen to encourage the player to shoot the game ball to the left of the game area 5a.

In addition, during the period of occlusion by the occlusion image SYG, a mode A background image corresponding to the presentation mode A, a presentation pattern 70a in a display mode according to the presentation mode A, the first reserved icon in the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the number of games played GK (here, "7 times") are displayed behind the occlusion image, and the second reserved icon in the second reserved icon display area 70D is erased.

Then, when the shielding image SYG frames out, as shown in FIG. 70(e), the mode A background image corresponding to the presentation mode A, the presentation pattern 70a that has started to change, the first reserved icon in the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the number of games played GK become visible. Note that since the second special pattern is being changed, the icon is not displayed.

Furthermore, after a predetermined period of time has passed, the left hit notification ends and the effect pattern 70a begins to fluctuate at high speed, as shown in FIG. 70(f). After the fluctuating time has passed, the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ stop and display a losing number ("814"), as shown in FIG. 70(g), and the number of games GK is incremented by one.

After that, the effects shown in Figures 70(e) to 70(g) are repeated each time the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol starts until the remaining reserved number (second reserved memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state becomes "0", and the number of games GK is incremented by 1 each time it is repeated.

Then, when the remaining reserved number (second reserved memory) of the second special symbol becomes "0" during the transition to the normal game mode, the display of the variable display of the second special symbol (miss variable display) starts, and when the time for the variable display has elapsed, the display pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ stop at the missing number ("729") as shown in FIG. 70(h), and the number of games GK is incremented by one.

After that, when the variable display (variable performance) of the first special pattern starts, as shown in FIG. 70(i), the variable display of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ starts, the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one reserved icon HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts toward the icon display area 70C and is displayed as the icon TI.

In this way, when the normal time-saving play state in which the battle mode is entered ends and a transition to the normal play state occurs, an end suggestion image (a result display or shutter image, described below) that indicates that the normal time-saving play state is ending is not displayed. This reduces the impression that the time-saving play state has been entered, preventing the player from feeling that they have lost out, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the normal time-saving play state in which the battle mode is entered ends and transitions to the normal play state, a left hit notification (display of the left hit image HG and audio output of "left hit") is executed at timing 1 before the elapse of the execution period of the variable display based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special pattern at the time of transition to the normal play state. Therefore, by guiding the player to play immediately, it is possible to prevent the game from ending, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

(Example of the effect when the normal time-saving game state in which the Ranbu mode is set ends)
Using Figure 71, an example of the presentation will be described when the number of time-saving times (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and the normal time-saving game state in which the Ranbu mode is set ends.

Here, as shown in FIG. 71(a), a missing variation display of the second special symbol, which is the final variation of the time-saving feature in the Ranbu mode, has begun, and a series of effects are performed that make it appear as if one variation effect is being executed across multiple variation displays.

When a predetermined period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 71(b), a shutter image is displayed that closes, indicating the end of the time-saving game state, and the Ranbu mode background image, the performance pattern 70a, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the second hold icon HI displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D gradually become invisible.

Then, when the shutter image closes completely, as shown in FIG. 71(c), a result display is performed that shows the results of the game during the series of advantageous periods during which the time-saving game state continues, triggered by the jackpot game. Specifically, a text image of "1 win" indicating the number of jackpot games and "450 pt" indicating the number of prize balls paid out is displayed. In addition, when the variable time has elapsed, the special symbol TZ is displayed as a missing number ("165") while the performance symbol 70a is not displayed, and the normal time-saving game state ends and transitions to the normal game state.

After that, the stop time (8 seconds) at the end of the time-saving game state, which is longer than the normal stop time (0.5 seconds), has elapsed, and the first display of the second special pattern (missing change presentation corresponding to the super-shortened change after the result) based on the remaining reserved second special pattern (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state begins, and as shown in Figure 71 (d), the display of the special pattern TZ begins to change while the result display continues, and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3".

After the change time has elapsed, the special symbol TZ stops and displays a losing number ("749") as shown in FIG. 71(e). The number of games played GK remains hidden during the period in which the result is displayed after the transition from the time-saving game state to the normal game state, and even if a change effect is executed, the number of games played is only added internally, and cannot be grasped visually. In addition, during the period in which a change effect is executed based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of the transition to the normal game state during the result display, the execution of the jackpot notice effect and the look-ahead effect (the look-ahead effect based on the winning entry into the first starting hole 45) executed in the normal game state is restricted.

Then, after the normal stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed and the second display of the second special symbol (missing display of the second special symbol corresponding to the ultra-shortened display after the result) based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state is started, as shown in FIG. 71(f), the display of the special symbol TZ starts to change while the result display continues, and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "3" to "2". Then, after the change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 71(g), the special symbol TZ stops and displays a missing number ("349").

Furthermore, when the normal stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed and the third display of the second special symbol (missing display of the second special symbol corresponding to the super-shortened display after the result) based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state is started, the display of the special symbol TZ's change starts while the result display continues, and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "2" to "1". Then, when the change time has elapsed, the special symbol TZ stops and displays a missing number.

After that, the normal stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed and the fourth (last) second special symbol change display (miss change effect corresponding to ultra-shortened change after result) based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to normal game mode begins, and the special symbol TZ change display begins while the result display continues, and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "1" to "0". Then, after the change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 71(h), the special symbol TZ stops and displays a missing number ("749"), and after the normal stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the result display ends and the above-mentioned series of effects ends, and after that, the mode transitions to the dedicated mode.

After that, when the variable display (variable performance) of the first special symbol starts, as shown in FIG. 71(i), the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ starts, the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one reserved icon HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts toward the icon display area 70C and is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, a left hit notification (display of left hit image HG and audio output of "left hit") is executed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area 5a. Also, the number of games GK is redisplayed after the increment (here, 95 times).

Here, an example is shown in which the remaining reserved number of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state is "4". However, if the remaining reserved number of the second special symbol is "3", the result display ends and the left hit notification starts when the second special symbol changes one time less, if the remaining reserved number of the second special symbol is "2", the result display ends and the left hit notification starts when the second special symbol changes two times less, if the remaining reserved number of the second special symbol is "1", the result display ends and the left hit notification starts when the second special symbol changes three times less, and if the remaining reserved number of the second special symbol is "0", the result display ends and the left hit notification starts when the second special symbol changes four times less. In other words, if the machine is in a customer waiting state when transitioning to the normal game state, the result display ends and the left hit notification is executed when the stop time has elapsed and the machine is in a customer waiting state.

In addition, while an example has been shown here in which the number of time-saving play counts becomes "0" in the Ranbu mode and the normal time-saving play state ends, even if the normal time-saving play state ends when the presentation mode is the Super Ranbu mode or the Infinite mode, the game will basically proceed as shown in Figures 71(a) to 71(i).

In this way, a series of effects is executed that makes it look as if one change effect is being executed from the change display of the second special symbol, which is the final change of the time-saving mode, to the change display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserved number of the second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game mode. Therefore, the player can experience a novel effect that does not make them strongly aware of the remaining reserved number of the second special symbol, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, during the display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserved second special symbol in the series of effects, the display of the special symbol TZ is the only one that is changed, without displaying the change of the performance symbol 70a. This makes it easier to recognize multiple change performances as a series of effects, and improves the effect of the series of effects.

In addition, by displaying the result (displaying the end suggestion screen) from the display of the second special symbol change, which is the final change in the time-saving mode, to the display of the second special symbol change based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game mode, it becomes easier to recognize the multiple change effects as a series of effects, making it possible to improve the presentation effect of the series of effects.

In addition, the pause time for the final special symbol change display (result change presentation) in the normal time-saving game state is set to a longer pause time (8 seconds) than the pause time (0.5 seconds) when the normal change display is executed, and the result display (display of the end suggestion screen) is executed during the pause time. Therefore, even if there is no remaining reservation (second reservation memory) for the second special symbol when transitioning to the normal game state, the execution time of the result display does not become extremely short, so the result display can be fully shown to the player, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the pause time (8 seconds) during the final special symbol change display (result change display) in the normal time-saving game state is shorter than the change time (0.5 seconds) for the change display based on the remaining reserve of the second special symbol when transitioning to the normal game state during the result display (display of the end suggestion screen). This prevents the result display from becoming too drawn out, which reduces the presentation effect, making the game more interesting.

In addition, the pause time (0.5 seconds) for the change display based on the remaining reserve of the second special symbol when transitioning to the normal game state during the result display (display of the end suggestion screen) after the end of the normal time-saving game state is shorter than the pause time (8 seconds) for the change display (result change presentation) of the special symbol for the final time in the normal time-saving game state. This makes it possible to prevent the result display (display of the end suggestion screen) from becoming extremely drawn out, thereby reducing the presentation effect, and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, the execution time (fluctuation time + stop time = 1 second) of the variable display based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special pattern at the time of transition to the normal game state, which is executed during the result display after the end of the normal time-saving game state, is shorter than the execution time of the specified variable presentation (all variable presentation including super-shortened variation) executed during the normal time-saving game state. This makes it possible to prevent the result display (display of the end suggestion screen) from becoming extremely drawn out, thereby reducing the presentation effect, and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state or the second special time-saving game state in which the battle mode is set ends, it is possible to start a left hit notification (display of the left hit image HG and audio output of "left hit") before the execution period of the variable display based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state has elapsed, while when the normal time-saving game state in which a presentation mode other than the battle mode is set (Ranbu mode, Super Ranbu mode, Infinite mode) ends, it is possible to start a left hit notification after the execution period of the variable display based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state has elapsed (after the end of the result display). Therefore, when the normal time-saving game state in which a presentation mode other than the battle mode is set (Ranbu mode, Super Ranbu mode, Infinite mode) ends, it is possible to prevent the player from firing unnecessary game balls, which makes the game more interesting.

In addition, the left hit notification that is executed after the normal time-saving play state or the second special time-saving play state in which the battle mode is started ends, and the left hit notification that is executed after the normal time-saving play state in which a presentation mode other than the battle mode is started (Ranbu mode, Super Ranbu mode, Infinite mode) ends are executed in the same notification mode (notification content, notification time, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the control efficiency when executing the left hit notification, and to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state or the second special time-saving game state in which the battle mode is set ends, it is possible to start a left hit notification (display of the left hit image HG and output of the voice "left hit") at one timing (when the normal time-saving game state ends), while when the normal time-saving game state in which a presentation mode other than the battle mode is set (Ranbu mode, Super Ranbu mode, Infinite mode) ends, it is possible to start a left hit notification at one of multiple timings (timings according to the remaining number of reserved second special symbols at the time of transition to the normal game state). Therefore, since the start timing of the left hit notification changes depending on the type of presentation mode set in the normal time-saving game state, it is possible to change the playability and increase the interest of the game.

In addition, from the time the normal time-saving game state, in which a performance mode other than the battle mode (Ranbu mode, Super Ranbu mode, Infinite mode) is set, ends until the left-hand hit notification starts (until the result display ends), the execution of the jackpot prediction performance and pre-reading performance (to the first starting hole 45) that are executed in the normal game state is restricted. This allows the player to bask in the afterglow of the end of the normal game state, making the game more interesting.

In addition, from the end of the normal time-saving game state, in which a presentation mode other than the battle mode (Ranbu mode, Super Ranbu mode, Infinite mode) is set, until the left-hand hit notification starts (until the result display ends), control is restricted to a presentation mode corresponding to the normal game state (including presentation modes such as the look-ahead zone presentation). This allows the player to bask in the afterglow of the end of the normal game state, making the game more interesting.

Although a series of effects is executed from the display of the second special symbol, which is the final change in the time-saving mode, to the display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game mode, the series of effects may not be started in the display of the second special symbol, which is the final change in the time-saving mode, but may be executed from the display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game mode. In this case, a special SP reach effect or result display may be performed in the first display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game mode.

(Example of a small win with the remaining reserve of the second special symbol when transitioning to normal game mode)
Using Figure 72, an example of a presentation in which a small win occurs with the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) when transitioning from a normal time-saving play state in which the Ranbu mode is set to a normal play state.

Here, when the second special symbol, which is the final time-saving variation, starts to change, a series of variations that make it look as if one variation is being performed over multiple variations is started, and as shown in FIG. 72(a), a variation that results in a loss is being performed. At this time, the winning light-up effect continues, with the second reserved memory (small win) being the predicted target, and the top lamp 10b is lit in yellow.

When a predetermined period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 72(b), a shutter image is displayed that closes, indicating the end of the time-saving game state, and the Ranbu mode background image, the performance pattern 70a, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the second hold icon HI displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D gradually become invisible.

Then, when the shutter image closes completely, as shown in FIG. 71(c), a result display is performed that shows the results of the game during the series of advantageous periods during which the time-saving game state continues, triggered by the jackpot game. Specifically, a text image of "1 win" indicating the number of jackpot games and "450 pt" indicating the number of prize balls paid out is displayed. In addition, when the variable time has elapsed, the special symbol TZ is displayed as a missing number ("165") while the performance symbol 70a is not displayed, and the normal time-saving game state ends and transitions to the normal game state.

However, since the remaining reserved second special symbols (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state include ones that will result in a small win, the result display executed here is a special result display (a type of pre-reading effect) that suggests that the remaining reserved second special symbols (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state include ones that will result in a small win. Specifically, multiple star images YG are displayed in a position that avoids the text images in the result display.

After that, the pause time (8 seconds) at the end of the time-saving game state, which is longer than the normal pause time (0.5 seconds), has elapsed, and the first display of the second special pattern (missing change presentation corresponding to the super-shortened change after the result) based on the remaining reserved second special pattern (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state begins, and as shown in Figure 72 (d), the display of the special pattern TZ begins to change while the result display continues, and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3".

After the change time has elapsed, the special symbol TZ stops and displays a losing number ("749") as shown in FIG. 72(e). During the period in which the result display is being performed after the time-saving game state has been switched to the normal game state, the number of games played GK remains hidden, and even if a change effect is performed, the number of games played is only added internally, and cannot be grasped visually. During the period in which a change display is being performed based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of the transition to the normal game state during the result display, the execution of the jackpot notice effect and the look-ahead effect (the look-ahead effect based on winning at the first starting hole 45) that are performed in the normal game state is restricted.

Then, when the normal stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed and the second display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state begins (the display of the small win corresponding to the revival after the result) begins, as shown in FIG. 72(f), the display of the special symbol TZ begins and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "3" to "2". At this time, the revival effect begins and a text image saying "Not yet!" is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 72(g), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the performance position, and the audio output device 9 outputs a "queen, queen" notification sound (indicating that the current variable display of the second special symbol will result in a small win). At this time, the top lamp 10b goes out, and the winning light-emitting performance ends.

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the performance position to the standby position and the revival performance ends, the performance pattern 70a temporarily stops at the special number ("555") that is common to both small and big wins, and when the temporary stop time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 72 (h), the performance pattern 70a stops at the special number ("555") that is common to both small and big wins, and the special pattern TZ stops at the small win number ("5V5") that includes a "V" indicating a small win.

Then, after the normal stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the series of effects described above ends, and the opening of the small win game begins. As shown in FIG. 72(i), a "BONUS" image is displayed to indicate that the small win game is being played, and the first right hit notification (display of the first right hit image MG1) is executed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a.

After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 72(j), the "BONUS" image is replaced with a second right-hit notification (display of the second right-hit image MG2) that prompts the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, when a jackpot game is executed, a "jackpot" image is displayed at the opening of the jackpot game to indicate that a jackpot game is being executed, and a first right-hit notification (display of first right-hit image MG1) is executed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a. After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the "jackpot" image is replaced with a second right-hit notification (display of second right-hit image MG2) to encourage the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a.

In this way, if the remaining reserved second special symbols (second reserved memory stored during the specific game state) at the time of transition to the normal game state include one that is a small win as a result of the pre-reading, it is possible to execute a special result display (pre-reading effect) that confirms that it will be a small win. Therefore, while the result display gives the player a sense of loss, it is also possible to give the player a sense of security, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when a small win occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol when the normal game state is entered (the second reservation memory stored during the specific game state), the first movable member 73a operates in the same manner as when a big win occurs. This makes it possible to effectively present the execution of a small win game, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when a small win occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (the second reserved memory stored during the specific game state) when the normal game state is entered, the same notification sound ("queen, queen") as in the case of a big win is output from the sound output device 9. This makes it possible to effectively present the fact that a small win game is being played, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when a small win occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory stored during the specific game state) when the normal game state is entered, the same result as that of a big win (a special result of three of the same numbers in a row) is displayed as the performance symbol 70a. This makes the player aware that a small win game can lead to a big win game, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

The special result display is executed when the remaining reserved second special symbols at the time of transition to the normal game state (second reserved memory stored during the specific game state) include a small win, but the special result display may be executed in the same display mode as in the case of a small win even if the remaining reserved second special symbols at the time of transition to the normal game state include a big win. Also, a special result display with a different display mode may be executed for a small win and a big win.

In addition, when a small win occurs in the variable display of the second special pattern based on the remaining reserved second special pattern (second reserved memory stored during the specific game state) when transitioning to the normal game state, the same result as in the case of a big win (a special result of three identical numbers in a row) is displayed as the performance pattern 70a, but even when the same result occurs, the colors of the numbers may be different, and it may be possible to vary whether or not a specific image (specific letters or decorative images) is added to the numbers.

In addition, if the remaining reserved second special symbols at the time of transition to the normal game state (second reserved memory stored during the specific game state) include one that will result in a small win, the same special result display is performed regardless of the type of small win game (= special stop symbol data), but different types of special result display may also be performed depending on the type of small win game.

(Example of a small win in the Super Ranbu mode)
Using Figure 73, an example of the presentation when a small win game is executed in Chou Ranbu mode will be described.

Here, as a result of the variable display (variable performance) of the second special symbol executed in Chou Ranbu mode, the small win special symbol is displayed stationary, the first small win game is started, and the opening of the first small win game is started.

When the opening of the first small prize game ends and the opening and closing game begins in which the first large prize opening and closing member 51 and the specific area opening and closing member 52 are changed in state, as shown in FIG. 73(a), a third right-hit image MG3 is displayed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball at the specific area 53, and a limit notification effect is started according to the remaining period of the opening and closing game (the remaining time the game ball can pass through the specific area 53). Specifically, a count image CG (here, "09:99") is displayed in the upper left corner of the first image display device 70, and the display size expands as the time passes while counting down.

Immediately after that, when the gaming ball passes (enters) the specific area 53, as shown in FIG. 73(b), a passing notification effect is started to indicate that the gaming ball has passed (entered) the specific area 53. Specifically, a passing notification image TH consisting of the letter "V" is displayed, and a passing notification sound "Vakkuun♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73(c), the passing notification effect (here, the display of the winning notification image NH) continues until the timing of the end of the opening and closing game (state conversion of the first large winning opening opening member 51 and the specific area opening and closing member 52), that is, until the end of the small winning game (conversion game). After that, when the first small winning game ends and the opening of the big winning game (first V big winning game) starts, as shown in FIG. 73(d), a "V-BONUS" image is displayed indicating that the big winning game (first V big winning game) will be executed. Then, after a predetermined time has passed, as shown in FIG. 73(e), the round game starts and the big winning performance is executed. In addition, the total number of paid balls "660pt" according to the total number of game media paid out during the small winning game is displayed, and the total number of paid balls is updated every time a game ball enters the second large winning opening 56 during the first V big winning game.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time (here, 8 seconds) elapses after the start of the small win game without the gaming ball passing (winning) the specific area 53, the count image CG becomes "01:99" and is displayed in a larger size than in FIG. 73(a), as shown in FIG. 73(f). If the gaming ball passes (enters) the specific area 53 immediately after that, the above-mentioned passing notification effect starts, as shown in FIG. 73(b), the passing notification image TH is displayed, and the passing notification sound "Bam!" is output from the audio output device 9.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73(c), the passing notification effect (here, the display of the winning notification image NH) continues until the timing of the end of the opening and closing game (state conversion of the first large winning opening opening member 51 and the specific area opening and closing member 52), that is, until the end of the small winning game (conversion game). After that, when the first small winning game ends and the opening of the big winning game (first V big winning game) starts, as shown in FIG. 73(d), a "V-BONUS" image is displayed indicating that the big winning game (first V big winning game) will be executed. Then, after a predetermined time has passed, as shown in FIG. 73(e), the round game starts and the big winning performance is executed. In addition, the total number of paid balls "660pt" according to the total number of game media paid out during the small winning game is displayed, and the total number of paid balls is updated every time a game ball enters the second large winning opening 56 during the first V big winning game.

When the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 (win) and the remaining time of the opening and closing game becomes "0", as shown in FIG. 73(g), the count image CG displayed in a larger size than FIG. 73(f) becomes "00:00". At the end of the first small win game, a disappointment notification effect is executed to notify the player that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 53 during the small win game (more specifically, during the opening and closing game), and a "disappointment" text image and a fainted character are displayed, and a disappointment sound effect "ding" is output from the audio output device 9.

After that, when the ending of the first small win game is completed, as shown in FIG. 73(h), the remaining number of small wins (Z) is reduced to 1, and the presentation mode is downgraded from Super Ranbu Mode or Infinite Mode to Ranbu Mode. Then, the Ranbu Mode background corresponding to the Ranbu Mode is displayed, and the presentation pattern 70a and special pattern TZ are redisplayed. In addition, the second reserved icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and the time-saving remaining number image KG is also redisplayed.

Then, when the variable display (variable performance) of the second special symbol starts, as shown in FIG. 73(i), the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ start, the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3", and the four reserved icons HI displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D shift toward the icon display area 70C, with one icon being displayed as the icon TI. Also, the remaining number of time-saving plays image KG changes from "80 plays remaining" to "79 plays remaining."

In this way, when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during a small win game (more specifically, an open/close game), a passing notification effect is executed to indicate that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53. Therefore, even if it is difficult to see inside the first large prize opening 50 (around the specific area 53), the player can be sure that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 (that a large win game is being executed), which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during a small win game (more specifically, an opening and closing game), the passing notification effect continues until the small win game (more specifically, an opening and closing game) ends, regardless of the timing of the passing through the specific area 53. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the player not being able to notice the passing notification effect, and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the small win game (conversion game), a limit notification effect is executed according to the remaining time of the opening and closing game (the remaining time during which the game ball can pass through the specific area 53). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately encourage the player to launch the game ball so that it passes through the specific area 53, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of missing the chance to win the big win game.

In addition, the notification mode of the limit notification effect (count numbers, size of the count image) changes (to increase appeal to the player) according to the remaining time of the opening and closing game (the remaining time during which the game ball can pass through the specific area 53). Therefore, it is possible to increase the appeal to the player as time passes, and to avoid inconveniences such as missing a chance to win a jackpot game.

In addition, the limit notification performance includes a countdown display that allows the player to determine the remaining time for the opening and closing game, allowing the player to accurately grasp the time when he or she has a chance to win the jackpot, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, in a small win game (conversion game), if the opening and closing game execution period elapses without the game ball passing through the specific area 53, a disappointment notification effect is executed to notify the player that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 53 during the small win game (more specifically, during the opening and closing game). This makes it possible to accurately inform the player that he or she was unable to win a big win game, and makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the player feeling dissatisfied because the result of the small win game is unknown.

In addition, in a small win game (opening and closing game) executed as a result of a variable effect (variable display of special symbols) executed in the super wild dance mode (same for the infinite mode), if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 and the execution period of the open and closing game elapses and the small win game ends, the remaining number of small wins is reduced to 1 when the small win special symbol stops, and the game is downgraded to the wild dance mode, which corresponds to the remaining number of small wins being 1. Therefore, by switching to a performance mode according to the remaining number of small wins, game conditions that are consistent with the player's understanding when a big win game or small win game is executed thereafter are set, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 during a small win game executed during the time-saving game state, if the remaining number of small wins (Z) is not "0" (the number of time-saving games is also not "0"), the time-saving game state will continue. Therefore, even if the game ball cannot be launched during a small win game due to a malfunction of the launching device or ball jamming, the player will not suffer an extreme disadvantage, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the limit notification effect is set according to the remaining time of the open/close play, but it may also be set according to the remaining time until the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 is finally closed, or according to the remaining time of the small prize play.

In addition, a countdown display is executed as a limit notification effect, but a gauge image may be displayed for the remaining period of the opening and closing game, and a display effect may be executed in which the length of the gauge is shortened as time passes. In addition, a specific light-emitting means may be lit for the remaining period of the opening and closing game, and a light-emitting effect may be executed in which the light-emitting color changes as time passes (for example, blue light → yellow light → red light).

In addition, in a small win game executed during the time-saving game state, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 but the time-saving game state continues, the time-saving remaining number of times image KG is displayed in a state in which the remaining number of times can be known (e.g., 80 times remaining), but it may also be displayed so that the remaining number of times cannot be known (is unknown), such as "??? times."

In addition, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 during a small win game executed during the time-saving game state but the time-saving game state continues, a suggestion effect may be executed to suggest that the super-ranbu mode or the infinite mode will not continue by displaying a text image such as "Maybe going to Ranbu mode."

(Example of a presentation when the time-saving game state is interrupted as a result of a small win in the Ranbu mode)
Using Figure 74, we will explain an example of the presentation when the time-saving game state is interrupted as a result of a small win game in the Ranbu mode (the game ends without transitioning from a small win game to a big win game).

Here, as a result of the variable display (variable performance) of the second special symbol executed in the Ranbu mode, the small win special symbol is displayed stationary, the game transitions to the normal game state, the first small win game starts, and the opening of the first small win game starts.

When the opening of the first small prize game ends and the opening and closing game begins in which the first large prize opening and closing member 51 and the specific area opening and closing member 52 are changed in state, as shown in FIG. 74(a), a third right-hit image MG3 is displayed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball at the specific area 53, and a limit notification effect is started according to the remaining period of the opening and closing game (the remaining time the game ball can pass through the specific area 53). Specifically, a count image CG (here, "09:99") is displayed in the upper left corner of the first image display device 70, and the display size expands as the time passes while counting down.

After that, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 (win) and the remaining time of the opening and closing game becomes "0", as shown in FIG. 74(b), the count image CG displayed in a larger size than FIG. 74(a) becomes "00:00". Also, at the ending of the first small win game, a disappointment notification effect is executed to notify the player that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 53 during the small win game (more specifically, during the opening and closing game), and a "disappointment" text image and a fainted character are displayed, and the disappointment sound effect "ding" is output from the audio output device 9.

After a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 74(c), an end suggestion effect is executed to suggest that the time-saving game state will end with a break (end without transitioning from a small win game to a big win game). Specifically, an effect is performed in which the shutter image SY closes to block the background image, the "Sorry" text image, and the fainted character, and when the ending period ends, as shown in FIG. 74(d), the special pattern TZ "5V5" for the small win mode is redisplayed, and the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F are redisplayed.

After that, when the first display of the second special symbol (display of a miss) based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state starts, as shown in FIG. 74(e), the display of the special symbol TZ starts and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3" while the shutter image SY (end indication image) continues to be displayed.

The game count GK remains hidden while the shutter image SY is displayed, and even if a variable effect is executed, the game count is only added internally and cannot be seen visually.

In addition, during the period when the shutter image SY is displayed and a variable display based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game mode is being executed, the execution of the jackpot prediction effect and the look-ahead effect (the look-ahead effect based on winning at the first starting hole 45) executed in the normal game mode is restricted.

Furthermore, after the variation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 74(f), the special symbol TZ is displayed as a stop at a losing number ("346") while the shutter image SY (end suggestion image) continues to be displayed. After that, the variation and stop display of the special symbol TZ is repeated while the shutter image SY (end suggestion image) is displayed until the remaining reserved number (second reserved memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state reaches 0.

Then, when the remaining reserved number (second reserved memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state has reached 0, the special symbol TZ stops and displays a losing number ("559") while the shutter image SY (end indication image) continues to be displayed, as shown in FIG. 74(g), and when the normal stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol TZ has elapsed, the shutter image SY (end indication image) is erased and the game transitions to presentation mode A.

After that, when the variable display (variable performance) of the first special symbol starts, as shown in FIG. 74(h), the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ starts, the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one reserved icon HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts toward the icon display area 70C and is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, a left hit notification (display of left hit image HG and audio output of "left hit") is executed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area 5a. Also, the number of games GK is redisplayed after the increment (here, 95 times).

Note that, here, an example has been shown in which the remaining reserved number of the second special pattern at the time of transition to the normal game state is "4", but if the remaining reserved number of the second special pattern is "3", the shutter image SY (end suggestion image) will end and the left hit notification will be initiated when the second special pattern has changed one time less, if the remaining reserved number of the second special pattern is "2", the shutter image SY (end suggestion image) will end and the left hit notification will be initiated when the second special pattern has changed two times less, if the remaining reserved number of the second special pattern is "1", the shutter image SY (end suggestion image) will end and the left hit notification will be initiated when the second special pattern has changed three times less, and if the remaining reserved number of the second special pattern is "0", the shutter image SY (end suggestion image) will end and the left hit notification will be initiated when the second special pattern has changed four times less. In other words, if the machine is in a waiting state for customers when it transitions to the normal game state, the display of the shutter image SY (end indication image) will end and a left hit notification will be executed when the stop time has elapsed and the machine is in a waiting state for customers.

In addition, here we have shown an example in which the remaining number of small wins becomes "0" in the Ranbu mode and the normal time-saving play state ends with a dead end (ending without transitioning from small win play to big win play), but even if the remaining number of small wins becomes "0" and the game ends with a dead end in the first special time-saving play state in which the Ranbu mode is set, the game will basically proceed as shown in Figures 74(a) to 74(h).

In this way, in the small win game (opening and closing game) executed as a result of the variable effect (variable display of special symbols) executed in the Ranbu mode, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 and the execution period of the open and close game elapses and the small win game ends, the remaining number of small wins is reduced to 0 when the small win special symbol stops, and the time-saving game state ends, and the game is downgraded to the effect mode A corresponding to the normal game state (the player is notified that the game is in the normal game state). Therefore, the game state is set in a way that is consistent with the player's perception, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the case where the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 during a small win game and the execution period of the open/close game elapses, and the small win game ends (the time-saving game state does not continue), the result display is not executed before the fact that the game state is normal is notified (various presentation images corresponding to presentation mode A are displayed). Therefore, the game can be progressed without giving the player a sense of loss for having missed out on the big win game and the time-saving game state, making the game more interesting.

In addition, a series of effects are executed in which the shutter image SY (end suggestion image) remains displayed throughout the display of the varying second special symbols based on the remaining reserved number of second special symbols (second reserved memory) at the time of the transition from the end of the small win game to the normal game state. This allows the player to experience a novel effect that does not draw too much attention to the remaining reserved number of second special symbols, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, during the display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserved second special symbol in the series of effects, the display of the special symbol TZ is the only one that is changed, without displaying the change of the performance symbol 70a. This makes it easier to recognize multiple change performances as a series of effects, and improves the effect of the series of effects.

In addition, in a small win game, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 and the execution period of the opening and closing game elapses, the small win game ends, and the time-saving game state ends without continuing, it is possible to display a shutter image SY (end suggestion image) that suggests that the time-saving game state will end, and when the small win game ends with the remaining number of small wins (Z) being "0", it is possible to change the display period of the shutter image SY (end suggestion image) depending on whether there is a remaining reservation of the second special pattern or not. Therefore, it is possible to perform a presentation that reflects the game situation, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the execution time (fluctuation time + stop time = 1 second) of the variable display based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special pattern at the time of transition to the normal game state, which is executed while the shutter image SY (end suggestion image) is displayed after the time-saving game state has ended, is shorter than the execution time of the specified variable presentation (all variable presentation including super-shortened variation) executed during the normal time-saving game state and the first special time-saving game state. This makes it possible to prevent the shutter image (display of the end suggestion image) from being extremely drawn out, reducing the presentation effect, and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state or the second special time-saving game state in which the battle mode is set ends, it is possible to start a left-hit notification (display of the left-hit image HG and audio output of "left hit") before the execution period of the variable display based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state has elapsed, while when the normal time-saving game state or the first special time-saving game state in which the wild dance mode is set ends with a puncture, it is possible to start a left-hit notification after the execution period of the variable display based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state has elapsed (after the display of the shutter image has ended). Therefore, when the normal time-saving game state in which the wild dance mode is set ends with a puncture, it is possible to prevent the player from firing unnecessary game balls, which makes the game more interesting.

The left hit notification that is executed after the normal time-saving play state or the second special time-saving play state in which the battle mode has been entered has ended, and the left hit notification that is executed after the normal time-saving play state or the first special time-saving play state in which the wild dance mode has been set has ended, are executed in the same notification mode (notification content, notification time, etc.). This makes it possible to increase the control efficiency when executing the left hit notification, and to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state or the second special time-saving game state in which the battle mode is set ends, it is possible to start a left hit notification (display of the left hit image HG and output of the voice "left hit") at one timing (when the normal time-saving game state ends), while when the normal time-saving game state or the first special time-saving game state in which the wild dance mode is set ends, it is possible to start a left hit notification at one of multiple timings (timings according to the remaining number of reserved second special symbols at the time of transition to the normal game state). Therefore, since the start timing of the left hit notification changes depending on the type of time-saving game state that has ended, it is possible to change the gameplay and increase the interest of the game.

In addition, from the time when the normal time-saving game state or the first special time-saving game state in which the Ranbu mode is set ends until the left-hand hit notification starts (until the shutter image display ends), the execution of the big win notice effect and the look-ahead effect (to the first starting hole 45) that are executed in the normal game state is restricted. This allows the player to bask in the afterglow of the end of the normal game state, making the game more interesting.

In addition, during the period from the end of the normal time-saving game state or the first special time-saving game state in which the Ranbu mode is set until the start of the left-hand hit notification (until the end of the display of the shutter image), control is restricted to the presentation mode corresponding to the normal game state (including presentation modes such as the look-ahead zone presentation). This allows the player to bask in the afterglow of the end of the normal game state, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, during the period when the variable display based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state is being executed, that is, during the period when the shutter image SY is displayed, the jackpot preview performance and the look-ahead performance are not executed, but the execution of the jackpot preview performance may be permitted and the execution of the look-ahead performance may be restricted, or vice versa. Also, the execution of a specific preview performance among the jackpot preview performances (e.g., a winning/losing performance or a jackpot confirmation performance, etc.) may be permitted and the execution of other preview performances (e.g., a dialogue preview performance, a roulette preview performance, a cut-in preview performance, etc.) may be restricted, or the execution of a specific performance among the look-ahead performances (e.g., a winning light-emitting performance, etc.) may be permitted and the execution of other performances (e.g., a look-ahead zone performance or a look-ahead countdown performance, etc.) may be restricted.

(Example of a special time-saving effect)
75, a description will be given of an example of a special time-saving effect that is executed due to the fact that the RWM has not been cleared at the start of power supply. The special time-saving effect includes an RWM clear negation effect that suggests that the RWM has not been cleared (is stationary), and an activation counter display that suggests the number of times the game will change until it transitions to the first special time-saving game state.

Here, assume that 395 special symbol changes (changing effects) have been performed since the end of the jackpot game, the power supply is stopped (power OFF) during normal game mode, and when the power supply is resumed (power ON), the game control state is restored, and then 48 special symbol changes (changing effects) have been performed.

As shown in FIG. 75(a), the first special symbol variable display (variable display) has started in the normal game state (display mode A) as the 49th variable display of the special symbol since the power supply was resumed (the game control state was restored), and a "2" is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, a "0" is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F, two reserved icons HI are displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C. Also, 48 times is displayed as the number of games played GK.

After that, when the first special symbol has stopped displaying as a losing special symbol after the time for changing the first special symbol has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop displaying as a losing number ("814") as shown in FIG. 75(b). In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the number of games GK is increased from 48 to 49.

After that, when the first special symbol changing display (changing performance) starts as the special symbol changing display for the 50th time since the power supply was resumed and there are less than 100 times remaining until the first special time-saving play state, the changing display of the performance pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ starts, the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI, as shown in FIG. 75(c).

At this time, if it is decided to perform the RWM clear denial effect and the activation counter display, as shown in FIG. 75(d), a fixed notification character SC is displayed as the RWM clear denial effect, and an activation counter display is displayed with a notification logo LG including the text "HELP TIME" which means the first special time-saving game state, and a text image of "66 remaining" which indicates the remaining number of changes. In addition, a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the first reserved number display area 70E increases from "1" to "2", and a reserved icon HI is additionally displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, the fixed notification character SC and the activation counter display are displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right of the screen so as not to obstruct the visibility of the performance pattern 70a, as shown in FIG. 75(e).

After that, when the first special symbol stops displaying as a losing special symbol after the time for changing the first special symbol has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop displaying as a losing number ("624"), as shown in FIG. 75(f). In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, the number of games GK is increased from 49 to 50, and the text image of the activation counter display is updated to "65 remaining."

In addition, when the first special symbol changing display (changing performance) begins as the 51st special symbol changing display since the power supply was resumed, the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ changing display begins, the number in the first hold number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two hold icons HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI, as shown in FIG. 75(g).

Then, the first special symbol is repeatedly changed (changed) and stopped. When the special symbol is changed for the 60th time since the power supply was resumed and the 10th time since the start of the RWM clear negation effect, the special symbol is stopped as a losing number ("294") as shown in FIG. 75(h). The icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the number of games GK is increased from 59 to 60. The text image of the activation counter display is updated to "55 remaining," and the fixed notification character SC that has been displayed for the 10 change displays is erased, ending the execution of the RWM clear negation effect.

If the execution of the RWM clear negation effect is not determined when the special symbol changes for the 50th time since the power supply was resumed (the game control state was restored) and there are less than 100 times remaining until the first special time-saving game state is reached, then the execution of the RWM clear negation effect will be determined when the special symbol changes for the 100th time since the power supply was resumed, on the condition that the first special time-saving game state is not reached (the game is in the normal game state).

In addition, if the execution of the activation counter display is not determined when the special symbol variation display is performed for the 50th time since the power supply is resumed (the game control state is restored) and there are less than 100 times remaining until the first special time-saving game state, the execution of the activation counter display will be determined when the special symbol variation display is performed for the 100th time since the power supply is resumed, provided that the first special time-saving game state is not reached (the game is in the normal game state).

In addition, when the RWM clear denial effect or the activation counter display is executed, the jackpot preview effect or the look-ahead preview effect is not executed, but if it is determined that the jackpot preview effect or the look-ahead preview effect will be executed, it is possible to execute the jackpot preview effect or the look-ahead preview effect in parallel with the RWM clear denial effect or the activation counter display.

In this way, if the RWM is not cleared when the power supply starts, the RWM clear negation effect (display of the stationary notification character SC) is executed during the variable display (variation effect) of the special pattern that is the specified number of times (50th or 100th) since the power supply is resumed. This makes it easier for the player to visually grasp that the machine is in a stationary state where the RWM has not been cleared, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The RWM clear negation effect is also executed from the start of the RWM clear negation effect until the special symbol variable display (variable effect) is executed multiple times (here, 10 times). Therefore, even if the player misses the start of the RWM clear negation effect, the player can be reliably informed that the RWM clear negation effect is being executed, which makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, if the RWM is not cleared when the power supply starts, an activation counter display (display of a notification logo LG including the text "Help Time", which means the first special time-saving game state, and a text image of "66 remaining", which indicates the number of remaining changes) is executed during the special symbol changing display (changing performance) that occurs a predetermined number of times (50th or 100th time) since the power supply is resumed. This allows the player to know the number of times the special symbol changing display (changing performance) will occur before the game transitions to the first special time-saving game state, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, the text image showing the remaining number of changes as an activation counter display is made up of only numbers and does not include unit indications such as times or number of times. This increases the likelihood that the player will look up what the numbers mean, and by increasing the opportunities for players to see the model information, it is possible to deepen their understanding of the gaming machine and increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the text image showing the remaining number of fluctuations as the activation counter display is updated not at the start of the fluctuation performance, when it is more likely that a jackpot preview performance or a look-ahead performance will be executed (started), but at the time when the performance pattern stops and is less likely to be executed (started) than at the start of the fluctuation performance. This makes it easier for players to recognize the decrement in the activation counter, making the game more interesting.

In addition, the timing for executing the RWM clear negation effect and the timing for displaying the activation counter are set to the same time (the 50th or 100th time after the power supply is restarted). This makes it possible to effectively inform the player of the transition to the first special time-saving game state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Note that the timing for executing the RWM clear negation effect and the activation counter display is during the variable display (variation effect) of the special pattern a predetermined number of times (50th or 100th time) after the power supply is resumed (restoration of the game control state), but the RWM clear negation effect and the activation counter display may be executed during the variable display (variation effect) of the special pattern a predetermined number of times (for example, 50th or 100th time) before the transition to the first special time-saving game state, or one of the RWM clear negation effect and the activation counter display may be during the variable display (variation effect) of the special pattern a predetermined number of times (for example, 50th or 100th time) after the power supply is resumed (restoration of the game control state), and the other may be during the variable display (variation effect) of the special pattern a predetermined number of times (for example, 50th or 100th time) before the transition to the first special time-saving game state. In such a case, it may be executed at a predetermined rate 50 times before the transition to the first special time-saving game state, and if it has not been executed 50 times before, it may be executed without fail 100 times before.

(Example of a presentation when the machine is in a waiting state for customers when the machine transitions to the first special time-saving game state)
Using Figure 76, an example of the presentation when the game enters a customer waiting state upon transition to the first special time-saving game state will be described.

Here, the 496th special symbol change display (changing performance) has been completed since the end of the jackpot game, and the activation counter display has already been executed.

As shown in FIG. 76(a), the first special symbol change display (change presentation) has begun as the 497th special symbol change display since the end of the jackpot game, with "3" displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and "0" displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F, three reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C. Also, the number of games played GK is displayed as 111, and the activation counter display shows "4 remaining."

At this time, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the special time-saving game state is reached reaches three in response to the start of the fluctuation effect, a countdown effect will begin and an image of the number "3" will be displayed, indicating that there are three remaining fluctuations.

After that, when the first special symbol stops displaying as a losing special symbol after the time for changing the first special symbol has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop displaying as a losing number ("814") as shown in FIG. 76(b). In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, the number of games GK is increased from 111 to 112, and the text image of the activation counter display is updated to "3 remaining."

In addition, when the first special symbol changing display (changing effect) starts as the 498th special symbol changing display from the end of the jackpot game, the changing display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ starts, the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "3" to "2", and the three reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift towards the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number image of "2" is displayed as a countdown effect, indicating that there are two remaining times.

When the first special symbol has stopped displaying as a losing special symbol after the time for changing the first special symbol has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop displaying as a losing number ("594") as shown in FIG. 76(d). The icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, the number of games GK is increased from 112 to 113, and the text image of the activation counter display is updated to "2 remaining."

After that, when the first special symbol changing display (changing effect) starts as the 499th special symbol changing display from the end of the jackpot game, the changing display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ starts as shown in FIG. 76(e), the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, a number image of "1" is displayed as a countdown effect, indicating one remaining time.

When the first special symbol stops displaying as a losing special symbol after the time for changing the first special symbol has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop displaying as a losing number ("634"), as shown in FIG. 76(f). The icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, the number of games GK is increased from 113 to 114, and the text image of the activation counter display is updated to "1 remaining."

Then, when the first special symbol variable display (variable performance) starts as the 500th special symbol variable display, which is the specified number of times since the end of the jackpot game, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ starts, as shown in FIG. 76(g), the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one reserved icon HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts towards the icon display area 70C and is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, a number image of "0" indicating 0 times remaining is displayed as a countdown performance.

After that, when the first special symbol stops displaying as a losing special symbol after the time for changing the first special symbol has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop displaying as a losing number ("234"), as shown in FIG. 76(h). The icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, the number of games GK is increased from 114 to 115, and the text image of the activation counter display is updated to "0 remaining." In addition, because the first special time-saving game state has started with the stopping of the losing special symbol, a right-hit notification (display of the first right-hit image MG1) is started in the upper right corner of the screen to encourage the player to shoot the game ball to the right of the game area 5a.

In addition, when the stop time of the first special symbol has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 76(i), the reserved memory becomes "0" and a customer waiting state is initiated, but the Mode A background image and the activation counter display corresponding to the normal game state are maintained, and the transition to the infinite mode corresponding to the first special time-saving game state is awaited. Meanwhile, since the stop time of the first special symbol has elapsed after the start of the first special time-saving game state, the game count GK is erased.

After that, when a predetermined time (e.g., 90 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the waiting-for-customers state, the waiting-for-customers demo performance begins as shown in FIG. 76(j), and a guide image AN is displayed saying "Help Time Equipped," indicating that the first special time-saving game state, which is the name of the help time, is equipped. After that, when the execution period of the waiting-for-customers demo performance has elapsed, the state shown in FIG. 76(i) is restored, and the state of FIG. 76(i) and the state of FIG. 76(j) are repeatedly shifted to until the variable display of the special pattern (variable performance) begins.

In this way, a countdown effect is executed suggesting a transition to the first special time-saving game state from the changing display (changing effect) of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (here, three times) before the transition to the first special time-saving game state. This makes it possible to clearly grasp the time when the first special time-saving game state will occur, and also to increase the player's anticipation for the occurrence of the first special time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the right hit notification is sent via the first right hit image MG1 when the time for the special symbol to change display has elapsed for the specified number of times (500 times) since the end of the big win game and the special symbol is displayed stationary, entering the first special time-saving game state, that is, during the time when the special symbol is stopped. This makes it possible to prompt the player to make a right hit as early as possible, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the time for the special symbol to change display 500 times (the specified number of times) has elapsed since the end of the jackpot game and the special symbol is displayed stationary, entering the first special time-saving game state, the presentation mode is set to wait for a transition to the infinite mode corresponding to the first special time-saving game state. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as the stationary display of the presentation symbol becoming difficult to see, and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, when the time for the special symbol to change display for the 500th time (the specified number of times) has elapsed since the end of the jackpot game, and the special symbol is stopped and displayed, entering the first special time-saving game state, the game count GK is displayed, but when the special symbol's stop time has elapsed, the game count GK is erased. This makes it possible to eliminate the unnaturalness of the game count GK being displayed even when the first special time-saving game state has been entered, and makes it possible to increase interest in the game. Also, it becomes possible to determine whether the first special time-saving game state has occurred based on whether the game count GK is displayed, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, even if the first special time-saving game state is reached, if the machine is in a waiting state for customers, the activation counter display will remain on. For example, if the player leaves the machine and returns, the player can be informed of the progress of the game, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, during the customer waiting demo performance, a guide image AN is displayed saying "Help Time Equipped," indicating that the machine is equipped with Help Time, which is the name of the first special time-saving game state. This allows the player to understand that the first special time-saving game state will prevent excessive investment and provide relief, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, instead of erasing the number of games played GK when the first special time-saving game state is entered due to the special symbol being displayed in a stopped state, the number of games played GK may be erased in response to the execution of the performance for entering the first special time-saving game state, which will be described later.

Also, instead of displaying the information image AN saying "Help Time Included" throughout the entire period of the customer waiting demo performance, for example, the information image AN may not be displayed while the demo display of the model information (various performances, character introductions, etc.) is being performed, and the information image AN may be displayed while the model name is being displayed, or vice versa. Even in this case, it is preferable not to display the information image AN while the manufacturer name is being displayed.

In addition, rather than displaying a guide image AN saying "Help Time Equipped" on the image display device, "Help Time Equipped" may be written on the surface of the game board (which may be inside or outside the game area) or on a part of the glass frame 4, or the image display device may display a guide image AN saying "Help Time Equipped" and also write "Help Time Equipped" on the surface of the game board or on a part of the glass frame 4, etc.

(Example of a performance when a variable performance is executed after transition to the first special time-saving game state)
Using Figure 77, we will explain an example of a presentation in which a variable presentation is executed after transition from presentation mode A to the first special time-saving game state.

Here, as a result of the 500th display of the special symbol since the end of the jackpot game, the stop display of the losing special symbol is performed, the first special time-saving game state is generated, and a right-hit notification is performed by the first right-hit image MG1.

In this state, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 47 and the variable display of the second special symbol starts as the first variable display in the first special time-saving game state, the variable display starts and the variable display of the display symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ starts, and the icon is displayed in the icon display area 70C, as shown in FIG. 77(a).

After that, if the change display of the second special symbol is a miss, as shown in FIG. 77(b), a change display pattern dedicated to the entry display is determined and the entry display of the first special time-saving game state (here, a long entry display) is executed. Specifically, the notification logo LG of the activation counter display displayed in the lower right of the screen is moved to the center of the screen and enlarged, a text image of "START" indicating the start of the first special time-saving game state is displayed, and a fourth right-hit image MG4 larger than the first right-hit image MG1 is displayed, and a right-hit notification is executed.

Then, after a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds) has elapsed, a blackout effect is executed in which the screen is covered by a dark image, as shown in FIG. 77(c), and after a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds) has elapsed, an infinite mode entry display is displayed, suggesting that the game will enter the infinite mode corresponding to the first special time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 77(d).

After that, when the display time of the infinite mode entry display has elapsed and the entry presentation of the first special time-saving play state has ended, the entry presentation of the first special time-saving play state ends, and the infinite mode background image and the remaining time-saving play count image KG, which indicates the remaining number of times of the second time-saving play count (J2), are displayed as "749 times remaining."

In addition, when the second special symbol changes over a certain period of time and stops at a losing special symbol, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop at a losing number ("234") as shown in FIG. 77(e). In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

On the other hand, if the changing display of the second special symbol is a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 77(f), the activation counter display is erased and the effect of entering the first special time-saving play state is not executed, and the effect of the effect mode A corresponding to the normal play state (such as the display of the mode A background image) continues, and the changing display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

After that, when a predetermined time has passed and the left performance pattern 70a tentatively stops at "3", as shown in FIG. 77(g), a reach teasing performance is performed to tease whether or not the right performance pattern 70a will also stop at "3". After the reach teasing performance period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 77(h), a reach state is formed and the word "Complete" is displayed to indicate that the reach state has been completed, and then the middle pattern immediately tentatively stops at "3".

Then, when the time for the second special symbol to change has elapsed and the second special symbol stops to show the big win special symbol, as shown in FIG. 77(i), the performance symbol 70a stops to show the special number ("333") that is common to both the small win and the big win, and the special symbol TZ stops to show the big win number ("333") that indicates a big win, and the icon TI that was displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

When the first variable display in the first special time-saving game state is a small win for the second special symbol, the presentation will basically progress as shown in Figures 77(f) to 77(i), but the result displayed as the special symbol TZ will be the small win result ("3V3").

In addition, when the first special symbol is displayed as the first display change in the first special time-saving game state, the presentation will basically progress as shown in Figures 77(a) to 77(i).

In this way, when the special symbol stops being displayed in the variable display of the special symbol a set number of times (500 times) after the end of a jackpot game, and the game transitions to the first special time-saving game state, a special variable display pattern is determined for the entry effect, and the entry effect (long entry effect) of the first special time-saving game state can be executed. This allows the player to recognize that the game has entered the first special time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

In addition, the infinite mode entry effect is executed after a blackout effect in which the screen is blocked by a dark image (blocking image) as an effect for entering the first special time-saving game state. This allows the player to transition from the normal game state to the infinite mode corresponding to the first special time-saving game state without feeling out of place, and also allows the player to recognize that they have transitioned to the first special time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when the first special symbol change display in the first special time-saving game state starts, a right-hit notification is issued by the fourth right-hit image MG4 (during the blackout effect and the infinite mode entry effect). Therefore, even a player who has no knowledge of the first special time-saving game state can understand that they will be making a right hit, which makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the entry presentation for the first special time-saving game state is executed in a presentation mode different from that for transitioning to the normal time-saving game state. This notifies the player that a time-saving game state different from the normal time-saving game state has occurred, and notifies the player that the first special time-saving game state has occurred in a novel manner, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, if the first special symbol change display after transitioning to the first special time-saving game state is a miss, the first special time-saving game state entry effect is executed during that change display, and if the first special symbol change display after transitioning to the first special time-saving game state is a big win or a small win, the execution of the first special time-saving game state entry effect during that change display is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that they have lost out by transitioning to the first special time-saving game state but then quickly winning, and it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, if the first special pattern change display after transitioning to the first special time-saving game state is a big win or a small win, the entry presentation for the first special time-saving game state may be executed in a different presentation mode than when it is a miss (such as a mode with low appeal (presentation effect), such as executing a small entry presentation in a corner of the image display device).

In addition, if the first special symbol change display after transitioning to the first special time-saving game state is the first special symbol change display, the entry effect for the first special time-saving game state is executed, and if the first special symbol change display is the second special symbol change display, the entry effect for the first special time-saving game state may not be executed, or vice versa.

In addition, rather than performing the effect of entering the first special time-saving game state during the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to the first special time-saving game state, the period during which the special symbol is stopped in the variable display of the special symbol in the normal game state, which is a specified number of times after the end of the jackpot game, is set longer than the normal variable display period, and the effect of entering the first special time-saving game state is executed during that period. In this case, the effect mode may not be set to infinite mode when the entry effect ends, but may be set to infinite mode when the next variable display of the special symbol (variable effect) begins.

In addition, while the entry effect for the first special time-saving game state has been shown here, it is advisable to execute an entry effect similar to that for the first special time-saving game state when transitioning to the second special time-saving game state.

(Example of a performance when countdown mode is activated)
78 and 79, a presentation example in which the countdown mode is executed due to the RWM being cleared at the start of power supply will be described. The countdown mode is a presentation mode that is set when the number of fluctuations until the transition to the first special time-saving game state in the normal game state reaches a predetermined number (here, 50 times), and displays a countdown to raise expectations of the transition to the first special time-saving game state.

Here, as shown in FIG. 78(a), the first special symbol change display (change display) has started in the normal game state (display mode A) as the 450th change display of the special symbol since the RWM was cleared when the power supply was started, and "4" is displayed in the first hold number display area 70E, "0" is displayed in the second hold number display area, four hold icons HI are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C. Also, 449 times is displayed as the number of games GK.

After that, when the first special symbol has stopped displaying as a losing special symbol after the time for changing the first special symbol has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop displaying as a losing number ("814") as shown in FIG. 78(b). In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the number of games GK is increased from 449 to 450.

After that, when the first special symbol changing display (changing performance) starts as the 451st special symbol changing display since the RWM was cleared when the power supply was started, the performance pattern 70a and special symbol TZ changing display starts as shown in FIG. 78(c), the number in the first hold number display area 70E decreases from "4" to "3", and the four hold icons HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI.

At this time, since the condition for activating the countdown mode of 50 times until the first special time-saving game state is met, the introduction effect for the countdown mode is executed as shown in FIG. 78(d). Specifically, an effect is executed in which the door image TO (obstructing image) closes so as to obscure the background image and various icons, and as shown in FIG. 78(e), a text image is displayed stating "Entering countdown mode. If you can hold out until the count reaches 0, you will enter infinite mode."

When the mode switches to countdown mode, as shown in FIG. 78(f), the door image TO disappears, the countdown mode background image is displayed, and the countdown mode icon IC is displayed in the bottom right of the screen to indicate (notify) that the mode is countdown mode, and the text image "49 remaining" is displayed in the top left of the screen as the countdown display CD, indicating that there are 49 remaining times. Also, the performance pattern 70a changes from a display mode including characters and numbers to a display mode of numbers only.

After that, when the first special symbol has stopped displaying as a losing special symbol after the time for changing the first special symbol has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop displaying as a losing number ("673"), as shown in FIG. 78(g). In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the number of games GK is increased from 450 to 451.

After that, when the variable display (variable performance) of the first special symbol starts, as shown in FIG. 78(h), the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ starts, the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "3" to "2", and the three reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the countdown display CD is reduced to "48 remaining", indicating that 48 times remain.

Then, the first special symbol is repeatedly displayed changing (changing effect) and stopped. When the first special symbol has stopped displaying as a losing special symbol after the 496th time the first special symbol has changed since the RWM was cleared, the effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ are displayed stopping as a losing number ("175") as shown in FIG. 78(i). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 495 to 496, and the countdown display CD shows "4 remaining," indicating that there are 4 games remaining.

After that, when the first special symbol change display (change display) starts as the 497th special symbol change display after the RWM is cleared, the display of the change display of the display pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ starts, as shown in FIG. 79(j), the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "4" to "3", and the four reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the countdown display CD is subtracted to "3 remaining", and when the number of remaining changes until the first special time-saving game state is reached is three in response to the start of the change display, the countdown display starts, and the character image of "3" indicating three remaining is displayed.

After that, when the first special symbol has stopped displaying as a losing special symbol after the time for changing the first special symbol has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop displaying as a losing number ("673"), as shown in FIG. 79(k). In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the number of games GK is increased from 496 to 497.

In addition, when the first special symbol change display (change performance) starts as the 498th special symbol change display after the RWM is cleared, the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ change display starts as shown in FIG. 79(l), the number in the first hold number display area 70E decreases from "3" to "2", and the three hold icons HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the countdown display CD is subtracted to "2 remaining", and the text image of "2" indicating two remaining times is displayed as the countdown performance.

When the first special symbol has stopped displaying the losing special symbol after the time for changing the first special symbol has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop displaying the losing number ("813") as shown in FIG. 79(m). In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the number of games GK is increased from 497 to 498.

After that, when the first special symbol change display (change performance) starts as the 499th special symbol change display after the RWM is cleared, the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ change display starts as shown in FIG. 79(n), the number in the first hold number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two hold icons HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the countdown display CD is subtracted to "1 remaining", and the text image of "1" indicating one remaining count is displayed as a countdown performance.

When the first special symbol has stopped displaying the losing special symbol after the time for changing the first special symbol has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop displaying the losing number ("273") as shown in FIG. 79(o). In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the number of games GK is increased from 498 to 499.

In addition, when the first special symbol changing display (changing performance) starts as the 500th special symbol changing display, which is the specified number of times after the RWM is cleared, the changing display of the performance pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ starts as shown in FIG. 79(p), the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one reserved icon HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts toward the icon display area 70C and is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the countdown display CD is subtracted to "0 remaining", and a number image of "0" indicating 0 remaining is displayed as a countdown performance.

After that, when the first special symbol stops displaying as a losing special symbol after the time for changing the first special symbol has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop displaying as a losing number ("134"), as shown in FIG. 79(q). The icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is also erased, and the number of games GK is increased from 499 to 500. In addition, because the first special time-saving game state has started with the stopping display of the losing special symbol, a right-hit notification (display of the first right-hit image MG1) is started in the right-hit corner of the screen, encouraging the player to launch the game ball to the right of the game area 5a.

In addition, when the stop time of the first special symbol has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 79(r), the reserved memory becomes "0" and a customer waiting state is initiated, but the Mode A background image and countdown display corresponding to the normal game state are maintained, and the transition to the infinite mode corresponding to the first special time-saving game state is awaited. Meanwhile, since the stop time of the first special symbol has elapsed after the start of the first special time-saving game state, the game count GK is erased.

After that, when a predetermined time (e.g., 90 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the waiting-for-customers state, the waiting-for-customers demo effect starts, as shown in FIG. 79(s), and a guide image AN is displayed saying "Help Time Equipped," indicating that Help Time, the name of the first special time-saving game state, is installed. After that, when the execution period of the waiting-for-customers demo effect has elapsed, the state shown in FIG. 79(r) is restored, and the state of FIG. 79(r) and the state of FIG. 79(s) are repeatedly switched between until the variable display of the special symbol (variable effect) starts.

In this way, when the special symbol variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 50 times) before the transition to the first special time-saving game state, the game transitions from one of the presentation modes A to C corresponding to the normal game state to the countdown mode. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that it is their chance to transition to the first special time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, even in the countdown mode, a countdown effect is executed that suggests a transition to the first special time-saving game state from the display of a changing special pattern (changing effect) a predetermined number of times (here, three times) before the transition to the first special time-saving game state. This allows the player to clearly grasp when the first special time-saving game state will occur, and increases the player's anticipation for the occurrence of the first special time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, after the RWM is cleared, the specified number of times, 500 times, the time for the special symbol to change display has elapsed, and the special symbol is displayed stationary, entering the first special time-saving game state, in other words, the right-hit notification is given by the first right-hit image MG1 from the time the special symbol is stopped. This makes it possible to prompt the player to make a right hit as early as possible, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the time for the special symbol to change display has elapsed for the specified number of times, 500 times, since the RWM was cleared, and the special symbol is displayed stationary, entering the first special time-saving game state, the presentation mode is set to wait for a transition to the infinite mode corresponding to the first special time-saving game state. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as the stationary display of the presentation symbol becoming difficult to see, and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, when the time for the special symbol to change display 500 times (the specified number of times) has elapsed since the end of the jackpot game, and the special symbol is stopped and displayed, entering the first special time-saving game state, the game count GK is displayed, but when the special symbol's stop time has elapsed, the game count GK is erased. This makes it possible to eliminate the unnaturalness of the game count GK being displayed even when the first special time-saving game state has been entered, and makes it possible to increase interest in the game. Also, it becomes possible to determine whether the first special time-saving game state has occurred based on whether the game count GK is displayed, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, even if the first special time-saving game state is entered, if the machine is in a waiting state for customers, the countdown display will be maintained. For example, if the player leaves the machine and returns, the player can be informed of the progress of the game, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, instead of erasing the number of games played GK when the first special time-saving game state is entered due to the special symbol being displayed in a stopped state, the number of games played GK may be erased in response to the execution of the performance for entering the first special time-saving game state, which will be described later.

The countdown display is set to decrement when the changing display (changing performance) of the special symbol starts, but it may also be set to decrement when the special symbol stops being displayed.

(Example of a performance when a variable performance is executed after transition to the first special time-saving game state)
Using Figure 80, we will explain an example of a presentation in which a variable presentation is executed after transition from the countdown mode to the first special time-saving game state.

Here, as a result of the 500th time the special symbol has changed since the RWM was cleared, a missing special symbol has been displayed in a stopped state, creating the first special time-saving game state, and a right-hit notification has been issued by the first right-hit image MG1.

In this state, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 47 and the variable display of the second special symbol starts as the first variable display in the first special time-saving game state, the variable display starts and the variable display of the display symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ starts, and the icon is displayed in the icon display area 70C, as shown in FIG. 80(a).

After that, if the variable display of the second special symbol is a miss, as shown in FIG. 80(b), a variable presentation pattern that is not exclusive to the entry presentation is determined and the entry presentation of the first special time-saving game state (here, a short entry presentation) is executed. Specifically, an effect image (obstructing image) of a size that obscures the background image, etc. is displayed along with a text image saying "Achieved," and a fourth right-hit image MG4, which is larger than the first right-hit image MG1, is displayed and a right-hit notification is executed.

After a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed, an infinite mode entry display is displayed, suggesting that the player will enter the infinite mode corresponding to the first special time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 80(c). Furthermore, when the display time of the infinite mode entry display has elapsed and the entry presentation for the first special time-saving game state has ended, the entry presentation diagram for the first special time-saving game state ends, and the infinite mode background image and the remaining time-saving number image KG, which indicates the remaining number of times of the second time-saving number (J2), are displayed as "749 times remaining."

In addition, when the second special symbol has stopped displaying the losing special symbol after the time for changing the second special symbol has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop displaying the losing number ("234") as shown in FIG. 80(d). In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

On the other hand, if the changing display of the second special symbol is a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 80(e), the effect of entering the first special time-saving game state is not executed, and the countdown mode effect corresponding to the normal game state (such as the display of the countdown mode background image) continues, and the changing display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

After that, when a predetermined time has passed and the left performance symbol 70a temporarily stops at "3", as shown in Figure 80 (f), the right performance symbol 70a also temporarily stops at "3", forming a reach state, and a reach performance (reach variation without entry performance) is executed, as shown in Figure 80 (g).

Then, when the time for the second special symbol to change has elapsed and the second special symbol stops to show the big win special symbol, as shown in FIG. 80(h), the performance symbol 70a stops to show the special number ("333") that is common to both the small win and the big win, and the special symbol TZ stops to show the big win number ("333") that indicates a big win, and the icon TI that was displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

When the first variable display in the first special time-saving game state is a small win for the second special symbol, the presentation will basically progress as shown in Figures 80(e) to 80(h), but the result displayed as the special symbol TZ will be the small win result ("3V3").

In addition, when the first special symbol is displayed as the first display change in the first special time-saving game state, the presentation will basically progress as shown in Figures 80(a) to 80(h).

In this way, when the special symbol stops being displayed during the variable display of the special symbol the specified number of times (500 times) after the RWM is cleared, and the game transitions to the first special time-saving game state, a variable display pattern that is not exclusive to the entry display is determined, and the entry display (short entry display) of the first special time-saving game state can be executed. This allows the player to recognize that the game has entered the first special time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The short entry effect is set to a time that is shorter than the time it takes for the shortest special pattern among multiple special pattern patterns that may be determined in the special pattern change display a set number of times (500 times) after the RWM is cleared. Therefore, no matter what special pattern is determined, the entry effect can be executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the first special symbol change display after the transition to the first special time-saving game state is a jackpot, the first special time-saving game state entry performance is not executed. This prevents the player from feeling like they've lost out by quickly hitting a jackpot after transitioning to the first special time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Note that if the first special symbol change display after transitioning to the first special time-saving game state is a big win or a small win, the entry effect into the first special time-saving game state is not executed, but it may be executed to enter the first special time-saving game state, just as in the case of a miss.

In addition, if the first special symbol change display after transitioning to the first special time-saving game state is the first special symbol change display, the entry effect for the first special time-saving game state is executed, and if the first special symbol change display is the second special symbol change display, the entry effect for the first special time-saving game state may not be executed, or vice versa.

In addition, instead of performing the effect of entering the first special time-saving game state during the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to the first special time-saving game state, the period during which the special symbol is stopped in the variable display of the special symbol in the normal game state, which is a specified number of times after the end of the jackpot game, is set to be longer than the normal variable display period, and the effect of entering the first special time-saving game state may be executed during that period. In this case, the effect mode may not be changed to infinite mode when the entry effect ends, but may be changed to infinite mode when the next variable display of the special symbol (variable effect) begins.

In addition, in the countdown mode, an effect may be executed in which an ally character and an enemy character battle each other. In this case, a text image such as "Entering countdown mode. If the ally character can withstand the enemy character's attacks until the count reaches 0, enter infinite mode" may be displayed in the introductory effect to the countdown mode. In addition, when the game transitions to the first special time-saving game state, an effect may be executed in which the ally character can withstand the enemy character's attacks until the special symbol changes (changing effect) in the final round in the normal game state, and when the game does not transition to the first special time-saving game state (the jackpot special symbol is displayed stationary and a jackpot game is executed), an effect may be executed in which the ally character cannot withstand the enemy character's attacks and loses (an effect that is the opposite of the effect in which the ally character wins against the enemy character executed as a reach effect when a jackpot game is executed when the game is not in the countdown mode).

(Example of a presentation when the first special time-saving game state in which infinite mode is set ends)
Using Figure 81, we will explain an example of the presentation when the number of time-saving times (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and the first special time-saving game state in which the infinite mode is set ends.

Here, a countdown effect is executed suggesting the end of the first special time-saving game state from the changing display (changing effect) of the special symbol three times before the end of the first special time-saving game state. Specifically, it is assumed that a number image of "3" → "2" → "1" is displayed each time the changing display (changing effect) of the special symbol is executed.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), when the second special symbol stops and displays as a losing special symbol after the time has elapsed in the variable display of the second special symbol one time before the first special time-saving game state ends, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop and display as a losing number ("234"). The icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is also erased. The remaining number of time-saving games image KG, which is displayed in the same position and in the same display mode as in the normal time-saving game state, shows "1 time remaining," and the number of games GK shows "1249 times," which is the number of times that the variable display has continued from before the first special time-saving game state occurred.

Then, when the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol, which will end the first special time-saving game state, begins, as shown in FIG. 81(b), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ begins, the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3", and the three reserved icons HI displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D shift toward the icon display area 70C, with one being displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the time-saving remaining number image KG changes from "1 time remaining" to "0 times remaining", and a number image of "0" indicating 0 times remaining is displayed as a countdown effect.

After that, when the second special symbol has stopped displaying as a losing special symbol after the time for changing the second special symbol has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop displaying as a losing number ("134"), as shown in FIG. 81(c). In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the first right-hit image MG1 is erased, since the normal game state has started due to the stopping display of the losing special symbol.

After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed, an end suggestion effect is executed to indicate that the first time-saving game state will end. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the shutter image SY closes to block out the background image, various icons, etc.

Then, when the first display of the second special symbol (display of a miss) based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state begins, as shown in FIG. 81(d), the display of the special symbol TZ begins and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "3" to "2" while the shutter image SY (obstructed image) continues to be displayed.

The game count GK remains hidden while the shutter image SY is displayed, and even if a variable effect is executed, the game count is only added internally and cannot be seen visually.

In addition, during the period when the shutter image SY is displayed and a variable display based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game mode is being executed, the execution of the jackpot prediction effect and the look-ahead effect (the look-ahead effect based on winning at the first starting hole 45) executed in the normal game mode is restricted.

In addition, after the time for the second special symbol to change has elapsed, the special symbol TZ will stop and display a losing number ("326") while the shutter image SY (obstructed image) continues to be displayed, as shown in FIG. 81(e).

Furthermore, when the first display of the second special symbol (display of a miss) based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state begins, as shown in FIG. 81(f), the display of the special symbol TZ begins and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "2" to "1" while the shutter image SY (obstructed image) continues to be displayed.

After that, the special symbol TZ will repeatedly change and stop while the shutter image SY (obstructed image) is displayed until the remaining reserved number (second reserved memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state reaches zero.

Then, when the remaining reserved number (second reserved memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state reaches 0, the time for the second special symbol to change has elapsed, and the special symbol TZ stops and displays a losing number ("559") while the shutter image SY (obstructed image) continues to be displayed, as shown in FIG. 81(g).

After that, when the stop time of the special symbol TZ has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 81(h), the shutter image SY (blocking image) disappears, the presentation mode A background image is displayed, the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are displayed, and a left-hit notification (display of left-hit image HG and audio output of "left-hit") is started to prompt the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area 5a. In addition, the game count GK, which is the accumulated number of variable displays since the RWM was cleared or the end of the jackpot game (including the number of variable displays during the first special time-saving game state), is redisplayed.

Then, when the display of the first special pattern based on the remaining reserved number of the first special pattern (first reserved memory) starts, the display of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ starts, the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one reserved icon HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts toward the icon display area 70C and is displayed as the icon TI.

After that, when the first special symbol changes time and stops at the losing special symbol, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop at the losing number ("814") as shown in FIG. 81(i). In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the number of games GK is increased from 1254 to 1255.

In this way, when the number of time-saving turns (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and the first special time-saving game state ends, the result display is not executed before the fact that the game state is normal is notified (various presentation images corresponding to presentation mode A are displayed). Therefore, the game can be progressed without giving the player a sense of loss for missing out on the jackpot game and time-saving game state, making the game more interesting.

In addition, the shutter image SY is displayed from the display of the second special symbol, which is the final change of the time-saving mode, to the display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserved number of the second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game mode, and only the special symbol TZ is displayed. This allows the player to experience a novel presentation that does not make them strongly aware of the remaining reserved number of the second special symbol, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of displaying a left-hit image HG that encourages the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area 5a when transitioning to the normal game state, the left-hit image HG is displayed at the end of a series of effects. This prevents the player from shooting unnecessary game balls, making the game more interesting.

In addition, the execution time (fluctuation time + stop time = 1 second) of the variable display based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special pattern when transitioning to the normal game state is executed while the shutter image SY (end suggestion image) is displayed after the end of the first time-saving game state is shorter than the execution time of the specified variable presentation (all variable presentation including super-shortened variation) executed during the normal time-saving game state and the first special time-saving game state. This makes it possible to prevent the shutter image (display of the end suggestion image) from being extremely drawn out, reducing the presentation effect, and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state or the second special time-saving game state in which the entry battle mode is set ends, it is possible to start a left-hit notification (display of the left-hit image HG and audio output of "left hit") before the execution period of the variable display based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state has elapsed, while when the first special time-saving game state ends, it is possible to start a left-hit notification after the execution period of the variable display based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state has elapsed (after the display of the shutter image has ended). Therefore, when the first special time-saving game state ends, it is possible to prevent the player from firing game balls unnecessarily, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the left hit notification that is executed after the normal time-saving play state or the second special time-saving play state in which the battle mode has been entered ends, and the left hit notification that is executed after the first special time-saving play state ends, are executed in the same notification mode (notification content, notification time, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the control efficiency when executing the left hit notification, and to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state or the second special time-saving game state in which the battle mode has been entered ends, it is possible to start a left-hit notification (display of the left-hit image HG and output of the voice "left hit") at one timing (when the normal time-saving game state ends), while when the first special time-saving game state ends, it is possible to start a left-hit notification at one of a number of timings (timings according to the remaining number of reserved second special symbols at the time of transition to the normal game state). Therefore, since the start timing of the left-hit notification changes depending on the type of time-saving game state that has ended, it is possible to vary the playability and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, during the period from when the first special time-saving game state ends until the left-hit notification starts (until the shutter image display ends), the execution of the big win preview effect and pre-reading effect (for the first starting hole 45) that are executed during the normal game state is restricted. This allows the player to bask in the afterglow of the end of the normal game state, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, during the period from when the first special time-saving game state ends until the left-hit notification starts (until the shutter image display ends), control is restricted to a presentation mode that corresponds to the normal game state (including presentation modes such as look-ahead zone presentations). This allows the player to bask in the afterglow of the end of the normal game state, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the first special time-saving game state, the remaining time-saving number image KG is displayed in the same position and in the same display manner as in the normal time-saving game state. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that they are in the time-saving game state and the number of remaining time-saving numbers, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, during the period when the variable display based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state is being executed, that is, during the period when the shutter image SY is displayed, the jackpot preview performance and the look-ahead performance are not executed, but the execution of the jackpot preview performance may be permitted and the execution of the look-ahead performance may be restricted, or vice versa. Also, the execution of a specific preview performance among the jackpot preview performances (e.g., a winning/losing performance or a jackpot confirmation performance, etc.) may be permitted and the execution of other preview performances (e.g., a dialogue preview performance, a roulette preview performance, a cut-in preview performance, etc.) may be restricted, or the execution of a specific performance among the look-ahead performances (e.g., a winning light-emitting performance, etc.) may be permitted and the execution of other performances (e.g., a look-ahead zone performance, a look-ahead countdown performance, etc.) may be restricted.

In addition, instead of displaying the time-saving remaining number image KG in the special time-saving game state in the same position and in the same display manner as in the normal time-saving game state, the time-saving remaining number image KG may be displayed in a different position and/or in a different display manner than in the normal time-saving game state. In this way, it becomes easier to recognize whether the game is in the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

(Example of a performance when power is restored during normal game mode after the first special time-saving game mode ends)
An example of a presentation in which power is restored during a normal game state after the first special time-saving game state has ended will be described with reference to Fig. 82. Note that, although an example in which presentation mode A is set after the first special time-saving game state has ended is shown here, the same is basically true even when other presentation modes (presentation modes B, C, and a mode dedicated to the end of the game state) are set.

First, as shown in FIG. 82(a), the machine is in a customer waiting state with presentation mode A set, and the presentation symbol 70a for a losing result ("814") and the special symbol TZ are displayed frozen, and the number of games played is displayed as "1255 times."

When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped in this state, the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 are hidden and the lighting device including the top lamp 10b is turned off, as shown in FIG. 82(b). When the power supply to the gaming machine is then resumed, the loading screen (initial screen) is displayed on the first image display device 70, as shown in FIG. 82(c), and the top lamp 10b remains turned off.

When the game control state is restored to the state before the power supply was stopped (waiting for customers), and the presentation control board 130 receives the power restoration command sent from the main control board 110, presentation mode A is set as the initial mode after power restoration, as shown in FIG. 82(d), and the mode A background image, presentation pattern 70a which will be the initial result after power restoration ("753") and special pattern TZ are displayed, and "???" is displayed as the number of games GK, indicating that the number of changes until the first special time-saving game state is entered is unknown, and a notification is issued indicating that the first special time-saving game state has been entered. Furthermore, the top lamp 10b emits light in a specific light-emitting mode (e.g., red flashing every 750 ms) different from the light-emitting mode during an error (e.g., red flashing every 250 ms), and a notification is issued indicating that the first special time-saving game state has been entered.

After that, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45 and the first special pattern, which is a losing symbol, starts to change, the display of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ starts to change, the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one reserved icon HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts toward the icon display area 70C and is displayed as that icon TI, as shown in FIG. 82(e).

Furthermore, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the performance pattern 70a will fluctuate at high speed as shown in FIG. 82(f), and if the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped in this state, the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 will be hidden and the lighting device including the top lamp 10b will be turned off as shown in FIG. 82(g). When the power supply to the gaming machine is then resumed, a loading screen (initial screen) will be displayed on the first image display device 70 as shown in FIG. 82(h), and the top lamp 10b will remain turned off.

Then, when the performance control board 130 receives a power restoration command sent from the main control board 110 because the game control state has been restored to the state before the power supply was stopped (while the special symbols are being displayed), a restoration screen indicating that the power has been restored from the power outage is displayed as shown in FIG. 82(i), a sound saying "Restoring" is output, and the top lamp 10b remains off.

After that, when the time for the special symbols to change has elapsed and the losing special symbol has stopped being displayed, a symbol determination command is received from the main control board 110, and as shown in FIG. 82(j), the presentation mode A is set as the initial mode after power is restored, and the mode A background image, the presentation symbol 70a which will be the initial result after power is restored ("753"), and the special symbol TZ are displayed, and "???" is displayed as the number of games GK, indicating that the number of changes until the first special time-saving game state is entered is unknown, and a notification is issued indicating that the first special time-saving game state has been entered. Furthermore, the top lamp 10b emits light in a specific light-emitting mode (e.g., red flashing every 750 ms) different from the light-emitting mode during an error (e.g., red flashing every 250 ms), and a notification is issued indicating that the first special time-saving game state has been entered.

In this way, since there is no transition back to the first special time-saving game state in the normal game state after the first special time-saving game state has ended, when the power supply that was stopped in the normal game state after the first special time-saving game state has ended is resumed and the game control state is restored, it is possible to execute a first specific notification that displays the number of games GK as "???" and a second specific notification that causes the top lamp 10b to emit light in a specific light-emitting mode as specific notifications indicating that the first special time-saving game state has been executed. This allows the player to recognize that the first special time-saving game state has ended, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when the power supply that was stopped is resumed in the normal game state (while the special symbols are being displayed) after the first special time-saving game state has ended and the game control state is restored, it is possible to execute a first notification indicating that the power has been restored from the power outage (display of the power recovery screen and audio output of "Restoring") and a second notification indicating that the first special time-saving game state has been executed (display of "???" on the game count GK and top lamp 10b). This allows the player to recognize that the power supply has been restored and that the first special time-saving game state has ended, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Note that a specific light-emitting portion (e.g., top lamp 10b) is caused to emit light in a specific light-emitting mode (e.g., flashing red at 750 ms intervals) that is different from the light-emitting mode during an error (e.g., flashing red at 250 ms intervals), but the flashing cycle in the specific light-emitting mode may be faster than the flashing cycle in the light-emitting mode during an error, or may be the same.

In addition, if the power is restored during normal game mode after the first special time-saving game mode has ended, a specific notification is issued to indicate that the first special time-saving game mode has been completed. However, a specific notification (display of "???" on the game count GK, top lamp 10b) may also be issued in response to a transition to normal game mode after the first special time-saving game mode has ended, without the need for power restoration, indicating that the first special time-saving game mode has been completed.

Second Embodiment
Hereinafter, the second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.
In the second embodiment, the normal time-saving play state ends when a specific small win special pattern is displayed, even if there are remaining small wins, and the remaining number of small wins set for each big win is different. Therefore, here, only the differences from the first embodiment will be described.

(Game Status Setting Table)
Figure 83(a) is a diagram showing a first game status setting table for setting the game status after the end of a jackpot game without a small jackpot game, and Figure 83(b) is a diagram showing a second game status setting table for setting the game status after the end of a jackpot game that has involved a small jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 83(a), the first game state setting table corresponds to the special stop data of the jackpot special symbol, the game state information at the time of winning the jackpot indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the game state flag to be set (time-saving flag indicating the time-saving game state), the first time-saving number (J1) which is the number of times the first special symbol changes to end the time-saving game state, the second time-saving number (J2) which is the number of times the second special symbol changes to end the time-saving game state, the third time-saving number (J3) which is the number of times the combined first and second special symbols change to end the time-saving game state, the remaining number of small wins (Z1) which is the number of times the small win changes to end the time-saving game state, and the third remaining number of small wins (Z2) which is the number of times a specific small win changes to end the time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 83(b), the second game state setting table corresponds to the stop special symbol data of the small win special symbol, the game state information at the time of passing the specific region 53 indicating the game state when the game ball passes through the specific region 53, the game state flag to be set (time-saving flag indicating the time-saving game state), the first time-saving number (J1) which is the number of times the first special symbol changes to end the time-saving game state, the second time-saving number (J2) which is the number of times the second special symbol changes to end the time-saving game state, the third time-saving number (J3) which is the number of times the combined first special symbol and second special symbol changes to end the time-saving game state, the remaining number of small wins (Z1) which is the number of times the small win changes to end the time-saving game state, and the third remaining number of small wins (Z2) which is the number of times a specific small win changes to end the time-saving game state.

The first feature of the game status setting table shown in FIG. 83 is that in addition to the remaining number of small wins (Z1), which is the number of all types of small win variation displays, the remaining number of third small wins (Z2), which is the number of specific small win variations (variation displays that will result in the execution of a third small win game), is set. In this way, it is possible to get the player interested in the types of small win variations as well, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

The second feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 83 is that there are cases where the remaining number of small wins (Z1) and the remaining number of third small wins (Z2) are set to the same number, and cases where the remaining number of small wins (Z1) and the remaining number of third small wins (Z2) are set to different numbers. By doing this, it is possible to create cases where the time-saving game state ends regardless of the type of small win fluctuation, and cases where the time-saving game state ends only with a specific small win fluctuation, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

(Special pattern change processing on the main control board)
The special symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 84. Fig. 84 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process in the main control board 110. Note that only the differences from the special symbol variation process of the main control board 110 in the first embodiment shown in Fig. 27 will be described here, and the description of the common parts will be omitted.

In step S320-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a small win special symbol has stopped and been displayed. If it is not a small win special symbol, the process proceeds to step S320-13. If it is a small win special symbol, in step S320-10, the remaining number of small wins (Z1) until the time-saving game state is terminated, which is saved in the main RAM 110c, is decremented by 1.

In step S320-10A, the main CPU 110a determines whether the small win special symbol is the third small win special symbol (special symbol 15). If it is not the third small win special symbol, the process proceeds to step S320-11. If it is the third small win special symbol, the process proceeds to step S320-10B, where the remaining number of second small wins (Z2) is decremented by 1.

In step S320-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the remaining number of small wins (Z1) or the remaining number of third small wins (Z2) has become "0." If the remaining number of small wins (Z1) or the remaining number of third small wins (Z2) has become "0," the time-saving game state is terminated and processing proceeds to step S320-12. If the remaining number of small wins has not become "0," processing proceeds to step S320-13.

In this way, when a small win symbol is displayed in a time-saving game state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 47 (a small win game is being played), even if the number of time-saving times (J1, J2, J3) remains, the time-saving game state ends when the remaining number of small wins (Z1) or the remaining number of third small wins (Z2) becomes "0". Therefore, even if the player tries to play advantageously by referring to the combination of the pre-reading effects or the stopped-displayed effect patterns 70a (whether or not to aim for an advantageous jackpot by passing the game ball through the specific area 53 in a small win game), it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage depending on the playing method during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when a small win symbol is displayed in a stopped state during the time-saving game state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 47 (a small win game is being played), even if the remaining number of small wins (Z1) remains, the time-saving game state ends when the remaining number of third small wins (Z2) becomes "0". Therefore, even if the player tries to play advantageously by referring to the combination of the pre-reading effects or the stopped-displayed effect symbols 70a (whether or not to aim for an advantageous jackpot by passing the game ball through the specific area 53 in a small win game), it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage depending on the playing method during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Game flow showing a modified example related to the time-saving gaming state)
Using Figure 85, we will explain the game flow showing a modified example related to the time-saving gaming state.

First, in the normal game state, if a jackpot is won and a special jackpot symbol is displayed as a still image, the jackpot game is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to the first time-saving game state. During this first time-saving game state, if a first special miss is won and time-saving symbol A is displayed as a still image, or if a second special miss is won and time-saving symbol B is displayed as a still image, the win is invalidated and the first time-saving game state is maintained. Furthermore, if the end condition (time-saving number of times = 0, remaining number of small wins = 0) is met during the first time-saving game state, the game returns to the normal game state. Furthermore, if a jackpot game is executed during the first time-saving game state, the game transitions again to the first time-saving game state.

In addition, in the normal game state, if the first special miss is won and the time-saving symbol A is displayed as a still image, the game will transition to the second time-saving game state without going through the jackpot game. During this second time-saving game state, if the first special miss is won and the time-saving symbol A is displayed as a still image, or if the second special miss is won and the time-saving symbol B is displayed as a still image, the win is invalidated and the second time-saving game state is maintained. In addition, if the end condition (time-saving number of times = 0, remaining number of small wins = 0) is met during the second time-saving game state, the game will return to the normal game state. In addition, if a jackpot game is played during the second time-saving game state, the game will transition to the first time-saving game state.

In addition, in the normal game state, if the second special miss is won and the time-saving symbol B is displayed as a still image, the game will transition to the third time-saving game state without going through the jackpot game. During this third time-saving game state, if the first special miss is won and the time-saving symbol A is displayed as a still image, or if the second special miss is won and the time-saving symbol B is displayed as a still image, the win is invalidated and the third time-saving game state is maintained. In addition, if the end condition (time-saving number of times = 0, remaining number of small wins = 0) is met during the third time-saving game state, the game will return to the normal game state. In addition, if a jackpot game is played during the third time-saving game state, the game will transition to the normal game state without transitioning to the time-saving game state.

In addition, if the miss variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times) in succession after the RWM is cleared or the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the game state at that time (normal game state, first to third time-saving game state), the game will transition to the special time-saving game state without going through the jackpot game (if the game was in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state will end and the game will transition to the special time-saving game state). During this special time-saving game state, if the first special miss is won and the time-saving pattern A is displayed as a still image, and if the second special miss is won and the time-saving pattern B is displayed as a still image, the winning is invalidated and the special time-saving game state is maintained. In addition, if the end condition (time-saving number of times = 0, remaining number of small wins = 0) is met during the special time-saving game state, the game will return to the normal game state. In addition, if a jackpot game is executed during the special time-saving game state, the game will transition to the first time-saving game state.

For the first time-saving game state, various controls are performed using a table corresponding to the normal time-saving game state shown in FIG. 38, and for the second time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state, various controls are performed using a table corresponding to the special time-saving game state shown in FIG. 38, making this state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Therefore, basically, different effects (effect modes, etc.) are executed from the normal game state, and different effects (effect modes, etc.) are executed between each time-saving game state.

On the other hand, for the third time-saving gaming state, various controls are performed using a table corresponding to the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 38, except that the probability of winning the winning judgment is 1.05 times higher than in the normal gaming state, and since the game transitions to the normal gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, the state is the same as the normal gaming state or more disadvantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Therefore, the same presentation (presentation mode, etc.) as in the normal gaming state is basically executed.

In this way, the third time-saving game state is set to be the same as the normal game state or to be less favorable to the player than the normal game state. Therefore, even though it is a time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state can be played as if it were a normal game state, and the game performance of the time-saving game state can be diversified, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the first special miss is won in the normal game state, the game transitions to a second time-saving game state in which the second special miss is invalidated, and furthermore, in the normal game state, the probability of winning the first special miss is higher than the probability of winning the jackpot. This increases the players' desire to play after the game arcade opens, making it possible to improve operation immediately after the game arcade opens, and increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the third time-saving game state, the same effects (effect modes, etc.) as in the normal game state are executed. Therefore, even though it is a time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state can be played as if it were a normal game state, and the game performance of the time-saving game state can be diversified, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the third time-saving game state, when the second starting hole 47 is not open, the image display device may not notify the player of a right hit, but may support a win in the second starting hole 47 by notifying the player of a right hit when the second starting hole 47 opens or while it is open. In this way, the right hit notification can let the player know that the third time-saving game state is being played, and the player is less likely to incur losses, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the third time-saving game state, a special presentation mode that is not set in the normal game state may be set when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when the second starting hole 47 opens and a right-hit notification is made, or when the number of times this occurs reaches a predetermined number), or when an event that is undesirable to the player, such as a reach presentation being a miss, occurs a predetermined number of times. In this way, a presentation that reflects the results of the game can be produced, making the game more interesting.

(Content 1 of the invention described in this embodiment)
◆Here, in conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a big win game advantageous to a player based on the judgment information obtained based on the winning of a gaming medium in the starting area, and to execute a game presentation according to the result of the judgment. Among such gaming machines, there are some that have a movable body (a starting opening opening/closing member, a big winning opening opening/closing member, a specific area opening/closing member, etc.) that operates with a driving source (solenoid, etc.) controlled by a main control board, and operate the movable body by operating the driving source according to the progress of the game (for example, see JP 2018-118109 A). However, in such gaming machines, there is a problem that it is difficult to check the operation of the driving source controlled by the main control means when the gaming machine 1 (including the case of only the gaming board 5 or only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or when it is replaced at a gaming store (including replacement of only the gaming board 5 or only the board unit 500).

◆The first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, which includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and movable bodies (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large prize opening opening/closing member 57) that are operated by drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening opening solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) controlled by the main control means, and the main control means can initialize (ON⇔OFF) the drive sources in a predetermined manner in the pre-start state (during initial setting processing) from when power supply is started until the control of the progress of the game is started. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive sources controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, comprising a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and movable bodies (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large prize opening opening/closing member 57) operated by drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) controlled by the main control means, and and a value imparting means (main control board 110, payout control board 120) capable of imparting prize value (prize balls, prize ball data) based on the establishment of a given condition (entry of game balls into the prize slot, start slot, or large prize slot). The main control means can initialize (ON⇔OFF) the drive source in a predetermined manner in the pre-start state (during initial setting processing) from when power supply is started until control of the progress of the game begins, and in the pre-start state, the awarding of the prize value by the value imparting means is invalid. This makes it easy to check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, which includes a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and movable bodies (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large prize opening opening/closing member 57) operated by drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) controlled by the main control means, and the main control means controls the start condition Based on the establishment of the above (entry of a game ball into the starting hole or normal gate), the display means (special pattern display, normal pattern display) displays a varying pattern, and it is possible to execute advantageous games (special games, auxiliary games) by operating the drive source according to the result of the varying display, and in the pre-start state (during initial setting processing) from when power supply is started until control of the progress of the game begins, it is possible to initialize (ON⇔OFF) the drive source in a predetermined manner, and in the pre-start state, the execution of the varying display and the execution of the advantageous games are regulated. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and movable bodies (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large prize opening opening/closing member 57) operated by drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening opening solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) controlled by the main control means, and the main control means controls the drive sources to initial operation (ON) in a predetermined manner. The device has an initial operation means capable of turning the power on and off (OFF), and an information display means capable of calculating specific information (normal base value) based on game results (number of payouts during normal play, number of outs during normal play) and displaying the specific information on an information display means (performance display monitor), and the initial operation is performed by the initial operation means in a pre-start state (during initial setting processing) from when power supply is started until control of the progress of the game is started, and the display of the specific information by the information display means is restricted during the execution of the initial operation. This makes it easy to check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of playing games, which comprises a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, movable bodies (second start opening/closing member 48, first large winning opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large winning opening opening/closing member 57) operated by drive sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large winning opening opening opening solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large winning opening opening opening solenoid 57b) controlled by the main control means, and value granting means (main control board 110, payout control board 120) capable of granting prize value (prize balls, prize ball data) based on the establishment of a granting condition (entry of game balls into the winning opening, start opening, or large winning opening). ), and in the pre-start state (during initial setting processing) from when power supply is started to when control of the game progress is started, the awarding of the prize value by the value awarding means is invalidated, and the main control means has an initial operation means capable of initializing the drive source in a predetermined manner (ON⇔OFF), and an information display means capable of calculating specific information (normal base value) based on game results (normal payout number, normal out number) and displaying the specific information on an information display means (performance display monitor), and in the pre-start state, the initial operation by the initial operation means is executed, and during the execution of the initial operation, the display of the specific information by the information display means is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the game progress.

◆A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, which includes a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and movable bodies (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large prize opening opening/closing member 57) operated by a drive source (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) controlled by the main control means, and the main control means includes a variable display means capable of executing a variable display of patterns on a display means (special pattern display, normal pattern display) based on the establishment of a start condition (a game ball entering the start opening or normal gate), and a variable display means for operating the drive source according to the result of the variable display. The game device has an advantageous game means capable of executing advantageous games (small win games, big win games) that are generated by the player, an initial operation means capable of initializing the drive source in a predetermined manner (ON⇔OFF), and an information display means capable of calculating specific information (normal base value) based on game results (normal payout number, normal out number) and displaying the specific information on an information display means (performance display monitor). In a pre-start state (during initial setting processing) from when power supply is started until control of the progress of the game is started, the initial operation is executed by the initial operation means, and during the execution of the initial operation, the execution of the variable display by the variable display means, the execution of the advantageous game by the advantageous game means, and the display of the specific information by the information display means are restricted. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

(Content 2 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, in conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines that determine whether or not to execute a special game or a specific game advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a starting condition. Among such gaming machines, there are some that execute a special game based on the fact that a gaming medium passes through a specific area provided inside a winning device during the execution of a specific game (for example, see JP 2018-057968 A). However, such gaming machines have a problem in that the interest of the game is low.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means for determining whether to execute a special game (jackpot game) or a specific game (small jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a start condition (entry of a game ball into a start hole), a game state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state, a prize-winning device (large prize winning hole) that changes the game medium from a state in which it is difficult to win a prize to a state in which it is easy to win a prize during the execution of the specific game, and a special game execution means for executing the special game based on the game medium passing through a specific area (specific area 53) provided inside the prize-winning device during the execution of the specific game, and it is possible to perform a predetermined process (such as a process for setting game conditions after a jackpot game) based on the game state when the game medium passes through the specific area during the execution of the specific game. By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a start condition (a game ball entering a start hole), and a game state control means that can control between a normal game state and a specific game state (a time-saving game state, ST state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and the determination means has a first determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start hole) and a second determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start hole). The special games include a first special game (e.g., a first jackpot game, a third jackpot game) and a second special game (e.g., a second jackpot game) that is more advantageous than the first special game, and when the first determination means determines that the special game is to be executed, either the first special game or the second special game can be executed, and the specific game state includes a specific game state (normal time-saving game state) that is controlled via the special game, and a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is controlled without via the special game. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big win game, small win game) that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a start condition (entry of a game ball into a start hole), a game state control means capable of controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state, a prize-winning device (big prize winning hole) that changes the game medium from a state in which it is difficult to win a prize to a state in which it is easy to win a prize while the special game is being played, and a game state determination means capable of determining the game state to be controlled thereafter based on the game medium passing through a specific area (specific area 53) provided inside the prize-winning device while the special game is being played. By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game, small jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a start condition (entry of a game ball into a start hole), and a game state control means capable of controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and the determination means has a first determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of a first start condition (entry of a game ball into a first start hole) and a second determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of a second start condition (entry of a game ball into a second start hole), and the special games include a first special game (e.g., a third jackpot game) and a second special game (e.g., a first jackpot game) that is more advantageous than the first special game. The determination results of the determination means include a first result (jackpot) and a second result (small jackpot) different from the first result. When the first determination means determines the first result (jackpot), either the first special game or the second special game can be executed. The specific game state includes a first specific game state (a normal time-saving game state in which the second time-saving number is set to 7 times: Battle mode) that is controlled after the end of the first special game, and a second specific game state (a normal time-saving game state in which the second time-saving number is set to 55 times: Ranbu mode, a normal time-saving game state in which the second time-saving number is set to 95 times: Ranbu mode) that is controlled after the end of the second special game. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem includes a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game, small jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a start condition (a game ball entering a start port), and a game state control means capable of controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and the judgment means has a first judgment means for making a judgment based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start port) and a second judgment means for making a judgment based on the establishment of a start condition (a game ball entering a second start port), and the special game includes a first special game (e.g., a third jackpot game) and a second special game that is more advantageous than the first special game. There are a first special game (e.g., a second V jackpot game) and a third special game (e.g., a fourth jackpot game, a fifth jackpot game) that is more advantageous than the second special game, and the judgment results of the judgment means include a first result (jackpot) and a second result (small jackpot) that is different from the first result. When the first judgment means judges the first result (jackpot), either the first special game or the second special game can be executed, when the second judgment means judges the second result (small jackpot), the second special game can be executed, and when the second judgment means judges the first result (jackpot), the third special game can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A sixth configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game, small jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a start condition (entry of a game ball into a start hole), and a game state control means capable of controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and the determination means has a first determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of a first start condition (entry of a game ball into a first start hole) and a second determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of a second start condition (entry of a game ball into a second start hole), and the special games include a first special game (e.g., a third jackpot game) and a special game that is more advantageous than the first special game. There is a second special game (e.g., a second V jackpot game) that is more advantageous than the first special game, and a third special game (e.g., a fourth jackpot game, a fifth jackpot game) that is more advantageous than the second special game, and the judgment results of the judgment means include a first result (jackpot) and a second result (small jackpot) that is different from the first result, and in the specific game state (Ranbu mode, Choranbu mode) controlled after the second special game is executed, if the second judgment means judges the first result (jackpot), the third special game can be executed, and if the second judgment means judges the second result (small jackpot), the second special game can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A seventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game, small jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a start condition (entry of a game ball into a start hole), and a game state control means capable of controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and the judgment means has a first judgment means for making a judgment based on the establishment of a first start condition (entry of a game ball into a first start hole) and a second judgment means for making a judgment based on the establishment of a second start condition (entry of a game ball into a second start hole), and the special game includes a first special game (e.g., a third jackpot game) and the first special game. There is a second special game (e.g., a second V jackpot game) that is more advantageous than the first game, and a third special game (e.g., a fourth jackpot game, a fifth jackpot game) that is more advantageous than the second special game, and the judgment results of the judgment means include a first result (jackpot) and a second result (small jackpot) that is different from the first result, and in the specific game state (infinite mode) controlled after the third special game is executed, if the second judgment means judges the first result (jackpot), the third special game can be executed, and if the second judgment means judges the second result (small jackpot), the second special game can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game, small jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a start condition (a game ball entering a start hole), a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the determination of the determination means, a game state control means capable of controlling to a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and a presentation control means capable of controlling to a first presentation mode (presentation modes A to C) and a second presentation mode (countdown mode) different from the first presentation mode, and the determination means has a first determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start hole) and a second determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start hole), and the special The separate games include a first special game (e.g., a third jackpot game) and a second special game (e.g., a first jackpot game, a third jackpot game, a fourth jackpot game, a fifth jackpot game) that is more advantageous than the first special game, and the game state control means can control the specific game state until a predetermined number of variable displays are executed after the special game ends, and the specific game state includes a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) that is controlled via the special game, and a second specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is controlled without going through the special game, and the presentation control means controls from the first presentation mode (any of presentation modes A to C) to the second presentation mode (countdown mode) when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times) before the control to the second specific game state. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Content 3 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, in conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines that determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a starting condition. Among such gaming machines, there are some that control a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to a player than a normal gaming state after the special game ends (for example, see JP 2018-057968 A). However, such gaming machines have a problem in that the interest of the game is low.

◆A first configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display of a pattern based on the determination result of the determination means, a special game execution means capable of executing the special game based on the determination result of the determination means, and a game state control means capable of controlling the game state to a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and the special games include a first special game (second jackpot game, fourth jackpot game, fifth jackpot game, second V jackpot game) and a second special game (second V jackpot game). and a second special game (first jackpot game, third jackpot game, first V jackpot game, third V jackpot game) different from the first special game, and the game state control means is capable of ending the specific game state based on the execution of a predetermined number of the variable displays, and when the first special game is executed, the number of the variable displays that end the specific game state does not change regardless of the game state before the execution of the first special game, and when the second special game is executed, the number of the variable displays that end the specific game state can be changed depending on the game state before the execution of the second special game. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a specific game (small win game) advantageous to the player, a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display of patterns based on the determination result of the determination means, and a game state control means capable of control between a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and the game state control means is capable of ending the specific game state based on the number of times it has been determined that the specific game will be executed in the specific game state reaching a predetermined number. By doing this, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display of a pattern based on the result of the determination, a special game execution means capable of executing the special game based on the result of the determination, a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and a presentation control means capable of controlling the presentation of the game, and the game state control means is capable of ending the specific game state based on the establishment of an ending condition (the remaining number of small wins becomes "0") during the specific game state, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a mode presentation (display of various background images, remaining number display "???", "maybe a big win will be wild?) according to the game state, and in the specific game state, information related to the ending condition (remaining number of small wins) is not clearly notified, but the mode presentation can suggest information related to the ending condition. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display of a pattern based on the result of the determination, a special game execution means capable of executing the special game based on the result of the determination, a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and a presentation control means capable of controlling the presentation of the game, and the game state control means is configured to determine whether or not a first end condition (a second time-saving number ( The specific game state can be ended based on the establishment of a second ending condition (the first number of time-saving times (J1), the third number of time-saving times (J3), the remaining number of small wins, etc. becoming "0") or the establishment of a second ending condition (the first number of time-saving times (J1), the third number of time-saving times (J3), the remaining number of small wins, etc. becoming "0"), and the presentation control means can notify information related to the first ending condition (the second number of time-saving times) during the specific game state, while restricting the presentation of information related to the second ending condition (the first number of time-saving times, the third number of time-saving times, the remaining number of small wins, etc.) (the number of times is not announced but is suggested by the mode presentation, or is not suggested even by the mode presentation). By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem includes an acquisition means capable of acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into the start hole), a judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a specific game (small win game) advantageous to the player based on the judgment information, a storage means capable of storing the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, a specific game execution means capable of executing the specific game based on the result of the judgment, a game state control means capable of controlling the game state to a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and a presentation control means capable of controlling the presentation of the game, and the storage means stores the judgment information acquired based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into the first start hole 45) in a first The game state control means is capable of ending the specific game state when the number of times it is determined that the specific game will be executed in the specific game state reaches a predetermined number (remaining number of small wins (Z) = 0), and the presentation control means is capable of displaying an end indication image (result display, shutter image) of the specific game state when the specific game state ends, and when the specific game that is the predetermined number of times ends, the display period of the end indication screen can be changed depending on whether the second reservation memory is present or not. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A sixth configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, a special game execution means capable of executing the special game based on the result of the determination, a game state control means capable of controlling the game to a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and a presentation control means capable of executing a variable presentation according to the result of the determination, and the specific game state is a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) controlled via the special game, and a second specific game state (first special The effect control means is capable of executing a suggestive effect (time-saving suggestive effect) that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the second specific game state during the execution of the variable effect, and the predetermined variable effect (shortened variable, no-reach miss variable, etc.) that notifies the non-execution of the special game has an execution period of the suggestive effect but no non-execution period of the suggestive effect, and the predetermined variable effect (jackpot variable) that notifies the execution of the special game has an execution period of the suggestive effect (before the SP reach) and a non-execution period of the suggestive effect (during the SP/SPSP reach, etc.). By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A seventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, a special game execution means capable of executing the special game based on the result of the determination, a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and a presentation control means capable of executing a variable presentation according to the result of the determination, the specific game state including a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) controlled via the special game and a second specific game state (first special time-saving game state, etc.) controlled without going through the special game, and the variable presentation includes a control means for controlling the execution of the special game, The game includes a first variable performance in which a first specific performance (N reach) that creates the expectation of a special game is executed, and a second variable performance in which a second specific performance (SP/SPSP reach, etc.) that has a higher expectation of the special game being executed than the first specific performance is executed, and the performance control means is capable of executing a suggestive performance (time-saving suggestive performance) that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the second specific game state during the execution of the variable performance, and the first variable performance has a period in which the suggestive performance is executed but no period in which the suggestive performance is not executed, and the second variable performance has a period in which the suggestive performance is executed (before the SP reach) and a period in which the suggestive performance is not executed (SP/SPSP reach, etc.). This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem includes an acquisition means capable of acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into a starting hole), a judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the judgment information, a storage means capable of storing the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as reserved memory, a special game execution means capable of executing the special game based on the result of the judgment, a game state control means capable of controlling the game state to a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and a presentation control means capable of executing a variable presentation according to the result of the judgment, and the specific game state is a state where the game state is changed via the special game. The game includes a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) controlled by the special game, and a second specific game state (first special time-saving game state, etc.) controlled without going through the special game, and the variable presentation includes a specific variable presentation in which a specific presentation (development presentation, SP/SPSP reach presentation) that gives the player hope for the execution of the special game is executed, and the presentation control means is capable of displaying pending information (pending icons) according to the number of pending memories, and during the execution of the variable presentation, a suggestive presentation (time-saving suggestive presentation) that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the second specific game state is executed, and during the execution of the specific presentation, the pending information is hidden, but the suggestive presentation can be executed continuously. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A ninth configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, a special game execution means capable of executing the special game based on the result of the determination, a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and a presentation control means capable of executing a variable presentation according to the result of the determination, the specific game state including a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) controlled via the special game and a second specific game state (first special time-saving game state, etc.) controlled without going through the special game, and the variable presentation control means The effects include specific variable effects in which specific effects (development effects, SP/SPSP reach effects) that raise expectations of the execution of the special game are executed, and the effect control means is capable of executing suggestive effects (time-saving suggestive effects) that suggest the possibility of being controlled to the second specific game state during the execution of the variable effects, and the specific variable effects during the normal game state have an execution period of the suggestive effects (before the SP reach) and a non-execution period of the suggestive effects (during the SP/SPSP reach), and the specific variable effects during the first specific game state do not have an execution period of the suggestive effects, but do have a non-execution period of the suggestive effects (entire period). This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, a special game execution means capable of executing the special game based on the result of the determination, a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and a presentation control means capable of executing a variable presentation according to the result of the determination, the specific game state including a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) controlled via the special game and a second specific game state (first special time-saving game state, etc.) controlled without going through the special game, and the variable presentation includes a specific presentation (advanced presentation) that gives the player hope of executing the special game. There is a specific variation presentation in which a special game is played (a special game play, a special time-saving game play, or a special time-saving game play), and the presentation control means is capable of executing a first suggestion presentation (a look-ahead presentation) that suggests in advance that the special game will be played, and a second suggestion presentation (a look-ahead presentation, a presentation for entering a first special time-saving game state, etc.) that suggests in advance that the game will be controlled to the second specific game state. When the special game is played, the first suggestion presentation can be executed even before the specified period (e.g., one variation) during which the special game is played, and when the game is controlled to the second specific game state, the execution of the second suggestion presentation is restricted before the specified period during which the game is controlled to the second specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the result of the determination, a special game execution means for executing the special game when the variable display results in a special result, a game state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and a presentation control means for controlling the presentation of the game, and the specific game state is a state that is different from the previous state. The game state control means includes a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) that is controlled via the special game, and a second specific game state (first special time-saving game state) that is controlled without going through the special game, and the game state control means is capable of controlling the game state to the second specific game state for a predetermined period of time when the variable display that appears a predetermined number of times after the first condition is met (RWM clear) is a miss, and when the variable display that appears a predetermined number of times after the second condition is met (end of jackpot game) is a miss. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A twelfth configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the result of the determination, a special game execution means for executing the special game when the variable display results in a special result, a game state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and a presentation control means for controlling the presentation of the game, and the specific game state is a first specific game state controlled via the special game. The game state control means includes a special game state (normal time-saving game state) and a second specific game state (second special time-saving game state, etc.) that is controlled without going through the special game, and the game state control means can control the game state to the first specific game state for a first period (e.g., 7 times, 55 times, 95 times, 496 times) from the end of the special game, and when the variable display is a second failure result (specific failure result) different from the first failure result (normal failure result), it can control the game state to the second specific game state for a second period (e.g., 10 times) different from the first period. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the result of the determination, a special game execution means for executing the special game when the variable display results in a special result, a game state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and a presentation control means for controlling the presentation of the game, and the specific game state includes a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) and the first specific game state. and a second specific game state (first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state) different from the skill state, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a specific presentation (entry presentation) when controlled to the second specific game state, and if the first variable display after control to the second specific game state results in a miss, the specific presentation can be executed during the execution of the variable display, and if the first variable display after control to the second specific game state results in a special result, execution of the specific presentation during the execution of the variable display is restricted. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the result of the determination, a special game execution means for executing the special game when the variable display results in a special result, a game state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and a presentation control means for controlling the presentation of the game, and the specific game state includes a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) and a second specific game state (normal time-saving game state). state) and a second specific game state (first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state) different from the first specific game state, and the variable display execution means is capable of performing the variable display using different variable patterns in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, and is capable of performing the variable display using different variable patterns in the specific period after the end of the first specific game state (the consumption period of the remaining reserved second special symbols) and the specific period after the end of the second specific game state (the consumption period of the remaining reserved second special symbols). By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the result of the determination, a special game execution means for executing the special game when the variable display results in a special result, a game state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and a presentation control means for controlling the presentation of the game, and the specific game state includes a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) and a second specific game state (normal time-saving game state). state) and a second specific game state (first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state) different from the first specific game state, and the variable display execution means is capable of performing the variable display using different variable patterns in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, and is capable of performing the variable display using the same variable pattern in the specific period after the end of the first specific game state (the consumption period of the remaining reserved second special symbols) and the specific period after the end of the second specific game state (the consumption period of the remaining reserved second special symbols). By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a first determination means capable of executing a first determination (jackpot determination) based on the establishment of a first condition (entry of a game ball into a start hole), a first variable display execution means for executing a variable display of a first pattern (special pattern) based on the result of the first determination, a second determination means capable of executing a second determination (win determination) based on the establishment of a second condition (passage of a game ball into a normal pattern gate), a second variable display execution means for executing a variable display of a second pattern (normal pattern) based on the result of the second determination, a special game execution means for executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player when the variable display of the first pattern becomes a special result (jackpot outcome), and a normal game state and a normal game state. The game state control means includes a game state control means capable of controlling the game state to a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the first specific game state, and a presentation control means capable of controlling the presentation of the game, and the specific game state includes a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) and a second specific game state (first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state) different from the first specific game state, and the first variable display execution means is capable of performing the variable display of the first pattern using a different variable pattern in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, and the second variable display execution means is capable of performing the variable display of the second pattern using a different variable pattern in the first specific game state and the second specific game state. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a first judgment means capable of executing a first judgment (jackpot judgment) based on the establishment of a first condition (entry of a game ball into a start hole), a first variable display execution means for executing a variable display of a first pattern (special pattern) based on the result of the first judgment, a special game execution means for executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player when the variable display of the first pattern becomes a special result (jackpot outcome), a second judgment means capable of executing a second judgment (win judgment) based on the establishment of a second condition (passage of a game ball into a normal gate), a second variable display execution means for executing a variable display of a second pattern (normal pattern) based on the result of the second judgment, and a normal game state and a normal game state. The game state control means includes a game state control means capable of controlling a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the skill state, and a presentation control means capable of controlling the presentation of the game, and the specific game state includes a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) and a second specific game state (first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state) different from the first specific game state, and the first variable display execution means is capable of performing the variable display of the first symbol using different variable patterns in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, and the second variable display execution means is capable of performing the variable display of the second symbol using the same variable pattern in the first specific game state and the second specific game state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The 18th configuration for solving the above problem includes a first judgment means capable of executing a first judgment (jackpot) based on the entry of a gaming medium into a first starting area (starting gate), a first variable display execution means for executing a variable display of a first pattern (special pattern) based on the result of the first judgment, a special game execution means for executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player when the variable display of the first pattern becomes a special result (jackpot outcome), a second judgment means capable of executing a second judgment (win judgment) based on the entry of a gaming medium into a second starting area (normal gate), a second variable display execution means for executing a variable display of a second pattern (normal pattern) based on the result of the second judgment, and an auxiliary game for controlling the second starting area from a closed state to an open state when the variable display of the second pattern becomes a specific result (win outcome). The game device includes an auxiliary game execution means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, a game state control means capable of controlling the game presentation, and the specific game state includes a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) and a second specific game state (first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state) different from the first specific game state, the first variable display execution means is capable of performing a variable display of the first pattern using different variable patterns in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, and the auxiliary game execution means is capable of controlling the second starting area from a closed state to an open state in different opening modes (opening time, number of openings) in the first specific game state and the second specific game state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A 19th configuration for solving the above problem includes a first judgment means capable of executing a first judgment (jackpot judgment) based on the entry of a gaming medium into a first starting area (starting gate), a first variable display execution means for executing a variable display of a first pattern (special pattern) based on the result of the first judgment, a special game execution means for executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player when the variable display of the first pattern becomes a special result (jackpot outcome), a second judgment means capable of executing a second judgment (win judgment) based on the entry of a gaming medium into a second starting area (normal gate), a second variable display execution means for executing a variable display of a second pattern (normal pattern) based on the result of the second judgment, and an auxiliary game for controlling the second starting area from a closed state to an open state when the variable display of the second pattern becomes a specific result (win outcome). The game machine includes an auxiliary game execution means capable of executing an auxiliary game, a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and a presentation control means capable of controlling the presentation of the game, and the specific game state includes a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) and a second specific game state (first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state) different from the first specific game state, the first variable display execution means is capable of performing a variable display of the first pattern using different variable patterns in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, and the auxiliary game execution means is capable of controlling the second starting area from a closed state to an open state with the same opening mode (opening time, number of openings) in the first specific game state and the second specific game state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The 20th configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of a pattern (special pattern) based on the result of the determination, a special game execution means for executing the special game when the variable display becomes a special result (jackpot outcome), a game state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and a presentation control means for controlling the presentation of the game, and the specific game state is a specific game state (normal time-saving game state) that is controlled for a predetermined period via the special game, and the special game state is a specific game state (normal time-saving game state) that is controlled for a predetermined period via the special game, and the special game state is a specific game state (normal time-saving game state) that is controlled for a predetermined period via the special game. and a specific game state (first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state) that is controlled for a predetermined period of time without going through another game, and the presentation control means is capable of displaying a game result (result display) showing the results of the game during the predetermined period (a series of advantageous periods) when the specific game state ends, and if the special game is not executed during the specific game state that does not go through the special game and the specific game state ends, the game result is not displayed, and if the special game is executed during the specific game state that does not go through the special game and the controlled specific game state ends after the special game ends, the game result is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A twenty-first configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, a special game execution means capable of executing the special game based on the result of the determination, a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and a presentation control means capable of controlling the presentation of the game, and the game state control means is configured to control a first end condition (the second time-saving number of times (J2) becomes "0") or a second end condition (the number of remaining small jackpot times) in the specific game state. The specific gaming state can be ended based on the establishment of the first ending condition (the number (Z) becomes "0"), and the presentation control means can display a game result (result display) showing the results of the game during a predetermined period (a series of advantageous periods) when the specific gaming state ends, and when the specific gaming state ends due to the establishment of the first ending condition, the game result can be displayed, and when the specific gaming state ends due to the establishment of the second ending condition, the display of the game result is restricted. In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A 22nd configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, a special game execution means capable of executing the special game based on the result of the determination, a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and a presentation control means capable of executing a variable presentation that causes a presentation pattern to be displayed variably on a display means according to the result of the determination, and the game state control means is capable of controlling the specific game state for a predetermined period of time, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation that causes a presentation pattern to be displayed variably on a display means according to the result of the determination, The control means is capable of displaying an end suggestion screen (result display, shutter image) for the specific game state when the specific game state ends, and continuing to display the end suggestion screen until a predetermined number of the change effects are executed after the specific game state ends, and the execution time (change time + stop time) of the predetermined change effect (miss change of only small symbols) performed while the end suggestion screen is displayed after the specific game state ends is shorter than the execution time (change time + stop time) of the predetermined change effect (change including the effect symbol) in the specific game state. By doing this, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆The 23rd configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a special game execution means capable of executing the special game based on the result of the determination, a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and a presentation control means capable of controlling the presentation of the game, the specific game state including a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) and a second specific game state (first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state) different from the first specific game state, the presentation control means capable of controlling a plurality of presentation modes, and it is possible to differentiate the presentation mode (post-post dedicated mode) to which the first specific game state is transitioned from the presentation mode (presentation mode A) to which the second specific game state is transitioned upon the end of the second specific game state. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A 24th configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the winning of a gaming medium into a start area provided in the gaming area, a special game execution means capable of executing the special game based on the result of the determination, a gaming state control means capable of controlling the normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the normal gaming state, and a presentation control means capable of controlling the presentation of the game, and the specific gaming state is a first specific gaming state (first special time-saving gaming state) and a second specific gaming state different from the first specific gaming state. The first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) and the presentation control means are capable of issuing an instruction notification (displaying a left-hit image, outputting a left-hit voice) to launch the game medium at a specific position (left side) of the game area, and when the first specific game state ends, the instruction notification can be executed after a specific period (the consumption period of the remaining reserved second special symbol) has elapsed since the end of the first specific game state, and when the second specific game state ends, the instruction notification can be executed before the specific period has elapsed since the end of the second specific game state. By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A 25th configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the winning of a gaming medium in a start area provided in the gaming area, a special game execution means capable of executing the special game based on the result of the determination, a gaming state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the normal gaming state, and a presentation control means capable of controlling the presentation of the game, and the specific gaming state is a first specific gaming state (first special time-saving gaming state) and a second specific gaming state different from the first specific gaming state. The first specific game state includes a second specific game state (normal time-saving game state), and the presentation control means is capable of issuing an instruction notification (displaying a left-hit image, outputting a left-hit voice) to launch the game medium at a specific position (left side) of the game area, and when the first specific game state ends, the presentation control means is capable of issuing the instruction notification at one of a plurality of timings (timings according to the remaining reserved number of second special symbols), and when the second specific game state ends, the presentation control means is capable of issuing the instruction notification at timing 1 (immediately after the stop time of the presentation symbol has elapsed). This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A 26th configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the entry of a gaming medium into a start area (start hole) provided in the gaming area, a special game execution means capable of executing the special game based on the result of the determination, a gaming state control means capable of controlling the normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the normal gaming state, and a presentation control means capable of controlling the presentation of the game, the gaming state control means being capable of controlling the specific gaming state for a predetermined period of time and then controlling the normal gaming state, and the presentation control means being capable of controlling the normal gaming state after the specific gaming state has been controlled, In the normal game state, it is possible to execute a preview effect (pre-reading effect, big win preview effect, etc.) that suggests the possibility of the special game being executed, and it is possible to execute an instruction notification (display of a left-hit image, output of a left-hit voice) to launch the game medium at a specific position (left side) of the game area, and when the specific game state ends, it is possible to execute the instruction notification after a specific period (the consumption period of the remaining reserved second special symbol) has elapsed since the end of the specific game state, and the execution of the preview effect executed in the normal game state is restricted during the period from the end of the specific game state to the execution of the instruction notification. By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A 27th configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the entry of a gaming medium into a start area (starting hole) provided in the gaming area, a special game execution means capable of executing the special game based on the result of the determination, a gaming state control means capable of controlling the normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the normal gaming state, and a presentation control means capable of controlling the presentation of the game, and the gaming state control means is capable of controlling the specific gaming state for a predetermined period of time and then controlling the normal gaming state, The output control means can control multiple presentation modes, can execute an instruction notification (display of a left-hit image, output of a left-hit voice) to launch the gaming medium at a specific position (left side) in the gaming area, and when the specific gaming state ends, can execute the instruction notification after a specific period (the consumption period of the remaining reserved second special symbol) has elapsed since the end of the specific gaming state, and is configured to limit control to a predetermined presentation mode (initial presentation mode of the normal gaming state, a mode of the look-ahead zone, etc.) during the period from the end of the specific gaming state to the execution of the instruction notification. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A 28th configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, a special game execution means capable of executing the special game based on the result of the determination, a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (first special time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and a presentation control means capable of controlling the presentation of the game, and the game state control means controls the specific game state for a predetermined period of time when the number of times it has been determined that the special game will not be executed since the establishment of a predetermined condition (RAM clear, end of a jackpot) reaches a predetermined number of times. It is possible to control the specific game state to a special game state, and control to the specific game state again is restricted between the end of the specific game state and the execution of the special game, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a specific notification (displaying the number of games "???" and flashing the error lamp in a specific manner) that suggests that the specific game state has been executed, and the specific notification includes a first specific notification (displaying the number of games "???") and a second specific notification (flashing the error lamp in a specific manner), and the first specific notification and the second specific notification can be executed in the normal game state after the end of the specific game state. By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A 29th configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, a special game execution means capable of executing the special game based on the result of the determination, a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (first special time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and a presentation control means capable of controlling the presentation of the game, and the game state control means controls the number of times that it has been determined not to execute the special game from the establishment of a predetermined condition (RAM clear, end of a jackpot) to a predetermined specific number of times. When the specific game state is ended, it is possible to control the specific game state for a predetermined period of time, and control to the specific game state again is restricted from the period from the end of the specific game state until the special game is executed, and when a power outage that occurred in the normal game state after the end of the specific game state is restored, the presentation control means is capable of executing a first notification indicating that the power has been restored from the power outage (displaying a restoration screen, outputting a restoration sound) and a second notification indicating that the specific game state has been executed (displaying the number of games "???", flashing an error lamp in a specific manner). By doing this, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A 30th configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, a special game execution means capable of executing the special game based on the result of the determination, a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, an initialization means for initializing the game control state if a predetermined condition is met at the start of power supply, a recovery means for restoring the game control state to the state before the power outage occurred if the initialization is not performed, and a presentation control means for controlling the presentation of the game, and the specific game state is a first specific game state controlled for a predetermined period via the special game. The system includes a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) and a second specific game state (first special time-saving game state) that is controlled for a predetermined period of time without going through the special game, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a specific presentation (RWM clear denial presentation, setting change suggestion presentation, etc.) related to the presence or absence of the initialization, and if a power interruption occurs during the normal game state after the end of the first specific game state and the power supply is subsequently resumed and the game control state is restored, the specific presentation can be executed, and if a power interruption occurs during the normal game state after the end of the second specific game state and the power supply is subsequently resumed and the game control state is restored, the execution of the specific presentation is restricted. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A thirty-first configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, a special game execution means capable of executing the special game based on the result of the determination, a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, an initialization means for initializing the game control state if a predetermined condition is met at the start of power supply, a restoration means for restoring the game control state to the state before the power outage occurred if the initialization is not performed, and a presentation control means for controlling the presentation of the game, and the specific game state is a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) controlled for a predetermined period via the special game, and a second specific game state (normal time-saving game state) controlled for a predetermined period without via the special game. The presentation control means is capable of controlling the first presentation mode (presentation mode A) and the second presentation mode (presentation mode B) in the normal game state, and is capable of executing a specific presentation (RWM clear denial presentation, setting change suggestion presentation, etc.) related to the presence or absence of the initialization, and is capable of executing the specific presentation when a power interruption occurs in the second presentation mode after the end of the first specific game state and the power supply is subsequently resumed and the presentation is controlled to the first presentation mode, and is configured to restrict the execution of the specific presentation when a power interruption occurs in the second presentation mode after the end of the second specific game state and the power supply is subsequently resumed and the presentation is controlled to the first presentation mode. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The 32nd configuration for solving the above problem includes an acquisition means capable of acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into a starting hole), a judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the judgment information, a storage means capable of storing the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as pending memory, a game state control means capable of controlling the game state between a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and a presentation control means capable of executing a variable presentation according to the result of the judgment, and the storage means is configured to acquire a special game state based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into a first starting hole), The obtained judgment information is stored as a first reserved memory, and the judgment information obtained based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into the second starting hole) is stored as a second reserved memory, the judgment means judges the judgment information of the second reserved memory in priority to the first reserved memory in the normal game state, the presentation control means is capable of executing a specific presentation (icon change presentation, look-ahead presentation such as look-ahead zone presentation) that gives the expectation of the execution of the special game over one or more variable presentations, and when the second acquisition condition is established during the execution of the specific presentation that started based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, it is possible to end the specific presentation. In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed simultaneously (in parallel), and the second special symbol is displayed preferentially. However, the gaming machine may be configured to display the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously (in parallel), or the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be displayed in the order of the winning balls entering the first start hole 45 and the second start hole 47.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured not to generate a probability variable game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in the normal game state after the end of a jackpot game, but a probability variable game state may be generated depending on the type of special jackpot pattern. In this case, a process may be performed to generate a probability variable game state on the condition that the game ball passes through a specific area 53 provided inside the first large prize opening 50 in a specific round of play during a jackpot game (for example, the second round of play or the final round of play), or a process may be performed to determine the number of variable displays that will result in a probability variable game state based on the game state when the game ball passes through the specific area 53.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used in a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine) that can award a player a predetermined amount of prize medals (prize medal data) when a winning symbol is displayed stopped on an active line by playing with medals (gaming media) (satisfying the awarding conditions). Furthermore, it can also be used in a Jankyu gaming machine or an Arrange Ball gaming machine.

Furthermore, the embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

1 Gaming machine 5 Gaming board 44 Regular map gate 45 First start gate 47 Second start gate 50 First big prize gate 56 Second big prize gate 70 First image display device 71 Second image display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Performance control board 130a Sub-CPU

Claims (1)

A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the winning of a game medium in a first starting area or an openable second starting area provided in the game area;
a special game execution means for executing the special game when the variable display of the symbols executed based on the result of the judgment becomes a special result ;
a game state control means capable of controlling the game state to a predetermined game state in which the special game is not being executed and a specific game state different from the predetermined game state;
A performance control means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the judgment,
The specific gaming state is:
A first specific game state controlled via the special game;
A second specific game state that is controlled without going through the special game;
A third specific game state that is controlled without going through the special game,
When the variable display is a second losing result different from the first losing result, it is possible to control the third specific game state for a predetermined period of time,
The third specific game state is a game state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting area than in the first specific game state and the second specific game state,
The performance control means includes:
During the execution of the variable performance, it is possible to execute a suggestion performance that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the second specific game state,
In the predetermined period of the predetermined variable performance in which the suggestive performance is executed and the non-execution of the special game is notified, there is a period during which the suggestive performance is executed, but there is no period during which the suggestive performance is not executed,
The predetermined period of the predetermined variable performance in which the suggestive performance is executed and the execution of the special game is notified includes an execution period of the suggestive performance and a non-execution period of the suggestive performance,
The performance control means includes:
In the specific game state , it is possible to execute a launch suggestion notification that suggests the launch of a game medium into a specific area of the game area;
A gaming machine characterized in that the launch suggestion notification is not executed when the second starting area is in a closed state in the third specific gaming state.